Asme Iii-1 NF 2013

2013 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code

AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
III
Rules for Construction of
Nuclear Facility Components
Division 1 Subsection NF
Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5/15/13 5:22 PM
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 ASME Boiler &

2013 Edition July 1, 2013
III
RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION
OF NUCLEAR FACILITY
COMPONENTS
Division 1 - Subsection NF
Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee

on Nuclear Power
Two Park Avenue New York, NY 10016 USA

Date of Issuance: July 1, 2013
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for Amer-
ican National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code
or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an oppor-
tunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that pro-
vides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-
at-large.
ASME does not approve, rate, or endorse any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are ex-
pressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such
rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the estab-
lished ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The endnotes in this document are part of this American National Standard.
ASME collective membership mark
Certification Mark
The above ASME symbol is registered in the U.S. Patent Office.
ASME is the trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval

system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934

Printed in the United States of America
Adopted by the Council of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914; latest edition 2013.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright 2013 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Statement of Policy on the Use of the Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Organization of Section III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii
List of Changes in Record Number Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
Cross-Referencing and Stylistic Changes in the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi
Article NF-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1100 Scope and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1110 Aspects of Construction Covered by These Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1120 Rules for Supports and Their Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1130 Boundaries of Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1200 Types of Supports and Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1210 Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1230 Welding Between Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NF-1240 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Article NF-2000 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2100 General Requirements for Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2110 Scope of Principal Terms Employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2120 Support Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2130 Certification of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NF-2140 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2150 Material Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2160 Deterioration of Material in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2170 Heat Treatment to Enhance Impact Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2180 Procedures for Heat Treatment of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2200 Material Test Coupons and Specimens for Ferritic Steel Material . . . . . . 11
NF-2210 Heat Treatment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2220 Procedure for Obtaining Test Coupons and Specimens for Quenched and
Tempered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NF-2300 Fracture Toughness Requirements for Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NF-2310 Material to Be Impact Tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NF-2320 Impact Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2330 Test Requirements and Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NF-2340 Number of Impact Tests Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NF-2350 Retests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2360 Calibration of Instruments and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2400 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2410 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2420 Required Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2430 Weld Metal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2440 Storage and Handling of Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2500 Examination and Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2510 Examination and Repair of Material Other Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2520 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Class 1 Springs . . 25
NF-2530 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Coiled Wire Rope
Used As a Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2580 Examination of Bolting Material and Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2600 Material Manufacturers Quality System Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2610 Documentation and Maintenance of Quality System Programs . . . . . . . . . 26
Article NF-3000 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3100 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3110 Loading Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3120 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3130 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NF-3140 General Design Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NF-3200 Design Rules for Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3220 Design by Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3250 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NF-3270 Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NF-3280 Design by Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NF-3300 Design Rules for LinearType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NF-3320 Design by Linear Elastic Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
NF-3330 High Cycle Fatigue Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3340 Limit Analysis Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3350 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NF-3400 Design Rules for Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
NF-3470 Design by Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3480 Procedure for Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

NF-3500 Design Rules for Component Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
NF-3550 Design by Analysis for Class 2, 3, and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
NF-3600 Design Rules for Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-3650 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Article NF-4000 Fabrication and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NF-4110 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NF-4120 Certification of Materials and Fabrication by Support Certificate Holder 84
NF-4130 Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NF-4200 Forming, Fitting, and Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
NF-4210 Cutting, Forming, and Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
NF-4220 Support Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NF-4230 Fitting and Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NF-4240 Requirements for Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NF-4300 Welding Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NF-4320 Welding Qualifications and Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NF-4330 General Requirements for Welding Procedure Qualification Tests . . . . . . 88
NF-4400 Rules Governing Making and Repairing Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NF-4410 Precautions to Be Taken Before Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NF-4420 Rules for Making Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NF-4430 Welding of Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NF-4440 Special Requirements for Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NF-4450 Repair of Weld Metal Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NF-4500 Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NF-4510 Rules for Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NF-4600 Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NF-4610 Welding Preheat and Interpass Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NF-4620 Postweld Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NF-4660 Heat Treatment of Electroslag Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4700 Requirements for Bolted Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4710 Bolting and Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4720 Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Article NF-5000 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-5100 General Requirements for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-5110 Procedures, Qualifications, and Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-5200 Required Examination of Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-5210 Examination of Class 1 Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-5220 Examination of Class 2 and MC Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NF-5230 Examination of Class 3 Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NF-5240 Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NF-5300 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NF-5320 Radiographic Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NF-5330 Ultrasonic Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-5340 Magnetic Particle Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-5350 Liquid Penetrant Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-5360 Visual Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NF-5500 Qualifications and Certification of Nondestructive Examination Personnel 105
NF-5520 Personnel Qualification, Certification, and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NF-5530 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Article NF-8000 Certificates of Authorization and Certification Documents . . . . . . . . 107
Mandatory Appendix NF-I ............................................................. 108
Mandatory Appendix NF-II Design of Single Angle Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Mandatory Appendix NF-III Energy Absorbing Support Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-A Structural Bolt Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-B Design Allowable Stresses for Plate and Shell and Linear Type Sup-
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-C Design Basis for LinearType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-D Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-E Dampers, Energy Absorbers, and Snubbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
FIGURES
NF-1132-1 Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports and the Building
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
NF-1132-2 Typical Example of Jurisdictional Boundary Between Component Support and the Building
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
NF-1214-1 Typical Standard Support Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
NF-2311(b)-1 Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC Supports . . . . . . . . . . 15
NF-2331(a)-1 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 2 and MC Support Material Other Than Bolting . . . 19
NF-2331(a)-2 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 3 support Material Other Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . 20
NF-2433.1-1 Delta Ferrite Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3226.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
NF-3226.1(a)-1 Typical Weld Details Referenced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
NF-3226.1(a)-2 Butt Welding of Plates of Unequal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NF-3256.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . 39
NF-3324.1(a)(1) Typical FrictionType Connections Using High Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NF-3332.3-1 Illustrative Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NF-3426.1-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
NF-3626(a)-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
NF-4427-1 Fillet Weld Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NF-4441-1 Weld Joint Producing ThroughThickness Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NF-II-3510 Equal Leg Single Angle Limits for F b = 0.66S y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NF-A-1311 ........................................................................... 121
NF-B-2400-1 Effective Length Factor for Various End Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
NF-B-2400-2 Alignment Chart for Effective Length of Columns in Continuous Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
TABLES
NF-2121(a)-1 Material Tables Required for Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NF-2311(b)-1 Exemptions From Impact Testing Under NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) for Mate-
rial Thickness to 21/2 in. (64 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2331(a)-1 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting 17
NF-2331(a)-2 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 2 And MC Support Material Other Than
Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NF-2331(a)-3 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 3 Support Material Other Than Bolting 17
NF-2331(a)-4 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2333-1 Required Cv Values for Bolting Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2432.1-1 Sampling of Welding Materials for Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
NF-2432.2(a)-1 Welding Material Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
NF-3131(a)-1 Reference Paragraphs for Procedures for Design of Component Supports, Piping Sup-
ports, and Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NF-3221.2-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1 Plate And Shell
Type Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NF-3225.2-1 Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Bolt Design by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
NF-3251.2-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate
And ShellType Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NF-3312.1(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC
Linear-Type Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1 Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
NF-3324.5(a)-1 Allowable Stress Limits for Class 1 LinearType Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 Effective Slip Coefficient Versus Surface Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1 Minimum Edge Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NF-3332.2-1 Classification of Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3332.3-1 Stress Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NF-3332.4-1 Allowable Stress Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NF-3611-1 Suggested Piping Support Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-4232-1 Maximum Allowable Offset in Final Butt Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NF-4622.1-1 Mandatory Requirements for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of Welds . . . . . . . . . . 95
NF-4622.4(c)-1 Alternative Holding Temperatures and Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NF-4622.7(b)-1 Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
NF-4721(a)-1 Bolt Hole Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4721(b)-1 Tolerances on Oversized Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NF-II-3532-1 B w Values for Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NF-B-4000 Factors of Safety for a Material With a Low Value of S u /S y Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NF-C-4000 Design Basis for LinearType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NF-D-1320-1 Clamp Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
NF-D-1330-1 Local Installation Tolerances for Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ENDNOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13 LIST OF SECTIONS
SECTIONS
I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II Materials
Part A Ferrous Material Specifications
Part B Nonferrous Material Specifications
Part C Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
Part D Properties (Customary)
Part D Properties (Metric)
III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components

Subsection NCA General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
Appendices
Division 1
Subsection NB Class 1 Components
Subsection NC Class 2 Components
Subsection ND Class 3 Components
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Subsection NE Class MC Components

Subsection NF Supports
Subsection NG Core Support Structures
Subsection NH Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
Division 2 Code for Concrete Containments
Division 3 Containments for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level Radioactive
Material and Waste
Division 5 High Temperature Reactors
IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V Nondestructive Examination
VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

Division 1
Division 2 Alternative Rules
Division 3 Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks

INTERPRETATIONS
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretation of technical aspects of the Code.
Interpretations of the Code are posted in January and July at http://cstools.asme.org/interpretations.cfm. Any Interpre-
tations issued during the previous two calendar years are included with the publication of the applicable Section of the
Code. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Section III Appendices are included with Subsection NCA.
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules
for materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in
the appropriate 2013 Code Cases book: Boilers and Pressure Vessels or Nuclear Components. Supplements will be
sent automatically to the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2015 Code.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13 FOREWORD
(This Foreword is provided as an aid to the user and is not part of the rules of this Code.)
In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to for-
mulate standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding and Brazing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
Where reference is made to the Committee in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee's function is to establish rules of safety relating only to pressure integrity, which govern the
construction* of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nu-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
clear components and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their
intent. This Code does not address other safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport
tanks, or nuclear components, or the inservice inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code
should refer to the pertinent codes, standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than
those relating to pressure integrity. Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of
practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or
external operating environments. In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers,
and inspectors of pressure vessels. The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and prop-
erty, and to provide a margin for deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advance-
ments in design and materials and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activ-
ities and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those
aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot
replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgement refers to technical
judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must be
consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific
prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and
expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying with
Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither
requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements
of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they
are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of these programs to
their design.
*
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, cer-
tification, and pressure relief.
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any pro-
prietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer's freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be pre-
sented to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation by
ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted
to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://cstools.asme.org/csconnect/public/in-
dex.cfm?PublicReview=Revisions to invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval
by ASME, revisions are published at regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the Commit-
tee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of an ASME Certification Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the fem-
inine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE CERTIFICATION
MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition of or-
ganizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with the re-
quirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that have been con-
structed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of Author-
ization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the Certification Mark for the benefit of the users, the
enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the Certification Mark who comply with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers does not approve, certify, rate, or endorse any item, construction, or activity and there shall be no state-
ments or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the Certification Mark and/or a Certificate of
Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities are built (produced or per-
formed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
or meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. An ASME corporate logo shall not be used
by any organization other than ASME.
The Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However,
facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an association or a
society, or by a holder of the Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that clearly spe-
cified items will carry the Certification Mark. General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturers items are con-
structed under the rules.
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO

IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official Certification Mark
described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as ASME, ASME Standard, or any other marking including ASME or the Certification Mark shall not
be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply that
all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully com-
plying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.
13 SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES
1 INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the committees. See
Guideline on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Parts C and D
for additional requirements for requests involving adding new materials to the Code. Technical inquiries include requests
for revisions or additions to the Code rules, requests for Code Cases, and requests for Code Interpretations, as described
below.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, address administra-
tive requirements, incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code rules. Code Cases are written as a
question and reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code Cases pre-
scribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that not all jur-
isdictions or owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code Cases are:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit the use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative rules prior to incorporation directly into the Code
(3) Code Interpretations. Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing rules in the Code, and
are also presented in question and reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements. In cases where ex-
isting Code text does not fully convey the meaning that was intended, and revision of the rules is required to support an
interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued and the Code will be revised.
(b) The Code rules, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the committees are not to be considered as
approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the free-
dom of manufacturers, constructors, or owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that conforms
to the Code rules.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with these provisions or that do not provide sufficient information for a committees
full understanding may result in the request being returned to the inquirer with no action.
2 INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to a committee shall include:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) revision of present Code rules
(2) new or additional Code rules
(3) Code Case
(4) Code Interpretation
(b) Background. Provide the information needed for the committees understanding of the inquiry, being sure to include
reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), paragraphs, figures, and tables. Pre-
ferably, provide a copy of the specific referenced portions of the Code.
(c) Presentations. The inquirer may desire or be asked to attend a meeting of the committee to make a formal presenta-
tion or to answer questions from the committee members with regard to the inquiry. Attendance at a committee meeting
shall be at the expense of the inquirer. The inquirers attendance or lack of attendance at a meeting shall not be a basis for
acceptance or rejection of the inquiry by the committee.
3 CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS
Requests for Code revisions or additions shall provide the following:
(a) Proposed Revisions or Additions. For revisions, identify the rules of the Code that require revision and submit a copy
of the appropriate rules as they appear in the Code, marked up with the proposed revision. For additions, provide the
recommended wording referenced to the existing Code rules.
(b) Statement of Need. Provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. Provide background information to support the revision or addition, including any data or
changes in technology that form the basis for the request that will allow the committee to adequately evaluate the pro-
posed revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted as appropriate. When applicable,
identify any pertinent paragraph in the Code that would be affected by the revision or addition and identify paragraphs
in the Code that reference the paragraphs that are to be revised or added.
4 CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information similar to that defined in 3(b)
and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project underway or imminent,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
new procedure, etc.) must be defined and it must be confirmed that the request is in connection with equipment that will
bear the Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The proposed Code Case should identify the
Code Section and Division, and be written as a Question and a Reply in the same format as existing Code Cases. Requests
for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and Addenda (if applicable) to which the proposed Code
Case applies.
5 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations shall provide the following:
(1) Inquiry. Provide a condensed and precise question, omitting superfluous background information and, when pos-
sible, composed in such a way that a yes or a no Reply, with brief provisos if needed, is acceptable. The question should
be technically and editorially correct.
(2) Reply. Provide a proposed Reply that will clearly and concisely answer the Inquiry question. Preferably, the Reply
should be yes or no, with brief provisos if needed.
(3) Background Information. Provide any background information that will assist the committee in understanding
the proposed Inquiry and Reply.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations must be limited to an interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or a
Code Case. The committee cannot consider consulting type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to deter-
mine compliance with Code requirements;
(2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material se-
lection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation;
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements.
6 SUBMITTALS
Submittals to and responses from the committees shall meet the following:
(a) Submittal. Inquiries from Code users shall be in English and preferably be submitted in typewritten form; however,
legible handwritten inquiries will also be considered. They shall include the name, address, telephone number, fax num-
ber, and e-mail address, if available, of the inquirer and be mailed to the following address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
As an alternative, inquiries may be submitted via e-mail to: SecretaryBPV@asme.org.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate committee shall acknowledge receipt of each properly prepared inquiry
and shall provide a written response to the inquirer upon completion of the requested action by the committee.
13 PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
January 1, 2013
TECHNICAL OVERSIGHT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (TOMC) MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP

J. G. Feldstein, Chair J. F. Henry H. N. Patel, Chair G. Nair
T. P. Pastor, Vice Chair G. G. Karcher J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary J. D. Reynolds
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary W. M. Lundy J. G. Hungerbuhler, Jr.
R. W. Barnes J. R. Mackay
R. J. Basile U. R. Miller
J. E. Batey W. E. Norris
T. L. Bedeaux G. C. Park
D. L. Berger M. D. Rana CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
D. A. Canonico B. W. Roberts D. A. Douin Ohio, Secretary K. T. Lau Alberta, Canada
A. Chaudouet S. C. Roberts J. T. Amato Minnesota B. E. Logan Massachusetts
R. P. Deubler F. J. Schaaf, Jr. B. P. Anthony Rhode Island W. McGivney New York
D. A. Douin A. Selz R. D. Austin Arizona S. V. Nelson Colorado
R. E. Gimple B. F. Shelley G. Baumgardner Michigan C. C. Novak Illinois
M. Gold W. J. Sperko W. K. Brigham New Hampshire T. Oda Washington
T. E. Hansen R. W. Swayne C. W. Bryan Tennessee W. R. Owens Louisiana
M. A. Burns Florida R. P. Pate Alabama
J. H. Burpee Maine R. L. Perry Nevada
C. B. Cantrell Nebraska J. F. Porcella West Virginia
D. C. Cook California D. C. Price Yukon Territories,
B. J. Crawford Georgia Canada
E. L. Creaser New Brunswick, D. Pringnitz Oklahoma
Canada R. S. Pucek Wisconsin
W. E. Crider, Jr. Vermont
R. D. Reetz North Dakota
P. L. Dodge Nova Scotia, Canada
C. F. Reyes California
S. Donovan Northwest
T. W. Rieger Manitoba, Canada
Territories, Canada
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE) K. A. Rudolph Hawaii
D. Eastman Newfoundland and
M. J. Ryan Illinois
F. P. Barton M. H. Jawad Labrador, Canada
M. H. Sansone New York
R. J. Cepluch A. J. Justin B. Fierheller Manitoba, Canada
T. M. Cullen W. G. Knecht C. Fulton Alaska T. S. Scholl Ontario, Canada
W. D. Doty J. LeCoff G. M. Given, Jr. North Carolina G. Scribner Missouri
J. R. Farr T. G. McCarty M. Graham Oregon C. S. Selinger Saskatchewan,
G. E. Feigel G. C. Millman R. J. Handy Kentucky Canada
R. C. Griffin R. A. Moen D. R. Hannon Arkansas R. Spiker North Carolina
O. F. Hedden R. F. Reedy, Sr. E. G. Hilton Virginia T. Stewart Montana
I. M. Hinkle South Dakota R. K. Sturm Utah
E. Hurd British Colombia, S. R. Townsend Prince Edward
Canada Island, Canada
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
D. T. Jagger Ohio W. Vallance Michigan
D. J. Jenkins Kansas M. J. Verhagen Wisconsin
A. P. Jones Texas M. Washington New Jersey
L. R. Kline Pennsylvania K. L. Watson Mississippi
M. R. Klosterman Iowa R. W. Whitman, Jr. Delaware
K. J. Kraft Maryland D. J. Willis Indiana
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
J. G. Feldstein, Chair J. F. Henry
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP
T. P. Pastor, Vice Chair U. R. Miller
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary V. Felix C. Minu
G. C. Park
R. W. Barnes Y.-G. Kim T. S. G. Narayannen
M. D. Rana
J. E. Batey S. H. Leong Y.-W. Park
T. L. Bedeaux B. F. Shelley W. Lin R. Reynaga
D. L. Berger W. J. Sperko O. F. Manafa P. Williamson
PROJECT TEAM ON HYDROGEN TANKS Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV I)
A. P. Amato, Staff Secretary E. Upitis R. E. McLaughlin, Chair D. Tompkins

F. L. Brown C. T. I. Webster T. E. Hansen, Vice Chair S. V. Torkildson
D. A. Canonico W. Yoru F. Massi, Secretary D. E. Tuttle
D. C. Cook R. C. Biel, Contributing Member P. D. Edwards M. Wadkinson
J. Coursen M. Duncan, Contributing Member W. L. Lowry R. V. Wielgoszinski
J. W. Felbaum E. M. Ortman D. J. Willis
D. R. Frikken, Contributing Member
N. L. Newhouse J. T. Pillow C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member
L. E. Hayden, Jr., Contributing
A. S. Olivares
Member
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
K. T. Lau, Contributing Member
B. F. Shelley
J. R. Sims, Jr. K. Nibur, Contributing Member
K. Oyamada, Contributing Member Subgroup on Heat Recovery Steam Generators (BPV I)
N. Sirosh
J. H. Smith C. H. Rivkin, Contributing Member T. E. Hansen, Chair C. T. McDaris
S. Staniszewski C. San Marchi, Contributing S. V. Torkildson, Secretary B. W. Moore
T. Tahara Member J. L. Arnold Y. Oishi
D. W. Treadwell B. Somerday, Contributing Member J. P. Bell
E. M. Ortman
B. G. Carson
L. R. Douglas R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. Gertz D. Tompkins
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
G. B. Komora B. C. Turczynski
COMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (BPV I)

D. L. Berger, Chair F. Massi
R. E. McLaughlin, Vice Chair P. A. Molvie Subgroup on Locomotive Boilers (BPV I)
U. D'Urso, Staff Secretary Y. Oishi L. Moedinger, Chair G. M. Ray
J. L. Arnold E. M. Ortman S. M. Butler, Secretary J. E. Rimmasch
S. W. Cameron J. T. Pillow P. Boschan
D. A. Canonico B. W. Roberts R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. Braun
K. K. Coleman R. D. Schueler, Jr. R. B. Stone
R. C. Franzen, Jr.
P. D. Edwards J. M. Tanzosh M. W. Westland
D. W. Griner
P. Fallouey D. E. Tuttle S. D. Jackson W. L. Withuhn
J. G. Feldstein R. V. Wielgoszinski M. A. Janssen R. Yuill
G. W. Galanes D. J. Willis S. A. Lee R. D. Reetz, Contributing Member
T. E. Hansen G. Ardizzoia, Delegate
J. F. Henry H. Michael, Delegate
J. S. Hunter D. N. French, Honorary Member
W. L. Lowry T. C. McGough, Honorary Member
J. R. MacKay R. L. Williams, Honorary Member Subgroup on Materials (BPV I)
G. W. Galanes, Chair O. X. Li
K. K. Coleman, Vice Chair J. R. MacKay
J. S. Hunter, Secretary F. Masuyama
S. H. Bowes
D. W. Rahoi
D. A. Canonico
Subgroup on Design (BPV I) P. Fallouey B. W. Roberts
K. L. Hayes J. M. Tanzosh
P. A. Molvie, Chair B. W. Moore
J. Vattappilly, Secretary J. F. Henry J. Vattappilly
D. A. Olson
D. I. Anderson
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
P. Dhorajia
S. V. Torkildson
J. P. Glaspie
G. B. Komora M. Wadkinson Subgroup on Piping (BPV I)
J. C. Light C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member
D. Tompkins, Chair G. W. Galanes
B. Mollitor, Secretary T. E. Hansen
D. L. Berger T. G. Kosmatka
J. A. Byers W. L. Lowry
P. D. Edwards F. Massi
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV I)
J. T. Pillow, Chair J. Hainsworth
J. L. Arnold, Secretary T. E. Hansen Subgroup on Solar Boilers (BPV I)
G. W. Galanes, Secretary C. T. McDaris
D. L. Berger J. S. Hunter, Chair J. C. Light
R. E. McLaughlin
S. W. Cameron S. V. Torkildson, Secretary Y. Magen
K. Craver R. J. Newell G. W. Galanes F. Massi
G. T. Dunker Y. Oishi R. E. Hearne M. J. Slater
P. F. Gilston R. V. Wielgoszinski D. J. Koza J. T. Trimble, Jr.
Task Group on Modernization of BPVC Section I Subgroup on International Material Specifications (BPV II)
D. I. Anderson, Chair R. E. McLaughlin A. Chaudouet, Chair M. Ishikawa

U. DUrso, Staff Secretary P. A. Molvie O. X. Li, Vice Chair W. M. Lundy
J. L. Arnold T. F. Miskell, Secretary A. R. Nywening
E. M. Ortman
S. W. Cameron S. W. Cameron
J. T. Pillow R. D. Schueler, Jr.
G. W. Galanes D. A. Canonico
J. P. Glaspie B. W. Roberts P. Fallouey E. Upitis
J. F. Henry D. E. Tuttle A. F. Garbolevsky O. Oldani, Delegate
D. O. Henry H. Lorenz, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (BPV II)

R. C. Sutherlin, Chair L. Paul
COMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (BPV II)
H. Anada D. W. Rahoi
J. F. Henry, Chair M. J. Slater J. Calland W. Ren
D. W. Rahoi, Vice Chair R. C. Sutherlin D. Denis E. Shapiro
N. Lobo, Staff Secretary R. W. Swindeman M. H. Gilkey M. H. Skillingberg
F. Abe J. M. Tanzosh J. F. Grubb D. Tyler
A. Appleton D. Tyler A. Heino R. Zawierucha
J. Cameron D. Kwon, Delegate M. Katcher W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing
D. A. Canonico O. Oldani, Delegate J. Kissell Member
A. Chaudouet W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing T. M. Malota H. D. Bushfield, Contributing
P. Fallouey Member J. A. McMaster Member
J. R. Foulds H. D. Bushfield, Contributing
D. W. Gandy Member
M. H. Gilkey M. L. Nayyar, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Physical Properties (BPV II)
M. Gold E. G. Nisbett, Contributing Member
J. F. Grubb E. Upitis, Contributing Member J. F. Grubb, Chair P. Fallouey
J. A. Hall T. M. Cullen, Honorary Member H. D. Bushfield E. Shapiro
M. Katcher W. D. Doty, Honorary Member D. Denis
F. Masuyama W. D. Edsall, Honorary Member
R. K. Nanstad G. C. Hsu, Honorary Member
B. W. Roberts R. A. Moen, Honorary Member Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (BPV II)
E. Shapiro C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Honorary Member
M. H. Skillingberg A. W. Zeuthen, Honorary Member J. M. Tanzosh, Chair K. Kimura
M. J. Slater, Secretary F. Masuyama
F. Abe D. W. Rahoi
H. Anada B. W. Roberts
D. A. Canonico
J. P. Shingledecker
A. Di Rienzo
P. Fallouey R. W. Swindeman
Subgroup on External Pressure (BPV II) T. P. Vassallo, Jr.
J. R. Foulds
R. W. Mikitka, Chair M. H. Jawad M. Gold W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing
D. L. Kurle, Vice Chair C. R. Thomas J. A. Hall Member
J. A. A. Morrow, Secretary J. F. Henry H. Murakami, Contributing Member
M. Wadkinson
L. F. Campbell
D. S. Griffin M. Katcher, Contributing Member
J. F. Grubb C. H. Sturgeon, Contributing Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (BPV II & BPV IX)
J. R. Harris III Member
W. F. Newell, Jr., Chair J. F. Henry
S. H. Bowes D. W. Rahoi
K. K. Coleman B. W. Roberts
P. D. Flenner
J. P. Shingledecker
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy W. J. Sperko
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (BPV II)
M. Gold J. P. Swezy, Jr.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A. Appleton, Chair W. C. Mack K. L. Hayes J. M. Tanzosh

S. Hochreiter, Secretary J. K. Mahaney
B. M. Dingman A. S. Melilli
M. J. Dosdourian E. G. Nisbett
Working Group on Materials Database (BPV II)
P. Fallouey K. E. Orie
J. D. Fritz J. Shick R. W. Swindeman, Chair B. W. Roberts
T. Graham E. Upitis N. Lobo, Staff Secretary R. C. Sutherlin
J. M. Grocki J. D. Wilson F. Abe D. Andrei, Contributing Member
J. F. Grubb P. Wittenbach J. R. Foulds W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
K. M. Hottle R. Zawierucha M. Gold T. Lazar, Contributing Member
D. S. Janikowski R. M. Davison, Contributing J. F. Henry D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
L. J. Lavezzi Member M. Katcher W. Ren, Contributing Member
China International Working Group (BPV II) Subgroup on Component Design (BPV III)
T. Xu, Secretary G. Yang R. S. Hill III, Chair R. J. Masterson

W. Fang R. Ye T. M. Adams, Vice Chair D. E. Matthews
S. Huo L. Yin S. Pellet, Secretary W. N. McLean
S. Li H. Zhang G. A. Antaki J. C. Minichiello
M. Lu X.-H Zhang S. Asada T. Nagata
B. Shou Yingkai Zhang C. W. Bruny A. N. Nguyen
S. Tan Yong Zhang J. R. Cole E. L. Pleins
C. Wang Q. Zhao A. A. Dermenjian I. Saito
X. Wang S. Zhao R. P. Deubler G. C. Slagis
Z. Wu R. Zhou P. Hirschberg J. D. Stevenson
F. Yang J. Zou R. I. Jetter J. P. Tucker
R. B. Keating K. R. Wichman
H. Kobayashi C. Wilson
R. A. Ladefian J. Yang
K. A. Manoly D. F. Landers, Contributing Member
Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (BPV III)

COMMITTEE ON CONSTRUCTION OF NUCLEAR FACILITY R. J. Masterson, Chair A. N. Nguyen
COMPONENTS (III) U. S. Bandyopadhyay, Secretary I. Saito
K. Avrithi J. R. Stinson
R. W. Barnes, Chair M. N. Mitchell
T. H. Baker T. G. Terryah
J. R. Cole, Vice Chair M. Morishita
F. J. Birch G. Z. Tokarski
A. Byk, Staff Secretary D. K. Morton
R. P. Deubler C.-I. Wu
T. Adams T. Nagata
A. Appleton R. F. Reedy, Sr.
W. H. Borter I. Saito
T. D. Burchell C. T. Smith
R. P. Deubler W. K. Sowder, Jr. Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (BPV III)
A. C. Eberhardt W. J. Sperko
B. A. Erler J. Yang, Chair H. S. Mehta
J. D. Stevenson
G. M. Foster J. F. Kielb, Secretary M. D. Snyder
K. R. Wichman
R. S. Hill III F. G. Al-Chammas A. Tsirigotis
C. S. Withers
W. Hoffelner D. Keck J. T. Land, Contributing Member
Y. H. Choi, Delegate
R. M. Jessee
R. I. Jetter T. Ius, Delegate
R. B. Keating H.-T. Wang, Delegate
G. H. Koo C. C. Kim, Contributing Member
V. Kostarev E. B. Branch, Honorary Member Working Group on Design Methodology (SG-D) (BPV III)
W. C. LaRochelle G. D. Cooper, Honorary Member
R. B. Keating, Chair D. H. Roarty
K. A. Manoly W. D. Doty, Honorary Member
S. D. Snow, Secretary E. A. Rodriguez
D. E. Matthews D. F. Landers, Honorary Member
K. Avrithi P. K. Shah
W. N. McLean R. A. Moen, Honorary Member
R. D. Blevins J. D. Stevenson
J. C. Minichiello C. J. Pieper, Honorary Member
M. R. Breach A. Tsirigotis
D. L. Caldwell
S. Wang
H. T. Harrison III
T. M. Wiger
P. Hirschberg
M. Kassar K. Wright
J. Kim J. Yang
H. Kobayashi M. K. Au-Yang, Contributing
J. F. McCabe Member
A. N. Nguyen D. F. Landers, Contributing Member
W. D. Reinhardt W. S. Lapay, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel and High-Level
Waste Transport Packagings (BPV III)
G. M. Foster, Chair D. W. Lewis
G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair P. E. McConnell
Working Group on Design of Division 3 Containments
D. K. Morton, Secretary A. B. Meichler
(SG-D) (BPV III)
G. Abramczyk R. E. Nickell
D. J. Ammerman E. L. Pleins E. L. Pleins, Chair D. K. Morton
G. Bjorkman T. Saegusa D. J. Ammerman C. J. Temus
W. H. Borter N. M. Simpson G. Bjorkman I. D. McInnes, Contributing Member
G. R. Cannell R. H. Smith S. Horowitz R. E. Nickell, Contributing Member
R. S. Hill III J. D. Stevenson D. W. Lewis H. P. Shrivastava, Contributing
S. Horowitz C. J. Temus J. C. Minichiello Member
Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (BPV III) Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (BPV III)
G. A. Antaki, Chair J. F. McCabe W. Culp, Chair J. E. Nestell
G. Z. Tokarski, Secretary J. C. Minichiello B. D. Frew, Secretary W. Z. Novak
T. M. Adams I.-K. Nam K. Avrithi M. S. Shelton
C. Basavaraju E. R. Nelson W. J. Heilker Y. H. Choi, Delegate
J. Catalano A. N. Nguyen R. S. Hill III
F. Claeys M. S. Sills
J. R. Cole
G. C. Slagis
R. G. Gilada Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV III & 3C)
N. C. Sutherland
M. A. Gray
E. A. Wais R. P. McIntyre, Chair W. C. LaRochelle
R. W. Haupt
P. Hirschberg C.-I. Wu L. M. Plante, Secretary M. R. Minick
M. Kassar D. F. Landers, Contributing Member V. Apostolescu E. C. Renaud
J. Kawahata J. J. Martinez, Contributing Member A. Appleton D. J. Roszman
R. B. Keating R. D. Patel, Contributing Member J. R. Berry C. T. Smith
V. Kostarev N. J. Shah, Contributing Member J. V. Gardiner W. K. Sowder, Jr.
Y. Liu E. C. Rodabaugh, Honorary Member G. Gratti G. E. Szabatura
J. W. Highlands T. G. Terryah
G. L. Hollinger D. M. Vickery
G. V. Imbro C. S. Withers
K. A. Kavanagh H. Michael, Delegate
Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design (SG-D) (BPV III)
R. S. Hill III, Chair A. McNeill III
N. A. Palm, Secretary M. Morishita Working Group on Duties and Responsibilities (SG-GR) (BPV III)
T. Asayama P. J. O'Regan J. V. Gardiner, Chair K. A. Kavanagh
K. Avrithi
I. Saito G. L. Hollinger, Secretary L. M. Plante
B. M. Ayyub
A. Tsirigotis J. R. Berry
M. R. Graybeal D. J. Roszman
R. M. Wilson Y. Diaz-Castillo
D. O. Henry S. Scardigno
E. L. Farrow
S. D. Kulat D. Hofer, Contributing Member
G. Gratti T. G. Terryah
Working Group on Quality Assurance, Certification, and Stamping

Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (BPV III) (SG-GR) (BPV III)
R. A. Ladefian, Chair M. Higuchi C. T. Smith, Chair M. R. Minick

P. W. Behnke J. W. Leavitt C. S. Withers, Secretary R. B. Patel
R. E. Cornman, Jr. S. Mauvais V. Apostolescu E. C. Renaud
M. D. Eftychiou R. A. Patrick A. Appleton J. Rogers
A. Fraser J. Sulley S. Bell W. K. Sowder, Jr.
M. A. Gaydon R. Udo B. K. Bobo J. F. Strunk
R. Ghanbari A. G. Washburn S. M. Goodwin M. F. Sullivan
J. W. Highlands G. E. Szabatura
R. P. McIntyre D. M. Vickery
Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (BPV III)

Special Working Group on Regulatory Interface (BPV III)
J. P. Tucker, Chair C. A. Mizer
G. V. Imbro, Chair J. A. Schulz
J. O'Callaghan, Secretary K. E. Reid II S. Bell, Secretary R. R. Stevenson
G. A. Jolly
S. N. Shields A. Cardillo
J. Klein D. Terao
H. R. Sonderegger A. A. Dermenjian
W. N. McLean M. L. Wilson
K. Matsunaga
T. A. McMahon P. Vock
D. E. Matthews R. A. Yonekawa
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III)

Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (BPV III)
R. M. Jessee, Chair M. Lau
D. E. Matthews, Chair D. Keck S. Hunter, Secretary H. Murakami
R. M. Wilson, Secretary O.-S. Kim W. H. Borter J. Ossmann
C. Basavaraju K. Matsunaga G. R. Cannell C. Pearce
C. W. Bruny R. H. Davis N. M. Simpson
P. K. Shah
J. V. Gregg, Jr. G. M. Foster W. J. Sperko
C. Turylo
W. J. Heilker B. D. Frew J. R. Stinson
W. T. Jessup, Jr. D. Vlaicu G. B. Georgiev J. F. Strunk
A. Kalnins W. F. Weitze S. E. Gingrich K. B. Stuckey
R. B. Keating T. Yamazaki C. C. Kim H. Michael, Delegate
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,
Subgroup on Pressure Relief (BPV III) Special Working Group for New Advanced Light Water Reactor Plant
Construction Issues (BPV III)
J. F. Ball, Chair D. G. Thibault
A. L. Szeglin E. L. Pleins, Chair J. C. Minichiello
M. C. Scott, Secretary D. W. Sandusky
A. Cardillo C. A. Sanna
B. Gilligan
R. R. Stevenson
J. Honcharik
E. R. Willis
G. V. Imbro
Y. Katsura M. L. Wilson
Executive Committee on Strategy and Project Management O.S Kim J. Yan
(BPV III, Divisions 1 and 2) M. Kris J. A. Schulz, Contributing Member
J. R. Cole, Chair G. H. Koo
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary K. A. Manoly
T. Adams D. K. Morton
R. W. Barnes J. Ramirez Subgroup on Editing and Review (BPV III)
B. K. Bobo R. F. Reedy, Sr.
N. Broom C. T. Smith D. K. Morton, Chair L. M. Plante
B. A. Erler W. K. Sowder, Jr. R. L. Bratton R. F. Reedy, Sr.
C. M. Faidy Y. Urabe R. P. Deubler
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
R. S. Hill III C. S. Withers A. C. Eberhardt
E. V. Imbro C. Yan R. I. Jetter J. D. Stevenson
R. M. Jessee M. F. Sullivan, Contributing J. C. Minichiello C. Wilson
R. B. Keating Member
Subgroup on Management Resources (BPV III)

R. M. Jessee, Chair J. M. Lyons
J. F. Bernardo B. McGlone
China International Working Group (BPV III)
L. C. Cadwallader A. A. Mostala
J. Yan, Chair G. Sun J. B. Carr M. Osterfoss
W. Tang, Vice Chair G. Tang M. Cusick J. D. Pasek
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary Y. Tu H. S. Farrow C. Pearce
Y. He, Secretary Y. Wang S. Fincher J. Rogers
H. Ge H. Wu J. Fink B. S. Sandhu
Z. Han X. Wu L. Hartless V. Suri
J. Jian Z. Wu M. A. Hayes, Jr. Z. Taylor
Y. Jing S. Xue M. Hokazono J. Webb, Jr.
F. Kai Z. Yan B. N. Juarez R. A. West
D. Kang C. Ye Y. S. Kim R. Z. Ziegler
Y. Lee Z. Yin
X. Li S. Zaozhan
B. Liang G. Zhang
H. Lin K. Zhang
Working Group on International Meetings (BPV III)
S. Lin W. Zhang
J. Liu G. Zhao R. S. Hill III, Chair G. M. Foster
S. Liu W. Zhao A. Byk, Staff Secretary M. N. Mitchell
W. Liu Y. Zhong T. D. Burchell R. F. Reedy, Sr.
K. Mao Z. Zhong J. R. Cole C. A. Sanna
R. L. Crane C. T. Smith
Subgroup on Polyethylene Pipe (BPV III)

Korea International Working Group (BPV III)
T. M. Adams, Chair K. Lively
G. H. Koo, Chair B. Lee D. Burwell, Secretary M. Martin
H. S. Byun D. Lee W. I. Adams E. W. McElroy
J.-Y. Hong S. Lee C. Basavaraju D. P. Munson
N.-S. Huh D. J. Lim S. J. Boros T. M. Musto
S. S. Hwang J. M. Craig J. E. OSullivan
I.-K. Nam
C. Jang E. L. Farrow F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
B. Noh
I. I. Jeong E. M. Focht H. E. Svetlik
C.-K. Oh
H. J. Kim M. Golliet M. Troughton
J. Kim C. Park A. N. Haddad D. M. Vickery
O.-S. Kim J.-S. Park P. Krishnaswamy Z. J. Zhou
Y.-B. Kim S. Song M. Lashley L. J. Petroff, Alternate
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,
D. Kwon O. Yoo E. Lever S. Sandstrum, Alternate

Working Group on Research and Development Subgroup on Fusion Energy Devices (BPV III)
A. N. Haddad, Chair K. Lively W. K. Sowder, Jr., Chair S. Lee

W. I. Adams K. A. Manoly D. Andrei, Staff Secretary G. Li
A. Amato L. Mizell D. J. Roszman, Secretary X. Li
S. J. Boros D. P. Munson R. W. Barnes
P. Mokaria
J. M. Craig M. Higuchi
T. M. Musto S. J. Salvador
E. M. Focht G. Holtmeier
F. J. Schaaf, Jr. M. Trosen
R. M. Jessee K. A. Kavanagh
D. Keller M. Troughton H. J. Kim I. J. Zatz
M. Lamborn Z. J. Zhou
S. Lefler L. J. Petroff, Alternate
E. Lever S. Sandstrum, Alternate Subgroup on High-Temperature Reactors (BPV III)
M. Morishita, Chair W. Hoffelner
R. I. Jetter, Vice Chair G. H. Koo
Working Group on Nondestructive Examination and Fusion of HDPE T.-L. Sham, Secretary D. K. Morton
(BPV III) N. Broom J. E. Nestell
T. D. Burchell N. N. Ray
M. Lashley, Chair R. M. Jessee
W. H. Borter M. D. Moles
J. M. Craig F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
Working Group on High Temperature Liquid-Cooled Reactors (BPV
N. Y. Faransso J. C. Spanner, Jr.
III)
N. A. Finney Z. J. Zhou
J. F. Halley D. K. Zimmerman T.-L. Sham, Chair R. I. Jetter
T. Asayama, Secretary G. H. Koo
R. W. Barnes M. Li
P. Carter S. Majumdar
Working Group on High Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactors (BPV III) C. M. Faidy M. Morishita
J. E. Nestell, Chair T. R. Lupold W. Hoffelner J. E. Nestell
N. Broom A. B. Hull D. K. Williams
S. N. Malik
T. D. Burchell D. L. Marriott
R. S. Hill III
D. K. Morton
W. Hoffelner Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (BPV III)
E. V. Imbro T.-L. Sham
Y. Tachibana R. I. Jetter, Chair A. B. Hull
R. I. Jetter
T.-L. Sham, Secretary M. H. Jawad
Y. W. Kim T. Yuhara
J. J. Abou-Hanna G. H. Koo
T. Asayama W. J. Koves
C. Becht IV M. Li
Subgroup on Graphite Core Components (BPV III) F. W. Brust S. Majumdar
P. Carter D. L. Marriott
T. D. Burchell, Chair S. T. Gonczy J. F. Cervenka T. E. McGreevy
M. N. Mitchell, Vice Chair M. P. Hindley D. S. Griffin J. E. Nestell
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary Y. Katoh B. F. Hantz W. J. O'Donnell
R. L. Bratton, Secretary N. N. Nemeth W. Hoffelner R. W. Swindeman
T. Albers T. Oku
A. Appleton J. Ossmann
S.-H. Chi M. Roemmler Working Group on High Temperature Flaw Evaluation (BPV III)
A. Covac N. Salstrom
M. W. Davies T. Shibata F. W. Brust, Chair D. L. Rudland
S. W. Doms M. Srinivasan N. Broom P. J. Rush
S. F. Duffy A. G. Steer P. Carter D.-J. Shim
B. D. Frew S. Wendel W. Hoffelner S. X. Xu
O. Gelineau S. Yu S. N. Malik
Working Group on Allowable Stress Criteria (BPV III)

Subgroup on Industry Experience for New Plants (BPV III & BPV XI)
R. W. Swindeman, Chair J. E. Nestel
G. M. Foster, Chair O.-S. Kim M. Li, Secretary W. Ren
J. T. Lindberg, Chair K. Matsunaga J. R. Foulds B. W. Roberts
H. L. Gustin, Secretary D. E. Matthews K. Kimura T.-I Sham
V. L. Armentrout R. E. McLaughlin S. N. Malik
T. L. Chan J. Ossmann
D. R. Graham E. L. Pleins
P. J. Hennessey D. W. Sandusky
Working Group on Analysis Methods (BPV III)
D. O. Henry D. M. Swann
J. Honcharik T. Tsuruta P. Carter, Chair S. Krishnamurthy
E. V. Imbro E. R. Willis M. R. Beach T.-I Sham
C. G. Kim S. M. Yee R. I. Jetter D. K. Williams
Working Group on Creep-Fatigue and Negligible Creep (BPV III) Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Construction (BPV III)
T. Asayama, Chair G. H. Koo M. H. Jawad, Chair R. I. Jetter

M. Li, Secretary S. N. Malik B. Mollitor, Secretary S. Krishnamurthy
F. W. Brust T.-I Sham D. I. Anderson D. L. Marriott
R. I. Jetter R. G. Brown M. N. Mitchell
J. P. Glaspie D. K. Morton
B. F. Hantz C. Nadarajah
Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (BPV III)
W. J. O'Donnell, Chair G. Kharshafdjian
S. A. Adams S. Majumdar Subcommittee on General Requirements (BPV III)
G. S. Chakrabarti S. N. Malik W. C. LaRochelle, Chair L. M. Plante
T. M. Damiani R. Nayal A. Appleton, Secretary C. T. Smith
P. R. Donavin D. H. Roarty J. V. Gardiner D. M. Vickery
S. R. Gosselin M. S. Shelton R. P. McIntyre
R. J. Gurdal G. Taxacher
C. F. Heberling II A. Tsirigotis
C. E. Hinnant K. Wright
JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR
D. P. Jones H. H. Ziada
NUCLEAR SERVICE (BPV 3C)
A. C. Eberhardt, Chair N. Orbovic
Working Group on Environmental Fatigue Evaluation Methods C. T. Smith, Vice Chair B. B. Scott
(BPV III) A. Byk, Staff Secretary J. D. Stevenson
N. Alchaar J. F. Strunk
T. M. Adams H. S. Mehta J. F. Artuso T. Tonyan
S. Asada J.-S. Park C. J. Bang T. J. Ahl, Contributing Member
K. Avrithi V. S. Ready F. Farzam T. D. Al-Shawaf, Contributing
J. R. Cole P. S. Ghosal Member
D. H. Roarty
C. M. Faidy M. F. Hessheimer B. A. Erler, Contributing Member
I. Saito
T. D. Gilman B. D. Hovis J. Gutierrez, Contributing Member
S. R. Gosselin D. Vlaicu
T. C. Inman T. E. Johnson, Contributing Member
M. A. Gray W. F. Weitze
O. Jovall T. Muraki, Contributing Member
Y. He K. Wright N.-H. Lee M. R. Senecal, Contributing Member
J. McLean M. K. Thumm, Contributing
J. Munshi Member
Subcommittee on Design (BPV III)
R. P. Deubler, Chair R. A. Ladefian
G. L. Hollinger, Secretary K. A. Manoly Working Group on Design (BPV 3C)
T. M. Adams
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R. J. Masterson J. Munshi, Chair T. C. Inman

G. A. Antaki D. E. Matthews N. Alchaar O. Jovall
R. L. Bratton
M. N. Mitchell S. Bae
R. S. Hill III N.-H Lee
W. J. ODonnell L. J. Colarusso
P. Hirschberg J. D. Stevenson
E. L. Pleins J. Colinares
M. H. Jawad T. E. Johnson, Contributing Member
J. P. Tucker A. C. Eberhardt
R. I. Jetter
F. Farzam B. R. Laskewitz, Contributing
R. B. Keating J. Yang
P. S. Ghosal Member
M. F. Hessheimer M. K. Thumm, Contributing
B. D. Hovis Member
Special Working Group on HDPE Design of Components (BPV III)
T. M. Adams, Chair E. W. McElroy
T. M. Musto, Secretary J. C. Minichiello Working Group on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV 3C)
W. I. Adams D. P. Munson
T. A. Bacon J. Ossmann J. F. Artuso, Chair B. B. Scott
C. Basavaraju L. J. Petroff P. S. Ghosal, Vice Chair C. T. Smith
D. Burwell H. E. Svetlik M. Allam J. F. Strunk
P. Krishnaswamy K. Lively A. C. Eberhardt T. Tonyan
M. Martin L. Mizell J. Gutierrez
Special Working Group on Computational Modeling for Explicit Working Group on Modernization (BPV 3C)
Dynamics (BPV III)
O. Jovall, Chair J.-B Domage
G. Bjorkman, Chair P. Y.-K. Shih J. McLean, Secretary N. Orbovic
D. J. Ammerman, Secretary S. D. Snow A. Adediran
C. T. Smith
G. Broz N. Alchaar
C.-F Tso M. A. Ugalde
J. Jordan J. F. Artuso
D. Molitoris M. C. Yaksh J. J. Braun S. Wang
J. Piotter U. Zencker J. Colinares U. Ricklefs, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (BPV IV) COMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (BPV V)
T. L. Bedeaux, Chair P. A. Molvie J. E. Batey, Chair R. W. Kruzic

J. A. Hall, Vice Chair B. W. Moore F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair J. R. McGimpsey
G. Moino, Staff Secretary R. E. Olson J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary M. D. Moles
J. Calland T. M. Parks S. J. Akrin A. B. Nagel
J. P. Chicoine C. A. Anderson T. L. Plasek
M. Wadkinson
C. M. Dove A. S. Birks
R. V. Wielgoszinski F. J. Sattler
B. G. French P. L. Brown
H. Michael, Delegate G. M. Gatti, Delegate
A. Heino M. A. Burns
D. Picart, Delegate X. Guiping, Delegate
B. J. Iske B. Caccamise
D. J. Jenkins J. L. Kleiss, Alternate N. Y. Faransso B. D. Laite, Alternate
M. R. Klosterman M. T. Roby, Alternate N. A. Finney H. C. Graber, Honorary Member
K. M. McTague W. L. Haag, Jr., Honorary Member A. F. Garbolevsky O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
G. W. Hembree J. R. MacKay, Honorary Member
J. W. Houf T. G. McCarty, Honorary Member
Subgroup on General Requirements/Personnel Qualifications and

Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (BPV IV) Inquiries (BPV V)
M. Wadkinson, Chair M. R. Klosterman F. B. Kovacs, Chair N. A. Finney

T. L. Bedeaux P. A. Molvie S. J. Akrin G. W. Hembree
J. Calland B. W. Moore C. A. Anderson J. W. Houf
J. A. Hall T. M. Parks J. E. Batey J. P. Swezy, Jr., Contributing
A. S. Birks Member
N. Y. Faransso
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (BPV V)

Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (BPV IV) S. J. Akrin, Chair S. Johnson
A. S. Birks R. W. Kruzic
K. M. McTague, Chair B. G. French
P. L. Brown B. D. Laite
T. L. Bedeaux, Vice Chair J. A. Hall
B. Caccamise
J. P. Chicoine J. L. Kleiss L. E. Mullins
N. Y. Faransso
C. M. Dove M. R. Klosterman A. B. Nagel
N. Farenbaugh
J. M. Downs M. T. Roby, Alternate
N. A. Finney F. J. Sattler
G. W. Hembree G. M. Gatti, Delegate
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (BPV V)
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IV) G. W. Hembree, Chair S. Johnson

S. J. Akrin F. B. Kovacs
J. A. Hall, Chair B. J. Iske
J. E. Batey R. W. Kruzic
M. Wadkinson, Vice Chair J. L. Kleiss
P. L. Brown J. R. McGimpsey
J. Calland E. Rightmier
B. Caccamise M. D. Moles
J. M. Downs
N. Y. Faransso L. E. Mullins
N. A. Finney A. B. Nagel
A. F. Garbolevsky T. L. Plasek
J. F. Halley F. J. Sattler
R. W. Hardy G. M. Gatti, Delegate
Subgroup on Water Heaters (BPV IV)

J. Calland, Chair K. M. McTague Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (BPV V)
J. P. Chicoine R. E. Olson N. Y. Faransso, Chair S. R. Doctor
B. G. French T. E. Trant J. E. Batey, Vice Chair R. K. Miller
B. J. Iske M. T. Roby, Alternate
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (BPV V)

F. B. Kovacs, Chair S. Johnson
S. J. Akrin R. W. Kruzic
J. E. Batey B. D. Laite
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (BPV IV)
P. L. Brown
S. Mango
J. Calland, Chair P. A. Molvie B. Caccamise
J. R. McGimpsey
T. L. Bedeaux R. E. Olson N. Y. Faransso
B. G. French M. Wadkinson A. F. Garbolevsky R. J. Mills
J. L. Kleiss R. V. Wielgoszinski R. W. Hardy A. B. Nagel
M. R. Klosterman J.-M. Andre, Contributing Member G. W. Hembree T. L. Plasek
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (BPV V) Working Group on Design-By-Analysis (BPV III)
N. A. Finney, Chair R. W. Kruzic B. F. Hantz, Chair A. Mann

J. F. Halley, Vice Chair B. D. Laite T. W. Norton, Secretary G. A. Miller
B. Caccamise R. G. Brown
M. D. Moles C. Nadarajah
K. J. Chizen R. D. Dixon
L. E. Mullins M. D. Rana
N. Y. Faransso C. E. Hinnant
O. F. Hedden A. B. Nagel M. H. Jawad T. G. Seipp
S. Johnson F. J. Sattler S. Krishnamurthy S. Terada
Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (BPV VIII)

Working Group on Guided Wave Ultrasonic Testing (SG-VM) (BPV V)
C. D. Rodery, Chair P. L. Sturgill
N. Y. Faransso, Chair G. M. Light J. P. Swezy, Jr., Vice Chair T. Tahara
J. E. Batey, Vice Chair M. D. Moles B. R. Morelock, Secretary E. A. Whittle
D. Alleyne P. Mudge J. L. Arnold K. Oyamada, Delegate
J. F. Halley M. J. Quarry L. F. Campbell
R. Uebel, Delegate
S. Johnson J. Vanvelsor H. E. Gordon
D. I. Morris W. J. Bees, Corresponding Member
M. J. Pischke E. Upitis, Corresponding Member
M. J. Rice W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
B. F. Shelley J. Lee, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (VIII)
U. R. Miller, Chair M. J. Pischke
R. J. Basile, Vice Chair M. D. Rana
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV VIII)
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary G. B. Rawls, Jr.
T. Schellens, Staff Secretary F. L. Richter S. C. Roberts, Chair C. C. Neely
V. Bogosian S. C. Roberts D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair A. S. Olivares
J. Cameron C. D. Rodery F. L. Richter, Secretary J. C. Sowinski
A. Chaudouet A. Selz R. J. Basile P. Speranza
D. B. DeMichael J. R. Sims, Jr. V. Bogosian
D. B. Stewart
J. P. Glaspie D. T. Davis
E. Soltow D. A. Swanson
M. Gold J. P. Glaspie
D. A. Swanson R. Uebel
J. F. Grubb L. E. Hayden, Jr.
J. P. Swezy, Jr. A. H. Gibbs, Delegate
L. E. Hayden, Jr. K. T. Lau
S. Terada
G. G. Karcher M. D. Lower K. Oyamada, Delegate
K T. Lau E. Upitis
R. Mahadeen P. A. McGowan, Delegate
R. W. Mikitka H. Michael, Delegate
K. Mokhtarian K. Oyamada, Delegate
Taskgroup on U-2(g) (BPV VIII)
C. C. Neely M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
T. W. Norton D. Rui, Delegate S. R. Babka R. F. Reedy, Sr.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T. P. Pastor T. Tahara, Delegate R. J. Basile S. C. Roberts
D. T. Peters W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member D. K. Chandiramani J. R. Sims, Jr.
R. Mahadeen D. Srnic
U. R. Miller D. A. Swanson
T. W. Norton R. Uebel
T. P. Pastor K. K. Tam
Subgroup on Design (BPV VIII)
R. J. Basile, Chair S. C. Roberts
J. C. Sowinski, Vice Chair C. D. Rodery
Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (BPV VIII)
M. D. Lower, Secretary S. C. Shah
O. A. Barsky D. A. Swanson R. Mahadeen, Chair P. Matkovics
M. R. Breach J. Vattappilly G. Aurioles, Sr., Vice Chair S. Mayeux
F. L. Brown R. A. Whipple F. E. Jehrio, Secretary U. R. Miller
J. R. Farr A. A. Gibbs, Delegate S. R. Babka T. W. Norton
B. F. Hantz K. Oyamada, Delegate J. H. Barbee K. Oyamada
C. E. Hinnant M. E. Papponetti, Delegate O. A. Barsky
D. Srnic
M. H. Jawad M. Faulkner, Corresponding I. G. Campbell
A. M. Voytko
D. L. Kurle Member A. Chaudouet
R. W. Mikitka C. S. Hinson, Corresponding M. D. Clark R. P. Wiberg
U. R. Miller Member J. I. Gordon F. Osweiller, Corresponding
K. Mokhtarian W. S. Jacobs, Corresponding M. J. Holtz Member
T. P. Pastor Member G. G. Karcher S. Yokell, Corresponding Member
M. D. Rana A. Selz, Corresponding Member D. L. Kurle R. Tiwari, Contributing Member
G. B. Rawls, Jr. K. K. Tam, Corresponding Member B. J. Lerch S. M. Caldwell, Honorary Member
Subgroup on High Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII) Task Group on Design (BPV VIII)
D. T. Peters, Chair G. T. Nelson J. Keltjens, Chair E. H. Perez

R. T. Hallman, Vice Chair E. A. Rodriguez R. C. Biel D. T. Peters
A. P. Maslowski, Staff Secretary E. D. Roll D. J. Burns E. D. Roll
L. P. Antalffy J. R. Sims, Jr. R. Cordes K. C. Simpson
R. C. Biel D. L. Stang R. D. Dixon
J. R. Sims, Jr.
P. N. Chaku F. W. Tatar L. Fridlund
R. Cordes S. Terada D. M. Fryer D. L. Stang
R. D. Dixon J. L. Traud R. T. Hallman S. Terada
L. Fridlund R. Wink S. C. Mordre J. L. Traud
D. M. Fryer K. J. Young G. T. Nelson R. Wink
A. H. Honza K. Oyamada, Delegate
M. M. James R. M. Hoshman, Contributing
J. A. Kapp Member Task Group on Materials (BPV VIII)
J. Keltjens G. J. Mraz, Contributing Member
A. K. Khare D. J. Burns, Honorary Member F. W. Tatar, Chair M. M. James
S. C. Mordre E. H. Perez, Honorary Member L. P. Antalffy J. A. Kapp
P. N. Chaku A. K. Khare
Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (BPV VIII)

E. A. Rodriguez, Chair K. W. King
Subgroup on Materials (BPV VIII) P. O. Leslie, Secretary R. Kitamura
J. F. Grubb, Chair R. C. Sutherlin G. A. Antaki R. A. Leishear
J. Cameron, Vice Chair E. Upitis J. K. Asahina R. E. Nickell
P. G. Wittenbach, Secretary K. Xu D. D. Barker
F. Ohlson
A. Di Rienzo K. Oyamada, Delegate D. W. Bowman
C. Romero
J. D. Fritz E. G. Nisbett, Corresponding A. M. Clayton
N. Rushton
M. Gold Member J. E. Didlake, Jr.
T. A. Duffey J. E. Shepherd
M. Katcher G. S. Dixit, Contributing Member
W. M. Lundy J. A. McMaster, Contributing B. L. Haroldsen Q. Dong, Corresponding Member
D. W. Rahoi Member H. L. Heaton M. Yip, Corresponding Member
D. Hilding C. R. Vaught, Alternate
COMMITTEE ON WELDING AND BRAZING (BPV IX)

W. J. Sperko, Chair A. S. Olivares
Subgroup on Toughness (BPV II & BPV VIII)
D. A. Bowers, Vice Chair M. J. Pischke
D. A. Swanson, Chair K. Mokhtarian S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary M. J. Rice
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Vice Chair C. C. Neely M. Bernasek M. B. Sims
J. L. Arnold M. D. Rana R. K. Brown, Jr. M. J. Stanko
R. J. Basile F. L. Richter M. L. Carpenter J. P. Swezy, Jr.
J. Cameron E. Upitis J. G. Feldstein P. L. Van Fosson
H. E. Gordon J. Vattappilly P. D. Flenner R. R. Young
W. S. Jacobs K. Xu R. M. Jessee A. Roza, Delegate
D. L. Kurle K. Oyamada, Delegate J. S. Lee M. Consonni, Contributing Member
W. M. Lundy S. A. Jones, Contributing Member
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T. Melfi W. D. Doty, Honorary Member

W. F. Newell, Jr. S. D. Reynolds, Jr., Honorary
B. R. Newmark Member
Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment (BPV VIII)

Subgroup on Brazing (BPV IX)
E. Soltow, Chair R. W. Dickerson
G. C. Becherer S. Malone M. J. Pischke, Chair M. L. Carpenter
T. F. Bonn M. R. Minick E. W. Beckman A. F. Garbolevsky
F. L. Brown A. A. Stupica L. F. Campbell J. P. Swezy, Jr.
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV IX)

B. R. Newmark, Chair D. K. Peetz
E. W. Beckman H. B. Porter
Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (BPV VIII)
G. Chandler
P. L. Sturgill
R. W. Mikitka, Chair M. Morishita P. R. Evans
K. R. Willens
G. D. Bibel J. R. Payne A. Howard
W. Brown G. B. Rawls, Jr. R. M. Jessee E. W. Woelfel
W. J. Koves M. S. Shelton A. S. Olivares E. Molina, Delegate
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IX) COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (BPV XI)
M. Bernasek, Chair T. Melfi G. C. Park, Chair D. W. Lamond

T. Anderson M. J. Pischke R. W. Swayne, Vice Chair G. A. Lofthus
J. L. Arnold C. E. Sainz R. A. Yonekawa, Vice Chair J. E. OSullivan
M. L. Carpenter R. L. Crane, Staff Secretary R. K. Rhyne
W. J. Sperko
E. Cutlip J. M. Agold D. A. Scarth
M. J. Stanko
S. S. Fiore V. L. Armentrout F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
S. E. Gingrich P. L. Sturgill W. H. Bamford J. C. Spanner, Jr.
R. M. Jessee R. R. Young T. L. Chan G. L. Stevens
C. C. Kim V. G. V. Giunto, Delegate R. C. Cipolla D. E. Waskey
D. D. Davis J. G. Weicks
G. H. DeBoo C. J. Wirtz
R. L. Dyle T. Yuhara
E. V. Farrell, Jr. H. D. Chung, Delegate
E. L. Farrow C. Ye, Delegate
Subgroup on Performance Qualification (BPV IX) E. B. Gerlach R. A. West, Contributing Member
R. E. Gimple J. Hakii, Alternate
D. A. Bowers, Chair K. L. Hayes
T. J. Griesbach J. T. Lindberg, Alternate
M. J. Rice, Secretary J. S. Lee K. Hasegawa W. E. Norris, Alternate
V. A. Bell
W. M. Lundy D. O. Henry C. D. Cowfer, Honorary Member
M. A. Boring
E. G. Reichelt R. D. Kerr F. E. Gregor, Honorary Member
R. B. Corbit
S. D. Kulat O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
P. D. Flenner M. B. Sims
G. L. Lagleder P. C. Riccardella, Honorary Member
Executive Committee (BPV XI)

R. A. Yonekawa, Chair S. D. Kulat
Subgroup on Plastic Fusing (BPV IX) G. C. Park, Vice Chair J. T. Lindberg
M. L. Carpenter, Chair J. E. OSullivan R. L. Crane, Staff Secretary W. E. Norris
D. Burwell E. G. Reichelt W. H. Bamford
R. K. Rhyne
J. M. Craig M. J. Rice R. L. Dyle
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A. N. Haddad P. L. Sturgill M. J. Ferlisi

E. B. Gerlach G. L. Stevens
K. L. Hayes J. P. Swezy, Jr.
R. M. Jessee E. W. Woelfel R. E. Gimple R. W. Swayne
E. Lever J. C. Minichiello
E. W. McElroy C. W. Rowley
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
W. H. Bamford, Chair D. R. Lee
G. L. Stevens, Secretary R. O. McGill
H. D. Chung H. S. Mehta
R. C. Cipolla M. A. Mitchell
Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (BPV IX)
G. H. DeBoo
K. Miyazaki
D. A. Bowers, Chair A. S. Olivares R. L. Dyle
R. Pace
M. J. Rice, Secretary S. Raghunathan B. R. Ganta
S. Ranganath
M. Bernasek M. B. Sims T. J. Griesbach
K. Hasegawa D. A. Scarth
M. A. Boring W. J. Sperko
R. K. Brown, Jr. S. A. Sprague K. Hojo T. V. Vo
W. M. Lundy J. P. Swezy, Jr. D. N. Hopkins K. R. Wichman
J. R. McGimpsey P. L. Van Fosson K. Koyama S. X. Xu
W. F. Newell, Jr. T. C. Wiesner
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)

R. C. Cipolla, Chair H. S. Mehta
S. X. Xu, Secretary G. A. Miessi
W. H. Bamford K. Miyazaki
COMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS
B. Bezensek R. K. Qashu
(BPV X)
H. D. Chung S. Ranganath
D. Eisberg, Chair D. L. Keeler G. H. DeBoo H. Rathbun
P. D. Stumpf, Staff Secretary B. M. Linnemann B. R. Ganta
P. J. Rush
F. L. Brown N. L. Newhouse R. G. Gilada
D. A. Scarth
J. L. Bustillos D. J. Painter H. L. Gustin
T. W. Cowley G. Ramirez F. D. Hayes W. L. Server
I. L. Dinovo J. R. Richter P. H. Hoang N. J. Shah
T. J. Fowler B. F. Shelley K. Hojo T. V. Vo
M. R. Gorman F. W. Van Name D. N. Hopkins K. R. Wichman
D. H. Hodgkinson D. O. Yancey, Jr. K. Koyama G. M. Wilkowski
L. E. Hunt P. H. Ziehl D. R. Lee D. L. Rudland, Alternate
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (BPV XI) Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
T. J. Griesbach, Chair H. S. Mehta E. B. Gerlach, Chair R. D. Kerr

D. V. Sommerville, Secretary M. A. Mitchell E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary S. L. McCracken
W. H. Bamford R. Pace S. B. Brown B. R. Newton
H. Behnke N. A. Palm R. E. Cantrell J. E. O'Sullivan
T. L. Dickson S. Ranganath G. G. Elder R. R. Stevenson
R. L. Dyle W. L. Server P. D. Fisher R. W. Swayne
S. R. Gosselin D. P. Weakland J. M. Gamber D. L. Tilly
M. Hayashi T. Hardin, Alternate R. E. Gimple D. E. Waskey
D. R. Graham J. G. Weicks
R. A. Hermann R. A. Yonekawa
K. J. Karwoski E. G. Reichelt, Alternate
Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair D. N. Hopkins
G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary E. J. Houston Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Processes (SG-RRA)
T. A. Bacon (BPV XI)
K. Kashima
W. H. Bamford R. O. McGill D. E. Waskey, Chair C. C. Kim
B. Bezensek H. S. Mehta D. J. Tilly, Secretary M. Lau
H. D. Chung G. A. A. Miessi R. E. Cantrell S. L. McCracken
R. C. Cipolla S. J. Findlan D. B. Meredith
K. Miyazaki
N. G. Cofie P. D. Fisher B. R. Newton
D. L. Rudland
J. M. Davis M. L. Hall J. E. O'Sullivan
G. H. DeBoo P. J. Rush
R. A. Hermann R. E. Smith
B. R. Ganta D.-J. Shim
K. J. Karwoski J. G. Weicks
L. F. Goyette T. V. Vo
K. Hasegawa B. Wasiluk
P. H. Hoang S. X. Xu
K. Hojo H. Rathbun, Alternate Working Group on Nonmetals Repair/Replacement Activities
(SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair B. B. Raji
S. Schuessler, Secretary E. G. Reichelt
Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI) E. W. McElroy F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
T. M. Musto Z. J. Zhou
J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair J. T. Lindberg
G. A. Lofthus, Secretary T. R. Lupold
T. L. Chan G. R. Perkins
C. B. Cheezem S. A. Sabo Task Group on Repair by Carbon Fiber Composites
D. R. Cordes F. J. Schaaf, Jr. (WGN-MRR) (BPV XI)
F. E. Dohmen R. V. Swain
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair B. B. Raji
M. E. Gothard G. Tang
M. Golliet F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
D. O. Henry C. J. Wirtz
E. W. McElroy
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface Visual and Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI) G. G. Elder, Chair E. B. Gerlach
J. T. Lindberg, Chair J. C. Spanner, Jr. S. B. Brown, Secretary D. R. Graham
D. R. Cordes, Secretary O. Bhatty G. F. Harttraft
J. T. Timm
S. E. Cumblidge R. Clow T. E. Hiss
M. C. Weatherly J. W. Collins H. Malikowski
N. Farenbaugh
D. O. Henry M. L. Whytsell R. R. Croft M. A. Pyne
J. W. Houf C. J. Wirtz E. V. Farrell, Jr. R. R. Stevenson
S. K. Fisher R. W. Swayne
J. M. Gamber R. A. Yonekawa
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Working Group on Procedure Qualification and Volumetric

Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI) Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
G. A. Lofthus, Chair K. J. Hacker S. D. Kulat, Chair P. J. Hennessey

G. R. Perkins, Secretary D. B. King N. A. Palm, Secretary D. W. Lamond
M. T. Anderson D. A. Kull J. M. Agold A. McNeill III
M. Briley C. A. Nove V. L. Armentrout T. Nomura
C. B. Cheezem J. M. Boughman W. E. Norris
S. A. Sabo
A. D. Chockie S. T. Chesworth G. C. Park
M. Dennis R. V. Swain D. D. Davis J. E. Staffiera
S. R. Doctor B. A. Thigpen H. Q. Do H. M. Stephens, Jr.
F. E. Dohmen S. J. Todd E. L. Farrow R. Turner
M. E. Gothard D. K. Zimmerman M. J. Ferlisi H. L. Graves III, Alternate
Task Group on High Strength Nickel Alloys Issues (SG-WCS) (BPV XI) Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV XI)
V. L. Armentrout, Chair K. Koyama R. W. Swayne, Chair J. E. Staffiera

B. L. Montgomery, Secretary M. Lashley C. E. Moyer D. J. Tilly
W. H. Bamford G. C. Park K. R. Rao C. J. Wirtz
P. R. Donavin J. M. Shuping
R. L. Dyle J. C. Spanner, Jr.
G. G. Elder K. B. Stuckey
R. E. Gimple E. J. Sullivan, Jr.
Special Working Group on Nuclear Plant Aging Management (BPV XI)
R. Hardies D. P. Weakland
T. A. Meyer, Chair A. B. Meichler
B. R. Snyder, Secretary R. E. Nickell
Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (BPV XI) S. Asada K. Sakamoto
D. V. Burgess W. L. Server
J. E. Staffiera, Chair D. J. Naus Y.-K. Chung R. L. Turner
H. M. Stephens, Jr., Secretary F. Poteet III D. D. Davis G. G. Young
P. S. Ghosal A. A. Reyes-Cruz R. L. Dyle Z. Zhong
D. H. Goche A. L. Hiser , Jr. C. E. Carpenter, Alternate
E. A. Rodriguez
H. L. Graves III
H. T. Hill G. Thomas
R. D. Hough S. G. Brown, Alternate
C. N. Krishnaswamy W. E. Norris, Alternate
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV XI)
R. K. Rhyne, Chair K. M. Herman
Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components E. J. Maloney, Secretary R. K. Mattu
(SG-WCS) (BPV XI) T. L. Chan
C. E. Moyer
E. L. Farrow
J. M. Agold, Chair K. W. Hall D. J. Potter
R. Fox
H. Q. Do, Secretary K. M. Hoffman
P. J. Hennessey R. L. Williams
V. L. Armentrout S. D. Kulat
C. Cueto-Felgueroso T. Nomura
R. E. Day J. C. Nygaard
M. J. Ferlisi R. Rishel
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R. Fougerousse C. M. Ross Special Working Group on Reliability and Integrity Management
Program (BPV XI)
F. J. Schaaf, Jr., Chair D. R. Lee
Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (BPV XI) M. A. Lockwood, Secretary R. K. Miller
N. Broom P. M. Mills
D. W. Lamond, Chair T. R. Lupold
S. R. Doctor
J. M. Boughman, Secretary J. K. McClanahan M. N. Mitchell
J. Fletcher
Y.-K. Chung B. L. Montgomery A. T. Roberts III
M. R. Graybeal
T. Coste S. A. Norman
J. Grimm T. Roney
J. A. Doughty P. N. Passalugo
A. B. Hull R. W. Swayne
R. E. Hall J. A. Stevenson
Task Group on Buried Components Inspection and Testing

(WG-PT) (BPV XI) COMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (BPV XII)
D. W. Lamond, Chair A. Lee M. D. Rana, Chair J. R. McGimpsey

J. M. Boughman, Secretary E. J. Maloney N. J. Paulick, Vice Chair M. Pitts
C. Blackwelder T. Schellens, Staff Secretary T. A. Rogers
M. Moenssens
B. Clark III A. N. Antoniou A. Selz
J. Ossmann J. A. Byers S. Staniszewski
G. C. Coker
R. E. Day P. N. Passalugo W. L. Garfield A. P. Varghese
R. Hardies J. H. Riley C. H. Hochman M. R. Ward
T. Ivy D. M. Swann G. G. Karcher M. D. Pham, Contributing Member
Working Group on Risk-Informed Activities (SGW-CS) (BPV XI)

Subgroup on Design and Materials (BPV XII)
M. A. Pyne, Chair K. W. Hall
S. T. Chesworth, Secretary S. D. Kulat A. P. Varghese, Chair N. J. Paulick
J. M. Agold D. W. Lamond R. C. Sallash, Secretary M. D. Rana
C. Cueto-Felgueroso R. K. Mattu D. K. Chandiramani T. A. Rogers
H. Q. Do A. McNeill III P. Chilukuri A. Selz
R. Fougerousse P. J. ORegan T. Hitchcock M. R. Ward
M. R. Graybeal N. A. Palm G. G. Karcher K. Xu
R. Haessler D. Vetter T. P. Lokey J. Zheng, Corresponding Member
J. Hakii J. C. Younger S. L. McWilliams M. D. Pham, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Fabrication, Inspection, and Continued Service COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR CERTIFICATION (CNC)
(BPV XII)
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair M. F. Sullivan, Contributing
M. Pitts, Chair K. Mansker R. R. Stevenson, Vice Chair Member
P. Chilukuri, Secretary J. R. McGimpsey E. Suarez, Staff Secretary S. Andrews, Alternate
S. E. Benet A. S. Olivares J. DeKleine V. Bogosian, Alternate
J. A. Byers R. C. Sallash G. Gobbi P. D. Edwards, Alternate
W. L. Garfield S. Staniszewski S. M. Goodwin D. P. Gobbi, Alternate
T. P. Lokey L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member J. W. Highlands K. M. Hottle, Alternate
K. A. Huber
K. A. Kavanagh, Alternate
J. C. Krane
B. G. Kovarik, Alternate
R. P. McIntyre
M. A. Lockwood, Alternate
M. R. Minick
R. J. Luymes, Alternate
L. M. Plante
H. B. Prasse J. Oyler, Alternate
T. E. Quaka M. Paris, Alternate
C. T. Smith D. W. Stepp, Alternate
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV XII)
D. M. Vickery A. Torosyan, Alternate
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
W. L. Garfield, Chair M. Pitts C. S. Withers E. A. Whittle, Alternate
S. E. Benet, Secretary T. Rummel S. Yang H. L. Wiger, Alternate
T. W. Alexander
R. C. Sallash
A. N. Antoniou
S. Staniszewski
J. L. Freiler
C. H. Hochman K. L. Gilmore, Contributing Member COMMITTEE ON SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (BPV-SVR)
J. R. McGimpsey L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
J. A. West, Chair R. J. Doelling
D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair J. P. Glaspie
C. E. OBrien, Staff Secretary S. F. Harrison, Jr.
J. F. Ball W. F. Hart
S. Cammeresi D. Miller
J. A. Cox T. Patel
R. D. Danzy Z. Wang
Subgroup on Nonmandatory Appendices (BPV XII)

T. A. Rogers, Chair D. G. Shelton Subgroup on Design (BPV-SVR)
S. Staniszewski, Secretary M. R. Ward
S. E. Benet D. D. Brusewitz, Contributing R. D. Danzy, Chair D. Miller
P. Chilukuri Member C. E. Beair T. Patel
R. Hayworth J. L. Conley, Contributing Member J. A. Conley J. A. West
K. Mansker T. Eubanks, Contributing Member R. J. Doelling
S. L. McWilliams T. Hitchcock, Contributing Member
N. J. Paulick A. Selz, Contributing Member
M. Pitts A. P. Varghese, Contributing
R. C. Sallash Member Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV-SVR)
D. B. DeMichael, Chair S. T. French
J. F. Ball J. P. Glaspie
G. Brazier J. W. Richardson
J. Burgess D. E. Tuttle
COMMITTEE ON BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CONFORMITY Subgroup on Testing (BPV-SVR)

ASSESSMENT (CBPVCA) J. A. Cox, Chair W. F. Hart
P. D. Edwards, Chair R. V. Wielgoszinski J. E. Britt B. K. Nutter
K. I. Baron, Staff Secretary S. F. Harrison, Jr., Contributing S. Cammeresi C. Sharpe
S. W. Cameron Member J. W. Dickson Z. Wang
M. A. DeVries V. Bogosian, Alternate G. D. Goodson A. Wilson
T. E. Hansen D. C. Cook, Alternate
D. J. Jenkins D. W. King, Alternate
K. T. Lau B. L. Krasiun, Alternate
W. C. LaRochelle, Alternate U.S. Technical Advisory Group ISO/TC 185 Safety Relief Valves
L. E. McDonald
K. M. McTague P. F. Martin, Alternate T. J. Bevilacqua, Chair D. B. DeMichael
D. Miller K. McPhie, Alternate C. E. OBrien, Staff Secretary D. Miller
B. R. Morelock M. R. Minick, Alternate J. F. Ball B. K. Nutter
J. D. O'Leary I. Powell, Alternate G. Brazier J. A. West
T. M. Parks R. Pulliam, Alternate
B. C. Turczynski M. T. Roby, Alternate
D. E. Tuttle J. A. West, Alternate
E. A. Whittle A. J. Spencer, Honorary Member
13 ORGANIZATION OF SECTION III
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1 GENERAL
Section III consists of Division 1, Division 2, Division 3, and Division 5. These Divisions are broken down into Subsec-
tions and are designated by capital letters preceded by the letter N for Division 1, by the letter C for Division 2, by the
letter W for Division 3, and by the letter H for Division 5. Each Subsection is published separately, with the exception
of those listed for Divisions 2, 3, and 5.
Subsection NCA General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
Appendices
Division 1
Subsection NB Class 1 Components
Subsection NC Class 2 Components
Subsection ND Class 3 Components
Subsection NE Class MC Components
Subsection NF Supports
Subsection NG Core Support Structures
Subsection NH Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
Division 2 Code for Concrete Containments
Subsection CC Concrete Containments
Division 3 Containments for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level Radioactive Material and
Waste
Subsection WA General Requirements for Division 3
Subsection WB Class TC Transportation Containments
Subsection WC Class SC Storage Containments
Division 5 High Temperature Reactors
Subsection HA General Requirements
Subpart A Metallic Materials
Subpart B Graphite Materials
Subpart C Composite Materials
Subsection HB Class A Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subpart A Low Temperature Service
Subpart B Elevated Temperature Service
Subsection HC Class B Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subsection HF Class A and B Metallic Supports
Subsection HG Class A Metallic Core Support Structures
Subsection HH Class A Nonmetallic Core Support Structures
Subpart A Graphite Materials
Subpart B Composite Materials
2 SUBSECTIONS
Subsections are divided into Articles, subarticles, paragraphs, and, where necessary, subparagraphs and
subsubparagraphs.
3 ARTICLES
Articles are designated by the applicable letters indicated above for the Subsections followed by Arabic numbers, such
as NB-1000. Where possible, Articles dealing with the same topics are given the same number in each Subsection, except
NCA, in accordance with the following general scheme:
Article Number Title
1000 Introduction or Scope
2000 Material
3000 Design
4000 Fabrication and Installation
5000 Examination
6000 Testing
7000 Overpressure Protection
8000 Nameplates, Stamping With Certification Mark, and Reports
The numbering of Articles and the material contained in the Articles may not, however, be consecutive. Due to the fact
that the complete outline may cover phases not applicable to a particular Subsection or Article, the rules have been pre-
pared with some gaps in the numbering.
4 SUBARTICLES
Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as NB-1100.
5 SUBSUBARTICLES
Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as NB-2130, and generally have no text. When a number such as
NB-1110 is followed by text, it is considered a paragraph.
6 PARAGRAPHS
Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as NB-2121.
7 SUBPARAGRAPHS
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of a paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal followed by one
or more digits to the paragraph number, such as NB-1132.1. When they are minor subdivisions of a paragraph, subpar-
agraphs may be designated by lowercase letters in parentheses, such as NB-2121(a).
8 SUBSUBPARAGRAPHS
Subsubparagraphs are designated by adding lowercase letters in parentheses to the major subparagraph numbers,
such as NB-1132.1(a). When further subdivisions of minor subparagraphs are necessary, subsubparagraphs are desig-
nated by adding Arabic numerals in parentheses to the subparagraph designation, such as NB-2121(a)(1).
9 REFERENCES
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
References used within Section III generally fall into one of the following four categories:
(a) References to Other Portions of Section III. When a reference is made to another Article, subarticle, or paragraph, all
numbers subsidiary to that reference shall be included. For example, reference to NB-3000 includes all material in Article
NB-3000; reference to NB-3200 includes all material in subarticle NB-3200; reference to NB-3230 includes all para-
graphs, NB-3231 through NB-3236.
(b) References to Other Sections. Other Sections referred to in Section III are the following:
(1) Section II, Materials. When a requirement for a material, or for the examination or testing of a material, is to be in
accordance with a specification such as SA-105, SA-370, or SB-160, the reference is to material specifications in Section II.
These references begin with the letter S.
(2) Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Section V references begin with the letter T and relate to the nondestruc-
tive examination of material or welds.
(3) Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Section IX references begin with the letter Q and relate to weld-
ing and brazing requirements.
(4) Section XI, Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components. When a reference is made to inser-
vice inspection, the rules of Section XI shall apply.
(c) Reference to Specifications and Standards Other Than Published in Code Sections
(1) Specifications for examination methods and acceptance standards to be used in connection with them are pub-
lished by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). At the time of publication of Section III, some such spe-
cifications were not included in Section II of this Code. A reference to ASTM E94 refers to the specification so designated
by and published by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
(2) Dimensional standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are sponsored and published by
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers and approved by the American National Standards Institute.* When a pro-
duct is to conform to such a standard, for example ASME B16.5, the standard is approved by the American National Stan-
dards Institute. The applicable year of issue is that suffixed to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for example
ASME B16.5-2003. Standards published by The American Society of Mechanical Engineers are available from ASME, 22
Law Drive, P.O. Box 2900, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900.
(3) Dimensional and other types of standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are also pub-
lished by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry and are known as Standard Prac-
tices. When a product is required by these rules to conform to a Standard Practice, for example MSS SP-100, the Standard
Practice referred to is published by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
(MSS), 127 Park Street, NE, Vienna, VA 22180. The applicable year of issue of such a Standard Practice is that suffixed
to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for example MSS SP-89-2003.
(4) Specifications for welding and brazing materials are published by the American Welding Society (AWS), 8669
Doral Boulevard, Suite 130, Doral, FL 33166. Specifications of this type are incorporated in Section II and are identified
by the AWS designation with the prefix SF, for example SFA-5.1.
(5) Standards applicable to the design and construction of tanks and flanges are published by the American Petro-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
leum Institute and have designations such as API-605. When documents so designated are referred to in Section III, for
example API-6051988, they are standards published by the American Petroleum Institute and are listed in Table NCA-
7100-1.
(d) References to Appendices. Section III uses two types of appendices that are designated as either Section III Appen-
dices or Subsection Appendices. Either of these appendices is further designated as either Mandatory or Nonmandatory
for use. Mandatory Appendices are referred to in the Section III rules and contain requirements that must be followed in
construction. Nonmandatory Appendices provide additional information or guidance when using Section III.
(1) Section III Appendices are contained in a separate book titled "Appendices." These appendices have the potential
for multiple subsection applicability. Mandatory Appendices are designated by a Roman numeral followed, when appro-
priate, by Arabic numerals to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as II-1500 or
XIII-2131. Nonmandatory Appendices are designated by a capital letter followed, when appropriate, by Arabic numerals
to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as D-1200 or Y-1440.
(2) Subsection Appendices are specifically applicable to just one subsection and are contained within that subsection.
Subsection-specific mandatory and nonmandatory appendices are numbered in the same manner as Section III Appen-
dices, but with a subsection identifier (e.g., NF, NH, D2, etc.) preceding either the Roman numeral or the capital letter
for a unique designation. For example, NF-II-1100 or NF-A-1200 would be part of a Subsection NF mandatory or nonman-
datory appendix, respectively. For Subsection CC, D2-IV-1120 or D2-D-1330 would be part of a Subsection CC mandatory
or nonmandatory appendix, respectively.
*
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) was formerly known as the American Standards Association. Standards approved by the
Association were designated by the prefix ASA followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. More recently, the American
National Standards Institute was known as the United States of America Standards Institute. Standards were designated by the prefix USAS
followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. While the letters of the prefix have changed with the name of the organiza-
tion, the numbers of the standards have remained unchanged.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
The 2013 Edition of this Code contains revisions in addition to the 2010 Edition with 2011 Addenda.
After publication of the 2013 Edition, Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME Web site to provide corrections
to incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be
used on the date posted.
Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published on the ASME Web site under the BPVC Resources page at
http://www.asme.org/kb/standards/publications/bpvc-resources.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (13), placed next to the affected area.
The Record Numbers listed below are explained in more detail in List of Changes in Record Number Order following this
Summary of Changes.
Page Location Change (Record Number)

viii List of Sections Revised (12-749)
x Foreword Revised in its entirety (09-760)
xiii Submittal of Technical In- Revised (12-1641)
quiries to the Boiler
and P ressure Vessel
Standards Committees
xv Personnel Updated
xxx Organization of Section III Revised (12-749, 12-1878)
xxxvi Cross-Referencing and Added
Stylistic Changes in the
Boiler and Pressure Ves-
sel Code
1 NF-1110 Subparagraph (e)(11) added (12-1447)
9 NF-2121 First line of subpara. (a) revised (10-1805)
9 NF-2128 Added (10-1805)
10 Table NF-2121(a)-1 (1) Fourth column head and Note (1) revised (10-1805)
(2) Note (2) added (10-1805)
28 NF-3121.3 The reference in subpara. (a) corrected by errata to read NF-3121.11
(12-1575)
29 NF-3131 Section III, Division 1, Appendices revised throughout to read Section
III Appendices (12-749)
40 NF-3256.2 In subpara. (b), reference to NF-3356.2(a) corrected by errata to (a)
(11-1436, 12-1575)
41 NF-3282.2 Equations renumbered editorially
41 NF-3282.3 Equations numbered editorially
42 NF-3311.1 Revised (10-1805)
76 NF-3382.2 Equations renumbered editorially
76 NF-3382.3 Equations numbered editorially
80 NF-3480 Procedure for corrected by errata (12-1312)
Page Location Change (Record Number)
95 Table NF-4622.1-1 First entry in fifth column and all entries in the last column revised
(11-936)
143 Nonmandatory Appendix Added (10-217)
NF-E
NOTE: Volume 62 of the Interpretations to Section III, Divisions 1 and 2, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
follows the last page of Subsection NCA.
LIST OF CHANGES IN RECORD NUMBER ORDER
Record Number Change

09-760 Added an introductory subtitle clarifying the purpose and limitations of the Foreword. Revised history
paragraph to recognize the realignment of the BPV into several BPVs. Deleted the paragraph on toler-
ances. Made editorial changes to recognize the new committee structure. Deleted words addressing
governing code editions. Deleted paragraph concerning materials. Deleted the paragraph dealing with
what the committee considers in the formulation of these rules
10-217 Added new definitions for snubber, damper, and energy absorber in NCA-9200. Added new Non-
mandatory Appendix NF-E covering snubbers, dampers, and energy absorbers.
10-1805 Added new NF-2128 to provide material requirements for threaded fasteners for bolted connections.
11-936 Editorially revised Table NF-4622.1-1.
11-1436 Errata corrections. See Summary of Changes for details.
12-749 Changed the existing Division 1 Appendices to Section III Appendices and added a reference table ad-
dressing each Section III Appendix and each Division/Subsection. Revised pages from Section III Sub-
sections to reflect that the Division 1 Appendices no longer exist. Revised Appendices that remain
specific to just a single subsection (Subsections NH and CC) to identify their association within that
Subsection and to eliminate any duplicate appendix callouts. Made minor editorial and errata correc-
tions
12-1447 Added NF-1110(e)(11).
12-1641 Deleted Mandatory from Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Com-
mittee Mandatory in the front matter.
12-1878 Deleted the Scope page from the front matter of Division 5, and incorporated the pertinent informa-
tion into the Section III Organization pages.
13 CROSS-REFERENCING AND STYLISTIC CHANGES IN THE BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:
Subparagraph Breakdowns/Nested Lists Hierarchy

First-level breakdowns are designated as (a), (b), (c), etc., as in the past.
Second-level breakdowns are designated as (1), (2), (3), etc., as in the past.
Third-level breakdowns are now designated as (-a), (-b), (-c), etc.
Fourth-level breakdowns are now designated as (-1), (-2), (-3), etc.
Fifth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+a), (+b), (+c), etc.
Sixth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+1), (+2), etc.
Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as end-
notes. The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).
Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facilitate
this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the designator/
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
identifier of that subsection/subarticle. Examples follow:

(Sub-)Paragraph Cross-References. The cross-references to subparagraph breakdowns will follow the hierarchy of the
designators under which the breakdown appears.
If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) and is referenced in X.1(c)(1), it will be referenced as (-a).
If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(c)(2), it will be referenced as (1)(-a).
If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(e)(1), it will be referenced as (c)(1)(-a).
If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.2(c)(2), it will be referenced as X.1(c)(1)(-a).
Equation Cross-References. The cross-references to equations will follow the same logic. For example, if eq. (1) ap-
pears in X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in X.1(b), it will be referenced as eq. (a)(1)(1). If eq. (1) appears in X.1(a)(1)
but is referenced in a different subsection/subarticle/paragraph, it will be referenced as eq. X.1(a)(1)(1).
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-1100 SCOPE AND GENERAL (2) The exempt item shall be designed for the loading
REQUIREMENTS conditions and other requirements identified in the Design
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Specification.
13 NF-1110 ASPECTS OF CONSTRUCTION COVERED (3) Design Output Documents (NCA3550) shall indi-
BY THESE RULES cate items that are exempt.
(4) Materials, fabrication, and installation of the ex-
(a) Subsection NF contains rules for the material, de-
empt items shall comply with Design Output Documents.
sign, fabrication, examination, installation, and prepara-
tion of certification documents (Certificate of Compliance (5) Class 1 springs shall be inspected in accordance
and NS1 Certificate of Conformance) for supports for with NF-2520.
components and piping which are intended to conform (6) Washers shall comply with the requirements of
to the requirements for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC construction NF-2128(b) and NF-4700.
as set forth in Subsections NB, NC, ND, and NE, respec- (7) Wire rope shall comply with the requirements of
tively, of this Section. NF-2530 and Article NF-3000.
(b) They do not cover deterioration that may occur in (8) Compression spring end plates shall comply with
service as a result of corrosion, erosion, radiation effects, the requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
or metallurgical instability of the materials (NCA1130). and NF-8000.
(c) Nuclear power plant supports1 for which the rules (9) Compression dynamic stops shall comply with the
are specified in this Subsection are those metal elements requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
which transmit loads between components (NCA1210), and NF-8000.
including piping systems, and intervening elements and (10) Thread locking devices shall comply with the re-
the building structure. However, the term supports does quirements of NF-4725.1.
not encompass a structural element the sole function of (11) The means by which exempt items are attached
which is to carry dynamic loads caused by a postulated to supports shall comply with the applicable requirements
loss of pressure retaining integrity. of this Subsection.
(d) The Owner shall be responsible for assuring the ade-
quacy of the building structure and all intervening ele-
ments in the support load path in accordance with the NF-1120 RULES FOR SUPPORTS AND THEIR
requirements of NCA3240 and NCA3250. To the extent CLASSIFICATION
necessary, the support designer shall consider the struc-
NF-1121 Rules for Supports
tural interaction with intervening elements and the build-
ing structure. The rules of Subsection NF provide requirements for
(e) Except for the requirements listed in (1) through new construction and include consideration of mechanical
(11), the requirements of Subsection NF do not apply to stresses and effects which result from the constraint of
bearings, bushings, gaskets, hydraulic fluids, seals, shims, freeend displacements and anchor point motions defined
slide plates, retaining rings, wear shoes, springs, washers, in NF-3121.12 and NF-3121.13, but not thermal or peak
wire rope, compression spring end plates, thread locking stresses.
devices, cotter pins, sight glass assemblies, spring hanger
travel and hydro stops, nameplates, nameplate attachment
devices, or for compression dynamic stops used as stops2 NF-1122 Classification of Supports
for seismic and other dynamic loads that are designed pri- Supports shall be constructed to the requirements of
marily for compressive loading and are not connected to this Subsection that are applicable to the class of the com-
the support or pressure boundary. ponent, including piping system, they are intended to sup-
(1) The material of the exempt items shall be selected port. Supports may be optionally classified as permitted in
to tolerate the environmental conditions to which they NCA2134. When the components are optionally classified
will be exposed, such as temperature, fluids, humidity, to a higher class as permitted in NCA2134(d), the support
and irradiation. need not be classified to the higher class.
NF-1130 BOUNDARIES OF JURISDICTION NF-1200 TYPES OF SUPPORTS AND

NF-1131 Boundary Between Components and ATTACHMENTS
Supports NF-1210 TYPES OF SUPPORTS
The jurisdictional boundary between components, in- NF-1211 General Requirements
cluding piping systems, and supports shall meet the re- In this Subsection all supports are categorized into
quirements of NB1132, NC1132, ND1132, or NE1132 three separate types based on the general design proce-
as applicable to the class of component. dure used for analysis of the support (NF-3140). Require-
ments for materials, design, fabrication, and examination
for each of the three types are provided in the following
NF-1132 Boundary Between Supports and the Articles of this Subsection. These support types are de-
Building Structure fined in NF-1212 through NF-1215.
(a) Supports may bear on or may be welded, bolted,
pinned, or clamped to the building structure. Typical ex- NF-1212 Plate and Shell Type Supports
amples of jurisdictional boundaries defined between sup- A Plate and Shell Type Support is a support such as a
ports and building structures are shown in Figures skirt or saddle which is fabricated from plate and shell ele-
NF-1132-1 and NF-1132-2. ments and is normally subjected to a biaxial stress field.
(b) The jurisdictional boundary between a support and
the load carrying building structure is the surface of the NF-1213 Linear Type Support
building structure. A Linear Type Support is defined as acting under essen-
(c) For the purpose of defining the jurisdictional bound- tially a single component of direct stress. Such elements
ary between a support and the building structure, struc- may also be subjected to shear stresses. Examples of such
tural members shown on the civil/structural drawings of structural elements are tension and compression struts,
the plant and considered in the building structural analy- beams and columns subjected to bending, trusses, frames,
sis may be designated building structure even though lo- rings, arches, and cables. Energy absorbing parts designed
cated in the support load path. However, structural to dissipate energy by yielding and which are incorpo-
members, except as defined in (d), detailed on support rated into a linear type piping support shall be con-
drawings which are installed and used for the primary structed in accordance with Mandatory Appendix NF-III.
purpose of supporting piping or components shall be de-
signated supports and be constructed to the rules of this NF-1214 Standard Supports
Subsection.
Typical Standard Supports are described in MSS SP58,
(d) Surface mounted base plates, with or without grout-
Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials, Design, and Manu-
ing; fully or partially embedded steel elements intended to
facture, which was developed and approved by the Manu-
receive loads transmitted by supports; concrete anchors;
facturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
and holddown bolts, nuts, and washers shall be designated
Industry. Typical catalog items are shown in
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
building structure.
Figure NF-1214-1. The capacities of standard supports
(e) If the means by which the support is connected to may be determined using plate and shell analysis or linear
the building structure is a weld, the weld shall fall within analysis or load rating. Examples of standard supports are
the jurisdiction of this Subsection. (a) rigid supports consisting of anchors, guides, re-
(f) If the means by which the support is connected to straints, rolling or sliding supports, and rodtype hangers
the building structure is a bolted joint to a building struc- (b) constant and variable type spring hangers
tural steel member, the bolts shall fall within the jurisdic- (c) snubbers
tion of this Subsection. (d) sway braces and vibration dampeners
(e) structural attachments such as ears, shoes, lugs,
rings, clamps, slings, straps, and clevises
NF-1133 Boundary Between Supports and (f) dampers
Intervening Elements
NF-1215 Primary and Secondary Members
The jurisdictional boundary between supports and in-
tervening elements in the support load path is the surface Support members are also categorized as primary or
of the intervening elements. Supports may bear on or may secondary according to function. These member types
be welded, bolted, pinned, or clamped to intervening ele- are defined in the following paragraphs.
ments. The means by which supports are connected to in- (a) Primary Members. Primary members of supports are
tervening elements shall fall within the jurisdiction of this defined as those members designed to carry loads under
Subsection. any postulated load condition.
Figure NF-1132-1
Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports and the Building Structure
Building structure
Building structure
Building structure
NF
Building structure
Building structure
Building structure
NF
Connection in
accordance Snubber
Connection in
accordance with NF NF NF
with NF
Connection in
accordance
with NF
(c)
(a) (b)
Connection in
Building structure
accordance
with NF NF
NF
Surface mounted baseplate Connection in

with or without grout. Bolts, accordance
nuts, and concrete anchors with NF
shall be building structure
(e)
Grout Building structure
Concrete anchor
(d)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,
Figure NF-1132-1
(Cont'd)
Figure NF-1132-1
(Cont'd)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-1132-2
Typical Example of Jurisdictional Boundary Between Component Support and the Building Structure
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-1214-1
Typical Standard Support Units
Threaded Threaded Rod Steel

Rod With Fastener Welded Steel Steel Weldless
Attachment Turnbuckle Clevis Eye Bolt
Angles Steel Pipe Steel Double Steel

Lug Plate Clamp Bolt Pipe Pipe Clamp
Clamp
Riser Clamp Sliding U-Bolt Spring Sway Brace

Surface
Variable Spring
Base Support Snubber
Variable
Spring Hanger
Constant Support Damper

Horizontal Type Constant Support
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Vertical Type
(b) Secondary Members. Secondary members are de- NF-1240 ATTACHMENTS

fined as those members typically used as bracing to main- NF-1242 Attachments to Supports
tain primary member system geometry, and which under
all loading conditions, are not designed to sustain any sig- Attachments to supports may be permanent or tempor-
nificant stress. Significant stress is defined as being in ex- ary, are nonstructural, and are not in the support load
cess of 50% of the allowable stress permitted by NF-3000. path.
NF-1230 WELDING BETWEEN TYPES OF

SUPPORTS
NF-1231 Welded Joints Between Plate and Shell
Type and Linear Type Supports
Welded joints between Plate and Shell Type Supports
(NF-1212), and Linear Type Supports (NF-1213) shall
meet the rules of either Plate and Shell Type or Linear
Type welded joints of this Subsection.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-2000
MATERIAL
NF-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Article. The requirements of this Article do not apply to
MATERIAL materials used as backing rings or backing strips in
welded joints.
NF-2110 SCOPE OF PRINCIPAL TERMS
EMPLOYED NF-2122 Special Requirements Conflicting With
(a) The term material as used in this Subsection is de- Permitted Material Specifications
fined in NCA9000. The term Material Organization (Me- (a) Special requirements stipulated in this Article shall
tallic) is defined in NCA9000. apply in lieu of the requirements of the material specifica-
(b) The requirements of this Article make reference to tions wherever the special requirements conflict with the
the term thickness. For the purpose intended, the following material specification requirements [NCA3856.3(d)].
definitions of nominal thickness apply: Where the special requirements include an examination,
(1) p la t e : the thickness is the dimension of the short test, or treatment which is also required by the material
transverse direction. specification, the examination, test, or treatment need be
(2) forgings: the thickness is the dimension defined as performed only once. Required nondestructive examina-
follows: tions shall be performed as specified for each product
form in NF-2500. Any examination, repair, test, or treat-
(-a) hollow forgings: the nominal thickness is mea-
ment required by the material specification or by this Ar-
sured between the inside and outside surfaces (radial
ticle may be performed by the Material Organization or the
thickness).
Certificate Holder, as provided in NF-4121.1. Pipe or tube
(-b) disk forgings (axial length less than the outside
material used under the rules of this Subsection need not
diameter): the nominal thickness is the axial length.
be hydrostatically or pneumatically tested, provided these
(-c) flat ring forgings (axial length less than the ra- materials are not used in a pressure retaining function.
dial thickness): for axial length 2 in. (50 mm), the axial (b) Copper and copperbased alloys shall not be used
length is the nominal thickness. For axial length >2 in. for structural members.
(50 mm), the radial thickness is the nominal thickness. (c) The stress rupture test of SA-453 and SA-638 for
(-d) rectangular solid forgings: the least rectangu- Grade 660 (UNS S66286) is not required for design tem-
lar dimension is the nominal thickness. peratures of 800F (427C) and below.
(3) castings: thickness, t , is defined as the largest
nominal thickness of the load carrying portion of the NF-2124 Size Ranges
casting. Material outside the limits of size or thickness given in
any specification in Section II may be used if the material
NF-2120 SUPPORT MATERIAL is in compliance with the other requirements of the speci-
fication and no size limitation is given in the rules for con-
13 NF-2121 Permitted Material Specifications
struction. In those specifications in which chemical
(a) Except as provided in (b) or NF-2128, material for composition or mechanical properties are indicated to
supports shall conform to the requirements of the specifi- vary with size or thickness, any material outside the spe-
cations for material listed in the tables of Section II, Part D, cification range shall be required to conform to the compo-
including all applicable footnotes in the table, applicable to sition and mechanical properties shown for the nearest
the Class of construction, as indicated in specified range [NCA3856.3(d)].
Table NF-2121(a)-1.
(b) The requirements of Article NF-2000 do not apply NF-2128 Bolting Material 13
to exempt items as indicated in NF-1110(e). Certificates (a) Material for bolts and studs shall conform to the re-
of Compliance (NF-2130) are not required for exempt quirements of one of the specifications listed in Section II,
items. Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3 or Table 4. Materials listed in
(c) Welding and brazing material used in manufacture Table 3 may be used for Class 2 and Class 3 supports
of items shall comply with an SFA Specification in Section and for Class 1 Standard Supports. Materials listed in
II, Part C, except as otherwise permitted in Section IX, and Table 4 may be used for Class 1 supports. Material for nuts
shall also comply with the applicable requirements of this shall conform to SA-194, SA-563, or to the requirements of
13 Table NF-2121(a)-1
Material Tables Required for Supports
Section II, Part D,
Table Y-1, Table
Section II, Part D, Section II, Part D, 4 [Note (1)], and
Tables 2A and Tables 1A and 1B, Table 3 [Note Section II, Part D,
2B, Design Stress Allowable Stress (2)], Yield Table U, Tensile
Intensity Values, Values, Strength Values, Strength Values,
Type and Class Sm S Sy Su
Plate and shell
Class 1 x x x
Class 2 and MC x x x
Class 3 x x x
Bolting (all classes) x x
Linear
Class 1 x x
Class 2 and MC x x
Class 3 x x
Bolting (all classes) x x
Standard support
Class 1 x (plate and shell) x (linear) x (All Types)
Bolting (all classes) x (linear) x (All Types)
Applicable Class Cl. 1 Cl. 2, Cl. 3, and MC All Classes All Classes
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Table Y2 of Section II, Part D, provides permanent strain limiting factor for plate and shelltype supports.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) Tables TE and TM of Section II, Part D, provide values of the coefficient of thermal expansion and modulus
of elasticity, respectively.
NOTES:
(1) When values are not provided in Table Y-1, tabulated values in Table 4 may be multiplied by 3 to arrive at
values that may be used for S y . Round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa).
(2) When values are not provided in Table Y-1, tabulated values in Table 3 may be multiplied by 1.5 to arrive at
values that may be used for S y . Round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa).
one of the specifications for nuts or bolting listed in Sec- shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports
tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 3 and 4. Material for nuts when impact testing is required (NF-2311). Copies of
may also conform to the specification for suitable nuts these certificates shall be provided with the support.
identified in a permitted bolting specification. (b) Certificates of Compliance with the material specifi-
Table NF-2121(a)-1 provides the source for the yield cation, grade, class, and heat treated condition, as applic-
and tensile strength values required for design. able, or Certified Material Test Reports shall be provided
(b) Unless required by NF-4720, the use of washers is by the Material Organization for material for all other sup-
optional. When used, they shall be made of wrought mate- ports, Standard Supports, and secondary members of all
rial with mechanical properties compatible with the nuts types and Classes of supports.
with which they are to be employed. (c) When Design Documents, such as the Design Report
or Load Capacity Data Sheet, permit the use of alternative
materials for which certificates of compliance are per-
mitted, the alternative materials may be documented in
the Design Documents or the documentation for the sup-
NF-2130 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIAL
port in lieu of documenting the specific material used.
(a) Material used in the construction of supports shall The requirements of NF-2150 for identification of materi-
be certified. Certified Material Test Reports in accordance als shall apply.
with NCA3862 shall be provided for material used for pri- (d) When material Certificates of Compliance are per-
mary members for Class 1 Plate and Shell Type Supports, mitted, the support manufacturer shall transmit copies
and Class 1 Linear Type Supports. Material for other of the material Certificates of Compliance applicable to
Classes of supports and all Classes of Standard Supports each support. Alternatively, he shall execute and furnish
a single document certifying a listing of all material speci- calibrated pyrometric instruments. Heat treating shall be
fications involved in the shipment. When a single docu- performed under furnace loading conditions such that
ment is furnished, his quality program shall provide for the heat treatment is in accordance with the material spe-
his retention of the material Certificates of Compliance cification and the rules of this Subsection.
for each of the materials incorporated into the supports.
NF-2140 WELDING MATERIAL NF-2200 MATERIAL TEST COUPONS AND

For the requirements governing the material to be used SPECIMENS FOR FERRITIC STEEL
for welding, see NF-2400. MATERIAL
NF-2150 MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION NF-2210 HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS
The identification of material requiring Certified Materi- NF-2211 Test Coupon Heat Treatment for Ferritic
al Test Reports shall meet the requirements of NCA3856. Material3
Material furnished by a Material Organization with Certifi- If ferritic steel material is subjected to heat treatment
cates of Compliance shall be identified by a controlled sys- during construction of a support, the material used for
tem meeting the requirements of the applicable material the impact test specimens shall be heat treated in the same
specification, grade, and class. Identification of the materi- manner as the support, except that test coupons and speci-
al to the Material Organizations Certificate of Compliance mens for PNo. 1 Group Nos. 1 and 2 material with a nom-
is not required after the support manufacturer has veri- inal thickness of 2 in. (50 mm) or less are not required to
fied that the material meets the requirements of this Sec- be so heat treated. The support manufacturer shall pro-
tion. Material for small items shall be controlled during the vide the Material Organization with the temperature and
manufacture of the supports so that they are identifiable heating and cooling rate to be used. In the case of postweld
as acceptable material at all times. Welding material shall heat treatment, the total time at temperature or tempera-
be controlled during the repair of material and the manu- tures for the test material shall be at least 80% of the total
facture and installation of supports so that it is identifiable time at temperature or temperatures during actual post-
as acceptable material until the material is actually con- weld heat treatment of the material, and the total time
sumed in the process (NF-4122). at temperature or temperatures for the test material, cou-
pon, or specimen may be performed in a single cycle.
NF-2160 DETERIORATION OF MATERIAL IN
SERVICE
NF-2212 Test Coupon Heat Treatment for
Consideration of deterioration of material caused by
Quenched and Tempered Material
service is generally outside the scope of this Subsection.
It is the responsibility of the Owner to select material sui- NF-2212.1 Cooling Rates. When ferritic steel material
table for the conditions stated in the Design Specifications is subjected to quenching from the austenitizing tempera-
(NCA3250), with specific attention being given to the ef- ture, the test coupons representing those materials shall
fect of Service Conditions upon the properties of the be cooled at a rate similar to and no faster than the main
material. body of the material except in the case of certain forgings
and castings (NF-2223.3 and NF-2226.4). This rule shall
NF-2170 HEAT TREATMENT TO ENHANCE apply for coupons taken directly from the material as well
IMPACT PROPERTIES as for separate test coupons representing the material,
Carbon steel, low alloy steels, and high alloy chromium and o ne o f the general pro cedures described in
(Series 4XX) steels may be heat treated by quenching and NF-2212.2 or one of the specific procedures described in
tempering to enhance their impact properties. Postweld NF-2220 shall be used for each product form.
heat treatment of the support at a temperature of not less NF-2212.2 General Procedures. One of the general
than 1,100F (595C) may be considered to be the temper- procedures in (a), (b), and (c) may be applied to quenched
ing phase of the heat treatment. and tempered material or test coupons representing the
material, provided the specimens are taken relative to
NF-2180 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT TREATMENT the surface of the product in accordance with NF-2220.
OF MATERIAL Further specific details of the methods to be used shall
When heat treating temperature or time is required by be the obligation of the Material Organization and the Cer-
the material specification and the rules of this Subsection, tificate Holder.
the heat treating shall be performed in temperature (a) Any procedure may be used which can be demon-
surveyed and calibrated furnaces or the heat treating strated to produce a cooling rate in the test material that
shall be controlled by measurement of material tempera- matches the cooling rate of the main body of the product
ture thermocouples in contact with the material or at- within 25F (14C) and 20 sec at all temperatures after
tached to blocks in contact with the material or by cooling begins.
(b) If cooling rate data for the material and cooling rate product are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2(b),
control devices for the test specimens are available, the the dimensions of the coupon shall not be less than
test specimens may be heat treated in the device to repre- 3t 3t t , where t is the nominal material thickness.
sent the material, provided that the provisions of (a) are
met.
(c) When any of the specific procedures described in NF-2223 Forgings
NF-2220 are used, faster cooling rates at the edges may NF-2223.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta-
be compensated for by ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at
(1) taking the test specimens at least t from a least 1/4t from any surface and with the midlength of the
quenched edge, where t equals the material thickness specimens at least t from any second surface, where t is
(2) attaching a steel pad at least t wide by a partial the maximum heat treated thickness. A thermal buffer as
penetration weld (which completely seals the buffered described in NF-2212.2(c) may be used to achieve these
surface) to the edge where specimens are to be removed conditions, unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk for-
or gings are simulated as otherwise provided in NF-2212.2.
(3) using thermal barriers or insulation at the edge
NF-2223.2 Very Thick and Complex Forgings. Test
where specimens are to be removed
coupons for forgings that are both very thick and complex,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
It shall be demonstrated (and this information shall be
such as trunnions, support forgings, flanges, and other
included in the Certified Material Test Report) that the
complex forgings that are contour shaped or machined
cooling rates are equivalent to (a) or (b).
to essentially the finished product configuration prior to
heat treatment, may be removed from prolongations or
NF-2220 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING TEST other stock provided on the product. The Certificate
COUPONS AND SPECIMENS FOR Holder shall specify the surfaces of the finished product
QUENCHED AND TEMPERED MATERIAL subjected to high tensile stresses in service. The coupons
NF-2221 General Requirements shall be taken so that specimens shall have their longitudi-
nal axes at a distance below the nearest heattreated sur-
The procedure for obtaining impact test specimens for face, equivalent to at least the greatest distance that the
quenched and tempered material is related to the product indicated high tensile stress surface will be from the near-
form. Coupon and specimen location shall be as required est surface during heat treatment, and with the midlength
by the material specification, except as stated in the fol- of the specimens a minimum of twice this distance from a
lowing paragraphs of this Subarticle. References to dimen- second heattreated surface. In any case, the longitudinal
sions signify nominal values. axes of the specimens shall not be nearer than 3/4 in.
(19 mm) to any heattreated surface and the midlength
NF-2222 Plates of the specimens shall be at least 11/2 in. (38 mm) from
NF-2222.1 Number of Tension Test Coupons. The any heattreated surface.
number of tension test coupons required shall be in accor- NF-2223.3 Coupons From Separately Produced Test
dance with the material specification and with SA-20, ex- Forgings. Test coupons representing forgings from one
cept that from carbon steel plates weighing 42,000 lb heat and one heat treatment lot may be taken from a sepa-
(19 000 kg) and over and alloy steel plates weighing rately forged piece under the conditions given in (a)
40,000 lb (18 000 kg) and over, two tension test coupons through (e).
shall be taken, one representing the top end of the plate
(a) The separate test forging shall be of the same heat of
and one representing the bottom end of the plate.
material and shall be subjected to substantially the same
NF-2222.2 Orientation and Location of Coupons. reduction and working as the production forging it
Coupons shall be taken so that specimens shall have their represents.
longitudinal axes at least 1/4t from a rolled surface and (b) The separate test forging shall be heat treated in the
with the midlength of the specimen at least t from any same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the
heat treated edge, where t is the nominal thickness of production forging.
the material. The orientation of the coupons shall be as (c) The separate test forging shall be of the same nom-
specified in the material specification. inal thickness as the production forging.
NF-2222.3 Requirements for Separate Test Cou- (d) Test coupons for simple forgings shall be taken so
pons. Where a separate test coupon is used to represent that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at the re-
the support material, it shall be of sufficient size to ensure gion midway between midthickness and the surface and
that the cooling rate of the region from which the test cou- with the midlength of the specimens no nearer to any heat
pons are removed represents the cooling rate of the mate- treated edge than a distance equal to the forging thickness,
rial at least 1/4t deep and t from any edge of the product. except when the thicknesslength ratio of the production
Unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk pieces or forging does not permit, in which case a production
forging shall be used as the test forging and the midlength (a) The separate test coupon representing castings from
of the specimens shall be at the midlength of the test one heat and one heat treated lot shall be of the same heat
forgings. of material and shall be subjected to substantially the
(e) Test coupons for complex forgings shall be taken in same foundry practices as the production casting it
accordance with NF-2223.2. represents.
(b) The separate test coupon shall be heat treated in the
NF-2224 Bars and Bolting Material same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the
NF-2224.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta- production casting, unless cooling rates applicable to the
ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at bulk castings are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2.
least 1/4t from the outside or rolled surface and with the (c) The separate test coupon shall not be less than
midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated 3t 3t t , where t equals the nominal thickness of the
end, where t is either the bar diameter or thickness. casting. Test specimens shall be taken with their longitudi-
nal axes at the region midway between midthickness and
NF-2224.2 Bolting Material. For bolting material, the
the surface and with the midlength of the specimens no
coupons shall be taken in conformance with the applicable
nearer any heat treated edge than a distance equal to
material specification and with the midlength of the speci-
the casting thickness.
men at least one diameter or thickness from a heat treated
end. When the studs, nuts, or bolts are not of sufficient NF-2226.4 Castings Machined or Cast to Finished
length, the midlength of the specimen shall be at the mid- Configuration Before Heat Treatment. In lieu of the re-
length of the studs, nuts, or bolts. The studs, nuts, or bolts quirements of NF-2226.1, NF-2226.2, or NF-2226.3, test
selected to provide test coupon material shall be identical coupons may be removed from prolongations or other
with respect to the quenched contour and size, except for stock provided on the product. The coupons shall be taken
length, which shall equal or exceed the length of the repre- so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at a
sented studs, nuts, or bolts. distance below the nearest heattreated surface equivalent
at least to the greatest distance that the indicated high ten-
NF-2225 Tubular Products and Fittings sile stress surface will be from the nearest surface during
heat treatment and with the midlength of the specimens a
NF-2225.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta-
minimum of twice this distance from a second heat
ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at
treated surface. In any case, the longitudinal axes of the
least 1/4t from the inside or outside surface and with the
specimens shall be at least 3/4 in. (19 mm) from any heat
midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated
end, where t is the nominal wall thickness of the tubular treated surface and the midlength of the specimens shall
product. be at least 11/2 in. (38 mm) from any second heattreated
surface. The Certificate Holder shall specify the surfaces of
NF-2225.2 Separately Produced Coupons Repre- the finished product subjected to high tensile stresses in
senting Fittings. Separately produced test coupons repre- service.
senting fittings may be used. When separately produced
coupons are used, the requirements of NF-2223.3 shall NF-2227 Rolled Shapes
be met.
For rolled shapes, the coupons shall be taken so that
NF-2226 Castings specimens shall have their longitudinal axes on a line re-
presenting the center of the thickest element of the shape
NF-2226.1 Castings With 2 in. (50 mm) Maximum
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and with the midlength of the specimen at least t from a
Thickness and Less. For castings with a maximum thick- heat treated end.
ness of 2 in. (50 mm) and less, the specimens shall be ta-
ken from either the standard separately cast coupons or
the casting, in accordance with the material specification. NF-2300 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS
NF-2226.2 Castings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIAL
in. (50 mm) Maximum Thickness. For castings exceeding
a thickness of 2 in. (50 mm), the coupons shall be taken
NF-2310 MATERIAL TO BE IMPACT TESTED
from the casting (or an extension of it) so that specimens NF-2311 Supports for Which Impact Testing of
shall have their longitudinal axes at least 1/4t of the maxi- Material Is Required4
mum heat treated thickness from any surface and with the (a) Support materials shall be impact tested in accor-
midlength of the specimens at least t from any second sur- dance with the requirements listed below.
face. A thermal buffer may be used [NF-2212.2(c)(3)]. (1) Attachments to the component or piping shall
NF-2226.3 Separately Cast Test Coupons for Cast- meet the requirements for impact testing stipulated in
ings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2 in. (50 mm). In lieu the applicable Subsection.
of the requirements of NF-2226.2, separately cast test cou- (2) Class 1, 2, 3, and MC component supports shall
pons may be used under the conditions of (a) through (c). meet the requirements of NF-2300.
(3) For Class 1, 2, and 3 piping supports, Class 1, 2,

Table NF-2311(b)-1
and 3 Standard Supports, and all other types and Classes
Exemptions From Impact Testing Under
of supports, the Design Specification (NCA3250) shall
NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) for Material
state whether or not impact testing is required for the ma-
Thickness to 21/2 in. (64 mm), Inclusive
terial of which the support is constructed. When impact
testing is required, the tests shall meet the requirements T N D T , F (C)
of NF-2300 for Class 1, 2, 3, or MC, respectively and shall Material Condition [Note (2)],
become a requirement of this Subsection. Material [Note (1)] [Note (1)] [Note (3)]
SA-537, Class 1 N 30 (35)
(b) The requirements for supports shall be as specified
SA-516, Grade 70 Q& T 10 (25)
in NF-2300, except that the materials described in (1) SA-516, Grade 70 N 0 (18)
through (13) are not to be impact tested as a requirement SA-508, Class 1 Q& T +10 (10)
of this Subsection. SA-533, Grade B Q& T +10 (10)
(1) Material with a nominal section thickness of 5/8 in. SA-299 [Note (4)] N +20 (7)
SA-216, Grades WCB, WCC Q& T +30 (0)
(16 mm) and less.
SA-36 (Plate) HR +40 (5)
(2) Bolting, including studs, nuts, and bolts, with a SA-508, Class 2 Q& T +40 (5)
nominal size of 1 in. (25 mm) and less.
NOTES:
(3) Bars with a nominal crosssectional area of 1 in.2 (1) Material Condition letters refer to:
(650 mm2) and less. N = Normalize
(4) Material for fittings with all pipe connections of Q & T = Quench and Temper
5 HR = Hot Rolled
/8 in. (16 mm) nominal wall thickness and less.
(2) These values for T N D T were established from data on heavy
(5) Austenitic stainless steels, including precipitation
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
section steel [thickness greater than 21/2 in. (64 mm)]. Values
hardened austenitic Grade 660 (UNS S66286). for sections less than 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick are held constant
(6) Nonferrous materials. until additional data are obtained.
(3) T N D T = temperature at or above nilductility transition tem-
(7) Material for supports when the maximum stress perature (ASTM E208); T N D T is 10F (5.6C) below the tem-
does not exceed 6,000 psi (40 MPa) tension or is perature at which at least two specimens show nobreak
compressive. performance.
(8) Rolled structural shapes, when the thickness of a (4) Materials made to a fine grain melting practice.
flange is 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less.
(9) Materials for Class 1, 2, or MC supports, listed in
Table NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21/2 in. (64 mm) and NF-2320 IMPACT TEST PROCEDURES
less when the Lowest Service Temperature 5 is at least NF-2321 Charpy VNotch Tests
30F (15C) above the tabulated temperature. This exemp-
tion from impact testing does not apply to either the weld The Charpy Vnotch test (Cv), when required, shall be
metal (NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification performed in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall
(NF-4335). be in accordance with SA-370, Figure 11, Type A. A test
shall consist of a set of three fullsize 10 mm 10 mm spe-
(10) Materials for Class 3 supports, l isted in
cimens. The lateral expansion and absorbed energy, as ap-
Table NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21/2 in. (64 mm) and
plicable, and the test temperature, as well as the
less, when the Lowest Service Temperature is equal to
orientation and location of all tests performed to meet
or greater than the tabulated temperature. This exemption
the requirements of NF-2330 shall be reported in the Cer-
from impact testing does not apply to either the weld me-
tified Material Test Report.
tal ( NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification
(NF-4335).
NF-2322 Location and Orientation of Test
(11) Materials for Class 2 and MC supports for which Specimens
the Lowest Service Temperature exceeds 150F (65C).
Impact test specimens for quenched and tempered ma-
(12) Materials for Class 3 supports for which the Low-
terial shall be removed from the locations and orientation
est Service Temperature exceeds 100F (38C).
specified for tensile test specimens in each product form
(13) Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC supports for in NF-2220 except that for plates the orientation of the im-
which the Lowest Service Temperature (LST) is equal or pact test specimens shall be longitudinal. For material in
above the Minimum Design Metal Temperature of other heat treated conditions, impact test specimens shall
Figure NF-2311(b)-1 for the materials listed and the ap- be removed from the locations and orientations specified
plicable material thicknesses. for tensile test specimens in the material specification ex-
(c) The Design Specification (NCA3250) shall state the cept that for plates the orientation of the impact speci-
Lowest Service Temperature (LST) for the support and the mens shall be longitudinal, and for structural shapes the
designated impact test temperature, when required. location and orientation of the impact test specimens shall
Figure NF-2311(b)-1
Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC Supports
140 (60)
120 (50)
100 (38)
Minimum Design Metal Temperature, F (C)
A*
80 (27)
B*
60 (15)
40 (5)
C
20 (7)
D
0 (18)
20 (30)
40 (40)
50 (46)
60 (51)
Impact testing required
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
80 (62)
0.625 (16) 1(25) 2 (50) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5 (125) 6 (150)
Nominal Thickness, in. (mm)
[Limited to 4 in. (100 mm) for welded construction]
*See NF-2311(b)(12) for Class 3 lowest service temperature limit
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Curve A all carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in Curves B, C, and D below
(b) Curve B
(1) SA-285 Grades A and B
(a) SA-414 Grade A
(b) SA-442 Grade 55 > 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(c) SA-442 Grade 60 if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(d) SA-515 Grades 55 and 60
(e) SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
(f) SA-612 if not normalized
(g) SA-662 Grade B if not normalized
(h) SA-724 if not normalized
(2) all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and normalized which are not listed for Curves C and D below;
(3) except for bolting [see (e) below], plates, structural shapes, and bars, all other product forms (such as pipe, fittings, and tubing) not
listed for Curves C and D below
(c) Curve C
Figure NF-2311(b)-1
Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC Supports (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTES (CONT'D):
(1) SA-182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
(a) SA-302 Grades C and D
(b) SA-336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered
(c) SA-387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
(d) SA-442 Grade 55 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(e) SA-516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
(f) SA-533 Grades B and C
(g) SA-662 Grade A;
(2) all material of Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and normalized and not listed for Curve D below
(d) Curve D
(a) SA-203
(b) SA-442 if to fine grain practice and normalized
(c) SA-508 Class 1
(d) SA-516 if normalized
(e) SA-524 Classes 1 and 2
(f) SA-537 Classes 1 and 2
(g) SA-612 if normalized
(h) SA-662 if normalized
(i) SA-724 if normalized
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(e) For bolting the following impact test exemption temperature shall apply:
Spec. No. Grade Impact Test Exemption Temperature, F (C)
SA-193 B5 20 (30)
B7 40 (40)
B7M 50 (45)
B16 20 (30)
SA-307 B 20 (30)
SA-320 L7, L43 Impact tested
SA-325 1 20 (30)
SA-354 BB 20 (30)
BC 0 (18)
BD +20 (7)
SA-449 20 (30)
be as specified in ASTM Specification A 673. Alternatively, NF-2330 TEST REQUIREMENTS AND

the orientation may be in the direction of maximum stress ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
regardless of heat treatment. For bolting, the Cv impact NF-2331 Material (Excluding Bolting)
test specimens shall be prepared with the longitudinal axis
of the specimen located at least onehalf radius or 1 in. When impact testing is required, material (other than
(25 mm) below the surface plus the machining allowance bolting) shall be tested as required by (a) and (b).
per side, whichever is less. The fracture plane of the speci- (a) Test three Cv specimens at the designated tempera-
men shall be at least one diameter or thickness from the ture (NF-2311). All three specimens shall meet one of the
heat treated end. When the studs, nuts, or bolts are not acceptance standards applicable to the specific test
of sufficient length, the midlength of the specimen shall method.
be at the midlength of the studs, nuts, or bolts. The studs, (1) Charpy VNotch Testing for Lateral Expansion Va-
nuts, or bolts selected to provide test coupon material lues. The test results of the three specimens, collectively
shall be identical with respect to the quenched contour and singly, shall meet the respective requirements of
and size, except for length, which shall equal or exceed Table NF-2331(a)-1 for Class 1, of Table NF-2331(a)-2
the length of the represented studs, nuts, or bolts. For all for Class 2 and MC, and of Table NF-2331(a)-3 for Class
material, the number of tests shall be in accordance with 3 supports.
NF-2340.
Table NF-2331(a)-1 Table NF-2331(a)-3

Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for
Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting Class 3 Support Material Other Than Bolting
Lateral Expansion, mils Lateral Expansion, mils
Nominal Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Nominal Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
(mm) (mm)
5 5
/8 (16) or less No test required /8 (16) or less No test required
Over 5/8 to 1 (16 to 25), incl. 15 (0.38) Over 5/8 (16) 15 (0.38)
Over 1 (25) 25 (0.64)
NF-2342 Forgings and Castings

(2) Charpy VNotch Testing for Absorbed Energy Va-
lues. The test results of the three specimens, collectively (a) Where the weight of an individual forging or casting
and singly, shall meet the respective requirements of is less than 1,000 lb (450 kg), one test shall be made to re-
Table NF-2331(a)-4 for Class 1, of Figure NF-2331(a)-1 present each heat in each heat treatment lot.
for Class 2 and MC, and of Figure NF-2331(a)-2 for Class (b) When heat treatment is performed in a continuous
3 supports. type furnace with suitable temperature controls and
(b) Apply the procedures of (a) to equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete
heat treatment records are available, a heat treatment
(1) base material6 lot shall be considered as the lesser of a continuous run
(2) the base material, the heat affected zone, and weld not exceeding 8 hr duration or a total weight, so treated,
metal from the weld procedure qualification tests of not exceeding 2,000 lb (900 kg).
NF-4330 (c) One test shall be made for each forging or casting of
(3) the weld metal of NF-2431 1,000 lb to 10,000 lb (450 kg to 4 500 kg) in weight.
(d) As an alternative to (c), a separate test forging or
casting may be used to represent forgings or castings of
NF-2333 Bolting Material different sizes in one heat and heat treat lot, provided
the test piece is a representation of the greatest thickness
When impact testing is required, for bolting material in- in the heat treat lot. In addition, test forgings shall have
cluding studs, nuts, and bolts, test three Cv specimens at been subjected to substantially the same reduction and
the designated temperature. All three specimens shall working as the forgings represented.
meet the requirements of Table NF-2333-1. (e) Forgings or castings larger than 10,000 lb
(4 500 kg) shall have two tests per part for Charpy
Vnotch. The location of Cv impact test specimens shall
NF-2340 NUMBER OF IMPACT TESTS REQUIRED be selected so that an equal number of specimens is ob-
tained from positions in the forging or casting 180 deg
NF-2341 Plates
apart.
One test shall be made from each plate as heat treated. (f) As an alternative to (e) for static castings, a sepa-
Where plates are furnished in the unheattreated condi- rately cast test coupon (NF-2226.3) may be used; one test
tion and qualified by heat treated test specimens, one test shall be made for Charpy Vnotch.
shall be made for each plate asrolled. The term asrolled
refers to the plate rolled from a slab or directly from an
ingot, not to its heat treated condition. NF-2343 Bars and Rolled Shapes
(a) For bars, one test shall be made for each diameter or
size greater than 1 in. (25 mm) in each lot, where a lot is
Table NF-2331(a)-2 defined as one heat of material
Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for (1) asrolled in one continuous operation or
Class 2 And MC Support Material Other Than
(2) heat treated in one charge, or each 6,000 lb
Bolting
(2 700 kg) or less from one continuous operation
Lateral Expansion, mils (b) For rolled shapes, the frequency of testing shall be
Nominal Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
(mm)
5
one test (a set of three specimens) for at least each
/8 (16) or less No test required
15 tons (14 000 kg) or each single length of 15 tons
Over 5/8 to 1 (16 to 25), incl. 15 (0.38)
Over 1 (25) 20 (0.50)
(14 000 kg) or more, of the same nominal shape size, ex-
cluding length, for each heat in the asrolled condition. If
the shapes are heat treated, one test shall be taken from
--`,``,``,,`,````,,
Table NF-2331(a)-4
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting
Customary Units
Energy, ftlb for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, ksi
55 ksi or Below Over 55 ksi to 75 ksi, Incl. Over 75 ksi to 105 ksi, Incl.
Nominal Wall Thickness, in. Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3
5
/8 or less [Note (1)]
Over 5/8 to 1, incl. [Note (2)] 15 10 20 15 25 20
Over 1 [Note (2)] 25 20 30 25 35 30
SI Units
Energy, J for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, MPa
380 MPa or Below Over 380 MPa to 515 MPa, Incl. Over 515 MPa to 725 MPa, Incl.
Nominal Wall Thickness, mm Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3
16 or less [Note (1)]
Over 16 to 25, incl. [Note (2)] 20 14 27 20 34 27
Over 25 [Note (2)] 34 27 41 34 47 41
NOTES:
(1) No test required.
(2) Where weld metal tests of NF-2400 are made to these requirements, the impact energy shall conform to the requirements of either
of the base materials being joined.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
each heat of each nominal shape size, excluding length, in NF-2350 RETESTS
each furnace lot. For shapes heat treated in a continuous
furnace, a lot shall not exceed 15 tons (14 000 kg). NF-2351 Retests for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Material
Other Than Bolting
NF-2344 Tubular Products and Fittings
(a) For Charpy Vnotch tests required by NF-2331 to
On products that are seamless or welded without filler
metal, one test shall be made from each lot. On products meet the acceptance standards of Tables NF-2331(a)-1,
which are welded with filler metal, one additional test NF-2331(a)-2, and NF-2331(a)-3, respectively, one retest
with the specimens taken from the weld area shall also at the same temperature may be conducted, provided
be made on each lot. A lot shall be defined as stated in (1) the average value of the test results meets the
the applicable material specification, but in no case shall minimum requirements,
a lot consist of products from more than one heat of mate- (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
rial and of more than one diameter, with the nominal minimum requirements, and
thickness of any product included not exceeding that to
(3) the specimens not meeting the minimum require-
be impact tested by more than 1/4 in. (6 mm); such a lot
ments are not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the spe-
shall be in a single heat treatment load or in the same con-
tinuous run in a continuous furnace controlled within a cified requirements.
50F (28C) range and equipped with recording A retest consists of two additional specimens taken as
pyrometers. near as practicable to the failed specimens. For acceptance
of the retests, both specimens shall meet the minimum
NF-2345 Bolting Material requirements.
One test shall be made for each lot of material where a (b) For Charpy Vnotch tests required by NF-2331 to
lot is defined as one heat of material heat treated in one meet the acceptance standards of Table NF-2331(a)-4,
charge or as one continuous operation, not to exceed the one retest at the same temperature may be conducted
following (in weight): provided
Diameter Weight
(1) the average value of the test results meets the
Average of 3 requirements specified.
13/4 in. (44 mm) and less 1,500 lb (700 kg)
Over 13/4 in. to 21/2 in. (44 mm to 64 mm) 3,000 lb (1 350 kg) (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
1
Over 2 /2 in. to 5 in. (64 mm to 125 mm) 6,000 lb (2 700 kg) Lowest 1 of 3 requirements specified.
Over 5 in. (125 mm) 10,000 lb (4 500 kg) (3) the specimen not meeting the requirements is not
lower than 5 ftlb (7 J) below the Lowest 1 of 3 require-
ments specified.
Figure NF-2331(a)-1
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 2 and MC Support Material Other Than Bolting
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0.625 (16)
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
75 ksi (515 MPa)
65 ksi (450 MPa)

30 (41)
55 ksi (380 MPa)
45 ksi (310 MPa)
20 (27)
38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
0 (0) 1.0 (25) 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75)

Maximum Nominal Thickness of Material or Weld, in. (mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
Figure NF-2331(a)-2
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 3 support Material Other Than Bolting
0.625 (16)
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
75 ksi (515 MPa)
65 ksi (450 MPa)

30 (41)
55 ksi (380 MPa)
45 ksi (310 MPa)
20 (27)
38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
0 (0) 1.0 (25) 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75)

Maximum Nominal Thickness of Material or Weld, in. (mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
Table NF-2333-1 NF-2400 WELDING MATERIAL

Required Cv Values for Bolting Material NF-2410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Nominal Diameter, Lateral Expansion, (a) All welding material used in the construction and re-
in. (mm) mils (mm) pair of supports or material, except welding material used
1 (25) or less No test required for cladding or hard surfacing, shall conform to the re-
Over 1 (25) 25 (0.64) quirements of the welding material specification or to
the requirements for other welding material as permitted
in Section IX. In addition, welding material shall conform
to the requirements stated in this Subarticle and to the
(4) a retest consists of two additional specimens ta- rules covering identification in NF-2150.
ken as near as practicable to the failed specimens. For ac- (b) The Certificate Holder shall provide the organization
ceptance of the retests, both specimens shall be equal to or performing the testing with the following information, as
greater than the Average of 3 requirements specified. applicable:
(1) welding process
(2) SFA Specification and classification
NF-2352 Retests for Bolting for Charpy VNotch (3) other identification if no SFA Specification applies
Tests (4) minimum tensile strength [ NF-2431.1(e)] in
either the aswelded or heat treated condition, or both
For Charpy Vnotch tests of bolting required by [NF-2431.1(c)]
NF-2333 to meet the acceptance standards of (5) Charpy Vnotch test for material aswelded or
Table NF-2333-1, one retest at the same temperature heat treated, or both (NF-2331); the test temperature,
may be conducted, provided and the lateral expansion or the absorbed energy, shall
(a) the average value of the test results meets the mini- be provided
mum requirements. (6) the preheat and interpass temperatures to be
(b) not more than one specimen per test is below the used during welding of the test coupon [NF-2431.1(c)]
minimum requirements. (7) postweld heat treatment time, temperature range,
and maximum cooling rate, if the production weld will be
(c) the specimens not meeting the minimum require-
heat treated [NF-2431.1(c)]
ments are not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the spe-
(8) elements for which chemical analysis is required
cified requirements.
per the SFA Specification or WPS and NF-2432
(d) a retest consists of two additional specimens taken (9) minimum delta ferrite (NF-2433)
as near as practicable to the failed specimens. For accep-
tance of the retests, both specimens shall meet the mini-
NF-2420 REQUIRED TESTS
mum requirements.
The required tests shall be conducted for each lot of
covered, flux cored, or fabricated electrodes; for each heat
of bare electrodes, rod, or wire for use with the OFW,
NF-2360 CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and EGW (electrogas welding) pro-
EQUIPMENT
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
cesses (Section IX, QW/QB492); for each heat of consum-

Calibration of temperature instruments and Cv impact able inserts; for each combination of heat of bare
test machines used in impact testing shall be performed electrodes and lot of submerged arc flux; for each combi-
at the frequency specified in (a) or (b). nation of lot of fabricated electrodes and lot of submerged
arc flux; for each combination of heat of bare electrodes or
(a) Temperature instruments used to control test tem-
lot of fabricated electrodes and dry blend of supplemen-
perature of specimens shall be calibrated and the results
tary powdered filler metal and lot of submerged arc flux;
recorded to meet the requirements of NCA3858.2 at least
or for each combination of heat of bare electrodes and
once in each 3 month interval.
lot of electroslag flux. Tests performed on welding materi-
(b) Cv impact test machines shall be calibrated and the al in the qualification of weld procedures will satisfy the
results recorded to meet the requirements of testing requirements for the lot, heat, or combination of
NCA3858.2. The calibrations shall be performed using heat and batch of welding material used, provided the
the frequency and methods outlined in ASTM E23 and em- tests required by NF-4000 and this Subarticle are made
ploying standard specimens obtained from the National and the results conform to the requirements of this Article.
Institute of Standards and Technology, or any supplier of The definitions in (a) through (h) apply.
subcontracted calibration services accredited in accor- (a) A dry batch of covering mixture is defined as the
dance with the requirements of NCA3126 and quantity of dry covering ingredients mixed at one time
NCA3855.3(c). in one mixing vessel; a dry batch may be used singly or
may be subsequently subdivided into quantities to which practice of one splice maximum per coil. A chemical analy-
the liquid binders may be added to produce a number of sis need be taken from only one end of rod coils furnished
wet mixes as in (c). by mills prohibiting spliced coil practice.
(b) A dry blend is defined as one or more dry batches (2) Carbon, manganese, silicon, and other intention-
mixed in a mixing vessel and combined proportionately ally added elements shall be determined to identify the
to produce a uniformity of mixed ingredients equal to that material to ensure that it conforms to the SFA or users
obtained by mixing the same total amount of dry ingredi- material specification.
ents at one time in one mixing vessel. (3) Each container of wire shall be coded for identifi-
(c) A wet mix is defined as the combination of a dry cation and traceability to the lot, production period, shift,
batch or dry blend [(a) and (b), respectively] and liquid line, and analysis of rod used to make the wire.
binder ingredients at one time in one mixing vessel. (g) A lot of submerged arc or electroslag flux is defined
(d) A lot of covered, fluxcored, or fabricated electrodes is as the quantity of flux produced from the same combina-
defined as the quantity of electrodes produced from the tion of raw materials under one production schedule.
same combination of heat of metal and dry batch, dry (h) A dry blend of supplementary powdered filler metal is
blend, or chemically controlled mixes of flux or core mate- defined as one or more mixes of material produced in a
rials. Alternatively, a lot of covered, fluxcored, or fabri- continuous period, not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed
cated electrodes may be considered one type and size of 20,000 lb (9 000 kg) from chemically controlled mixes of
electrode, produced in a continuous period, not to exceed powdered filler metal, provided each container of pow-
24 hr and not to exceed 100,000 lb (45 000 kg), from che- dered metal is coded for identification and traceable to
mically controlled tube, wire, or strip and a dry batch, a the production period, the shift, and the mixing vessel. A
dry blend, or chemically controlled mixes of flux, provided chemically controlled mix of powdered filler metal is de-
each container of welding materials is coded for identifica- fined as powdered filler metal material that has been che-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tion and traceable to the production period, the shift, line, mically analyzed to assure that it conforms to the percent
and analysis range of both the mix and the rod, tube, or allowable variation from the powdered filler metal manu-
strip used to make the electrode. facturers standard, for each chemical element, for that
(1) Chemically controlled tube, wire, or strip is defined type of powdered filler metal. A chemical analysis shall
as consumable tube, wire, or strip material supplied on be made on each mix made in an individual mixing vessel
coils with maximum of one slice per coil that has been che- after blending. The chemical analysis range of the supple-
mically analyzed to assure that the material conforms to mental powdered filler shall be the same as that of the
the electrode manufacturers chemical control limits for welding electrode, and the ratio of powder to electrode
the specific type of electrode. Both ends of each coil shall used to make the test coupon shall be the maximum per-
be chemically analyzed except that those coils which are mitted for production welding.
splice free need only be analyzed on one end of the coil.
(2) Chemically controlled mixes of flux are defined as
NF-2430 WELD METAL TESTS
flux material that has been chemically analyzed to assure
that it conforms to the percent allowable variation from NF-2431 Mechanical Properties Test
the electrode manufacturers standard for each chemical Tensile and impact tests shall be made, in accordance
element for that type electrode. A chemical analysis shall with this paragraph, of welding materials which are used
be made on each mix made in an individual mixing vessel to join PNos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, and 11 base materials in
after blending. any combination, with the exceptions listed in (a) through
(e) A heat of bare electrode, rod, wire, or consumable in- (d).
sert is defined as the material produced from the same (a) austenitic stainless steel and nonferrous welding
melt of metal. material used to join the listed PNumbers
(f) Alternatively, for carbon and low alloy steel bare (b) consumable inserts (backing filler material)
electrode, rod, wire, or consumable inserts for use with
(c) welding material used for GTAW root deposits with
SAW, OFW, GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and EGW processes, a
a maximum of two layers
h e a t may be defined as either the material produced from
(d) welding material to be used for the welding of base
the same melt of metal or the material produced from one
materials exempted from impact testing by
type and size of wire when produced in a continuous per-
NF-2311(b)(1) through NF-2311(b)(8) and
iod, not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed 100,000 lb
NF-2311(b)(11) and NF-2311(b)(12) shall likewise be ex-
(45 000 kg), from chemically controlled wire, subject to
empted from the impact testing required by this
requirements of (1), (2), and (3).
paragraph
(1) For the chemical control of the product of the rod
mill, coils shall be limited to a maximum of one splice prior NF-2431.1 General Test Requirements. The welding
to processing the wire. Chemical analysis shall be made test coupon shall be made in accordance with (a) through
from a sample taken from both ends of each coil of mill (f) using each process with which the weld material will be
coiled rod furnished by mills permitting spliced coil used in production welding.
(a) Test coupons shall be of sufficient size and thickness the base material. Where different requirements exist for
that the test specimens required herein can be removed. the two base materials, the weld metal may conform to
(b) The weld metal to be tested for all processes except either of the two requirements.
electroslag welding shall be deposited in such a manner as NF-2431.2 Standard Test Requirements. In lieu of
to eliminate substantially the influence of the base materi- the use of the General Test Requirements specified in
al on the results of the tests. Weld metal to be used with NF-2431.1, tensile and impact tests may be made in accor-
the electroslag process shall be deposited in such a man- dance with this subparagraph where they are required for
ner as to conform to one of the applicable Welding Proce- mild and low alloy steel covered electrodes; the material
dure Specifications (WPS) for production welding. The combinations to require weld material testing, as listed
base material shall conform with the requirements of Sec- in NF-2431, shall apply for this Standard Test Require-
tion IX, QW403.1 or QW403.4, as applicable. ments option. The limitations and testing under this Stan-
(c) The welding of the test coupon shall be performed dard Test option shall be in accordance with (a) through
within the range of preheat and interpass temperatures (f).
which will be used in production welding. Coupons shall (a) Testing to the requirements of this subparagraph
be tested in the aswelded condition or they shall be tested shall be limited to electrode classifications included in
in the applicable postweld heat treated condition when specifications SFA5.1 or SFA5.5.
the production welds are to be postweld heat treated. (b) The test assembly required by SFA5.1 or SFA5.5, as
The postweld heat treatment holding time 3 shall be at applicable, shall be used for test coupon preparation, ex-
least 80% of the maximum time to be applied to the weld cept that it shall be increased in size to obtain the number
metal in production application. The total time for post- of C v specimens required by NF-2331(a), where
weld heat treatment of the test coupon may be applied applicable.
in one heating cycle. The cooling rate from the postweld
(c) The welding of the test coupon shall conform to the
heat treatment temperature shall be of the same order
requirements of the SFA Specification for the classification
as that applicable to the weld metal in the support. In ad-
of electrode being tested. Coupons shall be tested in the
dition, weld coupons for weld metal to be used with the
aswelded condition and also in the postweld heat treated
electroslag process that are tested in the aswelded condi-
condition. The postweld heat treatment temperatures
tion, or following a postweld heat treatment within the
shall be in accordance with Table NF-4622.1-1 for the ap-
holding temperature ranges of Table NF-4622.1-1 or Table
plicable PNumber equivalent. The time at postweld heat
NF-4622.4(c)-1, shall have a thickness within the range of
treatment temperature shall be 8 hr (this qualifies post-
0.5 to 1.1 times the thickness of the welds to be made in
weld heat treatments of 10 hr or less). When the postweld
production. Electroslag weld coupons to be tested follow-
heat treatment of the production weld exceeds 10 hr, or
ing a postweld heat treatment, which will include heating
the PWHT temperature is other than that required above,
the coupon to a temperature above the Holding Tempera-
the general test of NF-2431.1 shall be used.
ture Range of Table NF-4622.1-1 for the type of material
being tested, shall have a thickness within the range of 0.9 (d) The tensile and Cv specimens shall be located and
to 1.1 times the thickness of the welds to be made in prepared in accordance with the requirements of
production. SFA5.1 or SFA5.5, as applicable.
(e) One all weld metal tensile specimen shall be tested
(d) The tensile specimens, and the Cv impact specimens
and shall meet the specified minimum tensile strength re-
where required, shall be located and prepared in accor-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
quirement of the SFA Specification for the applicable elec-

dance with the requirements of SFA5.1, or the applicable
trode classification.
SFA specification. For impact specimen preparation and
testing, the applicable parts of NF-2321 shall apply. The (f) The requirements of NF-2431.1(f) shall be applic-
longitudinal axis of the specimen shall be at a minimum able to the impact testing of this option.
depth of 1/4t from a surface, where t is the thickness of
the test weld. NF-2432 Chemical Analysis Test
(e) One all weld metal tensile specimen shall be tested
Chemical analysis of filler metal or weld deposits shall
and shall meet the specified minimum tensile strength re-
be made in accordance with NF-2420 and as required by
quirements of the base material specification. When base
NF-2432.1 and NF-2432.2.
materials of different specifications are to be welded, the
tensile strength requirements shall conform to the speci- NF-2432.1 Test Method. The chemical analysis test
fied minimum tensile strength requirements of either of shall be performed in accordance with this Subparagraph
the base material specifications. and Table NF-2432.1-1, and the results shall conform to
(f) Impact specimens of the weld metal shall be tested NF-2432.2.
where impact tests are required for either of the base ma- (a) ANo. 8 welding material to be used with GTAW and
terials of the production weld. The weld metal shall con- PAW processes and any other welding material to be used
form to the requirements of NF-2331(a), applicable to with any GTAW, PAW, or GMAW process shall have
essential variables of the Welding Procedure Specification

Table NF-2432.1-1 that will be followed when the welding material is con-
Sampling of Welding Materials for Chemical sumed. The test weld shall be made in conformance with
Analysis the requirements of Section IX, QW214.1. The removal
All Other of chemical analysis samples shall conform with
GTAW/ PAW GMAW Processes QW214.3 for the minimum thickness for which the Weld-
ANo. 8 filler metal Filler metal or Weld deposit Weld ing Procedure Specification is qualified.
weld deposit deposit
NF-2432.2 Requirements for Chemical Analysis. The
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
All other filler metal Filler metal or Filler metal or Weld
chemical elements to be determined, the composition re-
weld deposit weld deposit deposit
quirements of the weld metal, and the recording of results
of the chemical analysis shall be in accordance with (a)
through (c).
(a) Welding material of ferrous alloy ANo. 8 (Section IX,
chemical analysis performed either on the filler metal or QW442) shall be analyzed for the elements listed in
on a weld deposit made with the filler metal in accordance Table NF-2432.2(a)-1 and for any other elements specified
with (c) or (d). either in the welding material specification referenced by
(b) ANo. 8 welding material to be used with other than the Welding Procedure Specification or in the Welding
the GTAW and PAW processes and other welding material Procedure Specification.
to be used with other than the GTAW, PAW, or GMAW pro- (b) The chemical composition of the weld metal or filler
cess shall have chemical analysis performed on a weld de- metal shall conform to the welding material specification
posit of the material or combination of materials being for elements having specified percentage composition lim-
certified in accordance with (c) or (d). The removal of che- its. Where the Welding Procedure Specification contains a
mical analysis samples shall be from an undiluted weld de- modification of the composition limits of SFA or other re-
posit made in accordance with (c). As an alternative, the ferenced welding material specifications, or provides lim-
deposit shall be made in accordance with (d) for material its for additional elements, these composition limits of the
that will be used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding. Welding Procedure Specification shall apply for
Where the Welding Procedure Specification or the welding acceptability.
material specification specifies percentage composition (c) The results of the chemical analysis shall be re-
limits for analysis, it shall state that the specified limits ap- ported in accordance with NCA3862.1. Elements listed
ply for either the filler metal analysis or the undiluted in Table NF-2432.2(a)-1 but not specified in the welding
weld deposit analysis or for in situ cladding deposit analy- material specification or Welding Procedure Specification
sis in conformance with the above required certification shall be reported for information only.
testing.
(c) The preparation of samples for chemical analysis of NF-2433 Delta Ferrite Determination
undiluted weld deposits shall comply with the method gi-
A determination of delta ferrite shall be performed on
ven in the applicable SFA Specification. Where a weld de-
ANo. 8 weld material (Section IX, QW442) backing filler
posit method is not provided by the SFA Specification, the
metal (consumable inserts); bare electrode, rod, or wire
sample shall be removed from a weld pad, groove, or other
filler metal; or weld metal, except that delta ferrite deter-
test weld7 made using the welding process that will be fol-
minations are not required for SFA5.4, Type 1682, or
lowed when the welding material or combination of weld-
ANo. 8 weld filler metal to be used for weld metal
ing materials being certified is consumed. The weld for
cladding.
ANo. 8 material to be used with the GMAW or EGW pro-
cess shall be made using the shielding gas composition NF-2433.1 Method. Delta ferrite determinations of
specified in the Welding Procedure Specification that will welding material, including consumable insert material,
be followed when the material is consumed. The test sam- shall be made using a magnetic measuring instrument
ple for ESW shall be removed from the weld metal of the and weld deposits made in accordance with (b). Alterna-
mechanical properties test coupon. Where a chemical ana- tively, the delta ferrite determinations for welding materi-
lysis is required for a welding material which does not als may be performed by the use of chemical analysis of
have a mechanical properties test requirement, a chemical NF-2432 in conjunction with Figure NF-2433.1-1.
analysis test coupon shall be prepared as required by
NF-2431.1(c), except that heat treatment of the coupon
is not required and the weld coupon thickness require- Table NF-2432.2(a)-1
ments of NF-2431.1(c) do not apply. Welding Material Chemical Analysis
(d) The alternate method provided in (b) for the pre- Materials Elements
paration of samples for chemical analysis of welding mate- CrNi stainless materials C, Cr, Mo, Ni, Mn, Si, Cb
rial to be used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding
shall require a test weld made in accordance with the
Figure NF-2433.1-1
Delta Ferrite Content
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
18 18
)
FN
r(
be
4
0
m
nu
8
16 te 16
12
rri
2
Fe
16
6
Nieq Ni 35 C 20 N 0.25 Cu
20
24
10
28
14
35
18
14 22 14
45
26
30 55
40 65
50 75
60
12 85 12
70
80 95
90
100
10 10
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Creq Cr Mo 0.7 Nb
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The actual nitrogen content is preferred. If this is not available, the following applicable nitrogen value shall be used:
(1) GMAW welds, 0.08%, except that when selfshielding, fluxcored electrodes are used, 0.12%
(2) Welds made using other processes, 0.06%.
(b) This diagram is identical to the WRC1992 Diagram, except that the solidification mode lines have been removed for ease of use.
(a) Calibration of magnetic instruments shall conform NF-2500 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF
to AWS A4.2. MATERIAL
(b) The weld deposit for magnetic delta ferrite determi-
nation shall be made in accordance with NF-2432.1(c).
NF-2510 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF
MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING
(c) A minimum of six ferrite readings shall be taken on
the surface of the weld deposit. The readings obtained Material for supports shall be examined in accordance
shall be averaged to a single Ferrite Number (FN). with the material specification. Defects may be repaired
as permitted by the material specification.
NF-2433.2 Acceptance Standards. The minimum ac-
ceptable delta ferrite shall be 5FN. The results of the delta
ferrite determination shall be included in the Certified Ma- NF-2520 REQUIRED EXAMINATION AND
terial Test Report of NF-2130 or NF-4120. ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR CLASS
1 SPRINGS
Spring coils for Class 1 variable, constant, and sway
NF-2440 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF WELDING
brace standard supports shall be examined after coiling
MATERIAL
by either the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant meth-
Suitable storage and handling of electrodes, flux, and od. Linear indications shall be removed by grinding and
other welding materials shall be maintained. Precautions blending. If the depth of the ground area exceeds 3% of
shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture by the bar diameter or thickness, the spring coil shall be
fluxes and cored, fabricated, and coated electrodes. rejected.
NF-2530 REQUIRED EXAMINATION AND NF-2584.3 Calibration of Equipment. Calibration

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR COILED sensitivity shall be established by adjustment of the in-
WIRE ROPE USED AS A SPRING strument so that the first back reflection is 75%90% of
full screen height.
Coiled wire rope used as a spring shall be visually exam-
ined after coiling and shall be free from kinks, loose NF-2584.4 Acceptance Standards. Any discontinuity
strands, loose wires, or broken protruding wires. that causes an indication in excess of 20% of the height of
the first back reflection or any discontinuity which pre-
NF-2580 EXAMINATION OF BOLTING MATERIAL vents the production of a first back reflection of 50% of
AND RODS8 the calibration amplitude is not acceptable.
NF-2581 Required Examinations NF-2586 Repair by Welding
NF-2581.1 Class 1 Supports. All bolting material and Weld repairs of bolting material and rods are not
rods shall be visually examined in accordance with permitted.
NF-2582. Nominal sizes greater than 2 in. (50 mm) shall
be examined by either the magnetic particle or liquid pe-
netrant method (NF-2583). In addition, nominal sizes NF-2600 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
greater than 4 in. (100 mm) shall be ultrasonically exam- QUALITY SYSTEM PROGRAMS
ined in accordance with NF-2584.
NF-2610 DOCUMENTATION AND MAINTENANCE
NF-2581.2 Class 2, 3, and MC Supports. Bolts, studs, OF QUALITY SYSTEM PROGRAMS
and nuts shall be examined in accordance with the re-
quirements of the material specification and NF-2582. (a) Except as provided in (b), Material Organizations
shall have a Quality System Program that meets the re-
quirements of NCA3800.
NF-2582 Visual Examination (b) The requirements of NCA3862 shall be met as re-
The areas of threads, shanks, and heads of final ma- q u i r e d b y N F - 2 1 3 0 . T h e o t h e r r e q u i r e m en t s o f
chined parts shall be visually examined. Harmful disconti- NCA3800 need not be used by Material Organizations
nuities such as laps, seams, or cracks that would be for small products, as defined in (c), for brazing material,
detrimental to the intended service are unacceptable. and for material that is allowed by this Subsection to be
furnished with a Certificate of Compliance. For these pro-
NF-2583 Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant ducts, the Certificate Holders Quality Assurance Program
Examination (NCA4000) shall include measures to provide assurance
that the material is furnished in accordance with the ma-
All bolting material and rods greater than 2 in. (50 mm) terial specification and the requirements of this
nominal size for Class 1 supports shall be examined by a Subsection.
magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method. (c) For the purpose of this paragraph, small products
Such examination shall be performed on the finished bolt- are defined as given in (1) through (3)
ing material after threading or on the material stock at ap-
(1) pipe, tube, pipe fittings, and flanges of 2 in.
proximately the finished diameter before threading and
(50 mm) nominal size and less
after heading (if involved). Linear nonaxial indications
(2) bolting material, including studs, nuts, and bolts
are unacceptable. Linear axial indications greater than
of 2 in. (50 mm) nominal diameter and less
1 in. (25 mm) in length are unacceptable.
(3) structural material with a nominal crosssectional
area of 2 sq in. (1 300 mm2) and less
NF-2584 Ultrasonic Examination for Sizes (d) When impact testing is required in accordance with
Greater Than 4 in. (100 mm) NF-2300, the material not exempted by NF-2311 shall be
All bolting material and rods greater than 4 in. furnished with Certified Material Test Reports in accor-
(100 mm) nominal size for Class 1 supports shall be ultra- dance with NCA3862.
sonically examined over the entire cylindrical surface (e) Structural materials, which are permitted by this
prior to threading in accordance with the requirements Section to be furnished with a Certificate of Compliance,
of the following subparagraphs. may be repaired by welding using welders, documenta-
tion, and examination requirements specified in SA-6
NF-2584.1 Ultrasonic Method. Examination shall be
and need not meet the requirements of NCA3857.3.
carried out by the straight beam, radial scan method.
(f) Materials manufactured to a Material Specification
NF-2584.2 Examination Procedure. Examination prohibiting weld repair without user approval do not re-
shall be performed at a nominal frequency of 2.25 MHz quire documentation to indicate that weld repairs have
with a search unit not to exceed 1 in.2 (650 mm2) area. not been performed.
ARTICLE NF-3000
DESIGN
NF-3100 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS NF-3112.3 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
Stress Values. When the procedures of design by analysis
NF-3110 LOADING CRITERIA (NF-3220) are employed, the applicable design stress in-
NF-3111 Loading Conditions tensity values S m listed in Tables 2A, 2B, and 4 of Section
II, Part D, Subpart 1 shall be used. When the procedures of
The loadings that shall be taken into account in design-
linear elastic analysis (NF-3320) are employed, the allow-
ing a support include, but are not limited to, those in the
able stress values shall be the applicable yield strength va-
following:
lues S y listed in Table Y1, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 as
(a) weight of the piping or component and normal con-
modified by the design factors given in NF-3322. The ma-
tents under plant and system operating and test condi-
terial shall not be used at metal and design temperatures
tions, including loads due to static and dynamic head
that exceed the temperature limit in the applicability col-
and fluid flow effects
umn for which stress or stress intensity values are listed.
(b) weight of the support The values in the tables may be interpolated for intermedi-
(c) superimposed static and thermal loads and reac- ate temperatures.
tions induced by the supported system components
(d) dynamic loads, including loads caused by earth- NF-3113 Service Conditions
quake and vibration
Each Service Condition to which the piping or compo-
(e) effects from piping thermal expansion
nent may be subjected shall be categorized in accordance
(f) anchor and support movement effects
with NCA2142.2, and Service Limits [NCA2142.4(b)]
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(g) environmental loads such as wind and snow loads shall be designated in the Design Specification in such de-
(h) expansion or contraction of a component produced tail as will provide a complete basis for design in accor-
by internal or external pressure dance with this Article.
Guidelines for classification of these loadings into pri-
mary, secondary, or peak are listed in NF-3120 and NF-3114 Test Conditions
NF-3220.
The component and piping support loadings resulting
from test conditions shall be identified (NCA2142).
NF-3112 Design Loadings
The Design Loadings shall be established in accordance NF-3120 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
with NCA2142.1 and NF-3112.1 through NF-3112.3. NF-3121 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis
NF-3112.1 Design Temperature. The specified Design NF-3121.1 General Considerations.
Temperature shall be established in accordance with (a) Terms that are common to the design by stress ana-
NCA2142.1(b). The metal temperature shall be deter- lysis of Plate and ShellType, LinearType, and Standard
mined by computation using accepted heat transfer proce- Supports are defined in NF-3121.2 through NF-3121.16.
dures or by measurement from equipment in service (b) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
under plant and system equivalent operating conditions. Plate and ShellType Supports are defined in NF-3212.
In lieu of heat transfer analysis or measurements, the com- (c) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
ponent or piping Design Temperature may be used. In no LinearType Supports are defined in NF-3313.
case shall the temperature at the surface of the metal ex-
NF-3121.2 Primary Stress. Primary stress is any nor-
ceed the maximum temperature listed in Tables 1A, 1B,
mal stress or shear stress developed by an imposed load-
2A, 2B, 3, 4, and Y1 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, or ex-
ing that is necessary to satisfy the laws of equilibrium of
ceed the maximum temperature limitations specified else-
external and internal forces and moments. The basic char-
where in this Subsection.
acteristic of a primary stress is that it is not selflimiting.
NF-3112.2 Design Mechanical Loads. The specified Primary stresses that considerably exceed the yield
Design Mechanical Loads shall be established in accor- strength will result in failure or, at least, in gross distor-
dance with NCA2142.1(c), and shall include all loads from tion. Primary membrane stress is divided into general
the component or piping acting on the support. and local categories. A general primary membrane stress
is one that is so distributed in the support that no redistri- NF-3121.9 Total Stress. Total stress is the sum of the
bution of load occurs in the support as a result of yielding. primary and secondary stress contributions. Recognition
Examples of primary stress are of each of the individual contributions is essential to estab-
(a) general membrane stress in a circular cylindrical lishment of appropriate stress limitations.
shell or a spherical shell due to internal pressure or to dis- NF-3121.10 Critical Buckling. Critical buckling oc-
tributed loads curs when a support is loaded to a state at which an infi-
(b) bending stress in a cantilever beam due to a normal nitesimal additional load or disturbance causes the
end load support to change from an equilibrium condition to one
For evaluation purposes, stresses induced in the sup- of instability.
port by restraint of free end displacement [NF-3111(e)] NF-3121.11 Thermal Stress. Thermal stress is a self
and anchor motion [NF-3111(f)] of piping are considered balancing stress produced by a nonuniform distribution
primary stresses. of temperature or by differing thermal coefficients of ex-
pansion. Thermal stress is developed in a solid body
13 NF-3121.3 Secondary Stress. Secondary stress is a whenever a volume of material is prevented from assum-
normal stress or a shear stress developed by the con- ing the size and shape that it normally would under a
straint of adjacent material or by selfconstraint of the change in temperature. Evaluation of thermal stresses in
structure. The basic characteristic of a secondary stress the support is not required by this Subsection.
is that it is selflimiting. Local yielding and minor distor-
tions can satisfy the conditions that cause the stress to oc- NF-3121.12 Free End Displacement. Free end displa-
cur, and failure from one application of the stress is not to cement consists of the relative motions that would occur
be expected. between an attachment and connected structure or equip-
ment if the two members were separated and permitted to
Examples of secondary stress are move.
(a) general thermal stress [NF-3121.11]
NF-3121.13 Anchor Point Motion Stress. Anchor
(b) bending stress at a gross structural discontinuity point motion stresses are those stresses resulting from
the differential motion of support points. An example is
NF-3121.4 Peak Stress. Peak stress is that increment
differential building settlement.
of stress that is additive to the primary plus secondary
stresses by reason of local discontinuities or local thermal NF-3121.14 Gross Structural Discontinuity. Gross
stress (NF-3121.11), including the effects, if any, of stress structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
concentrations. The basic characteristic of a peak stress is tinuity that affects the stress or strain distribution through
that it does not cause any noticeable distortion and is ob- the entire thickness of the member. Gross discontinuity
jectionable only as a possible source of a fatigue crack or a type stresses are those portions of the actual stress distri-
brittle fracture. A stress that is not highly localized falls butions that produce net bending and membrane force re-
into this category if it is of a type that cannot cause notice- sultants when integrated through the thickness. Examples
able distortion. Evaluation of peak stresses in the support of a gross structural discontinuity are headtoshell junc-
is not required by this Subsection. tions, flangetoshell junctions, nozzles, and junctions be-
tween parts of different diameters or thicknesses.
NF-3121.5 Normal Stress. Normal stress is the com-
NF-3121.15 Limit Analysis Collapse Load. The
ponent of stress normal to the plane of reference. This is
methods of limit analysis are used to compute the maxi-
also referred to as direct stress. Usually the distribution
mum load or combination of loads a structure made of ide-
of normal stress is not uniform through the thickness of
ally plastic (nonstrainhardening) material can carry. The
a part, so this stress is considered to have two compo-
deformations of an ideally plastic structure increase with-
nents, one uniformly distributed and equal to the average
out bound at this load, which is termed the collapse load.
stress across the thickness under consideration, and the
other varying from this average value across the thickness. NF-3121.16 Collapse Load Lower Bound. If, for a
given load, any system of stresses can be found which
NF-3121.6 Shear Stress. Shear stress is the compo- everywhere satisfies equilibrium and nowhere exceeds
nent of stress tangent to the plane of reference. the material yield strength, using shape factors associated
with the cross section under consideration, the load is at
NF-3121.7 Membrane Stress. Membrane stress is the or below the collapse load. This is the lower bound theo-
component of normal stress that is uniformly distributed rem of limit analysis which permits calculations of a lower
and equal to the average stress across the thickness of bound to the collapse load.
the section under consideration.
NF-3121.17 Local Structural Discontinuity. Local
NF-3121.8 Bending Stress. Bending stress is the com- structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
ponent of normal stress that varies across the thickness. tinuity that affects the stress or strain distribution through
The variation may or may not be linear. a fractional part of the thickness. The stress distribution
associated with a local discontinuity causes only very loca- be disengaged by movement of the supported piping or
lized deformation or strain and has no significant effect on component. Supports needed only to provide stability dur-
the shelltype discontinuity deformations. Examples are ing Level C or Level D Service Conditions shall be designed
small fillet radii, small attachments, and partial penetra- and installed so as not to overstress the piping or compo-
tion welds. nent during Level A or Level B Service Conditions.
NF-3122 Piping or Component Deformation

Limits NF-3128 Snubbers and Dampers
Deformation limits for the supported piping or compo- The end connection of the snubber shall be designed to
nent shall be stipulated in the Design Specifications, if accommodate vertical and horizontal movement of the
required. piping or component, as required. Dampers shall be prop-
erly oriented and installed in accordance with manufac-
NF-3123 Functional Requirements turers requirements.
When a support is to be designed to perform a specific
function during any Service Condition, the functional re-
quirements shall be designated in the Design NF-3130 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Specifications. NF-3131 Requirements for Acceptability 13
NF-3124 Rolling and Sliding Supports The requirements for acceptability of support design
are given in (a) through (e).
(a) Rolling and sliding supports shall permit free move-
ment of the piping or component, or the piping or compo- (a) The design shall be such that the stress intensity va-
nent shall be designed to include the imposed load and lues or the stress values (whichever are applicable) will
frictional resistance of these types of supports; their di- not exceed the limits given in this Subarticle.
mensions shall provide for the designed movement of Table NF-3131(a)-1 indicates the rules and limits to be
the supported piping or component. used for the various classes and types of design proce-
(b) Sliding supports (or shoes) and brackets shall be de- dures. The applicable tables of allowable stress values
signed to accommodate the forces caused by friction in ad- for materials to be used with a specific design procedure
dition to the loads imposed by bearing. The dimensions of are referenced in Table NF-2121(a)-1.
the support shall provide for the design movement of the (b) The design procedure shall be one of those given in
supported piping or component. Material and lubricants Table NF-3131(a)-1 as being applicable to supports.
used in sliding supports shall be suitable for the environ- (c) The design details shall conform to the rules of this
ment of the metal at the point of sliding contact and shall Subarticle or to those referenced herein.
be specified in the Design Documents. (d) For configurations where compressive stresses oc-
cur, the critical buckling stress shall be taken into account
NF-3125 Sway Braces and Vibration Dampeners in addition to the requirements of (a), (b), and (c).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Sway braces and vibration dampeners may be used to (e) For Class 1 supports, protection against nonductile
limit the effects of vibration and may be of the rigid strut fracture shall be provided. An acceptable procedure for
(linear type) tensioncompression type. If employed in the nonductile failure prevention is given in Appendix G of
design or added as a result of observation under startup or Section III Appendices.
initial operating conditions, the effect of sway braces shall
be included in the stress analysis of the piping or compo-
nent for all of the specified conditions. NF-3132 Dimensional Standards
NF-3127 Provisions for Movement of Supported Dimensions of supports may comply with the standards
Piping or Component and specifications listed in Table NCA71001 but are not
mandatory. Compliance with these standards does not re-
Consideration shall be given to the relative motion of
place or eliminate the requirements for stress analysis or
the supported piping or component and the support.
load rating.
When clearances or travel ranges or both are required
to accommodate piping or component movements, suffi-
cient design margins shall be introduced to allow for var-
NF-3133 Stress Analysis
iations due to fabrication and installation. Care shall be
taken to ensure that design clearances and travel ranges A detailed stress analysis or Design Report, as required
are based on the maximum range that might occur be- by NCA3550 for all supports, shall be prepared in suffi-
tween two operating conditions and not necessarily on cient detail to show that each of the stress limits of
the maximum cold to hot range. All parts of the support NF-3200 or NF-3300 is satisfied when the support is sub-
shall be fabricated and assembled so that they will not jected to the loadings of NF-3110.
Table NF-3131(a)-1
Reference Paragraphs for Procedures for Design of Component Supports, Piping Supports, and
Standard Supports
Plate and Shell Linear
Type and Class Design by Experimen- Load Design by Weld Experimen- Load
of Support Analysis Bolting Weld Joint tal Analysis Rating Analysis Bolting Joints tal Analysis Rating
Component
Class 1 NF-3220, NF-3225, NF-3226, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3320, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3522 NF-3525 NF-3526 NF-3523 NF-3525 NF-3526
Class 2 and MC NF-3250, NF-3255, NF-3256, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3350, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
[Note (1)] NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
Piping
NF-3622 NF-3625 NF-3626 NF-3623 NF-3625 NF-3626
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
Standard
Class 2 NF-3250, NF-3255, NF-3256, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3350 NF-3453 NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370,
NF-3452 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3453 NF-3455 NF-3456
NOTE:
(1) Supports for Class 2 vessels designed to NC3200 shall be designed in accordance with Class 1 requirements.
NF-3134 Support Tolerances (b) Unless either the experimental stress analysis proce-
dure or the load rating procedure is used, the require-
(a) Tolerances shall be specified by the designer in
ments of the following paragraphs apply.
the design output documents. Fabrication tolerances
and local installation tolerances as contained in
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-D are only mandatory when NF-3142 Plate and ShellType Supports
invoked by the designer. Analysis Procedure
(b) When specifying the support tolerances, the support (a) Elastic analysis based on maximum shear stress the-
designer shall consider the piping support location/orien- ory in accordance with the rules of NF-3200 shall be used
tation tolerances specified by the piping designer (Appen- in the design of Plate and ShellType Supports of Class 1
dix T1230). construction.
(b) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
NF-3140 GENERAL DESIGN PROCEDURES shall be used in the design of Plate and ShellType Sup-
NF-3141 Types of Procedures ports of Class 2, 3, and MC construction. Supports for Class
2 vessels designed to NC3200 shall be designed in accor-
(a) The design procedure which may be used is depen-
dance with Class 1 requirements.
dent on the type of support being designed and the Class
of construction involved. Three design procedures are re-
cognized, namely NF-3143 LinearType Supports Analysis
(1) design by analysis Procedure
(-a) maximum shear stress theory (a) The analysis procedure shall comply with (1) or (2).
(-b) maximum stress theory (1) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
(2) experimental stress analysis (Section III Appen- in accordance with the rules of NF-3300 shall be used
dices, Appendix II) for the design of LinearType Supports for Class 1, 2,
(3) load rating and 3 and MC construction.
(2) Limit analysis in accordance with the procedures NF-3221.1 Design Limits. The stress intensity limits
of NF-3340 shall be used in the design of LinearType Sup- which must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated
ports for Class 1, 2, and 3 and MC construction when mem- in the Design Specification are the two limits of this para-
bers and their connections are subject to high cycle fatigue graph and the Special Stress Limits of NF-3223. The design
as defined in NF-3331. stress intensity values S m are given in NF-3224.
(b) High cycle fatigue analysis in accordance with proce- (a) General primary membrane stress intensity P m is
dures of NF-3330 shall be used in the design of Linear derived from the average value across the thickness of a
Type Supports for Class 1 construction. section of the general primary stresses produced by speci-
fied Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding all secondary
stresses. Averaging is to be applied to the stress compo-
NF-3144 Standard Supports Analysis nents prior to determination of the stress intensity values.
Procedure The allowable value of this stress intensity is S m at the De-
sign Temperature.
Standard Supports designed by analysis shall be de-
(b) Primary membrane plus primary bending stress in-
signed to either the requirements of NF-3142 or
tensity P m + P b is derived from the highest value across
NF-3143, according to whether they are Plate and Shell
the thickness of a section of the general membrane stres-
Type or LinearType Standard Supports.
ses plus primary bending stresses produced by the speci-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
fied Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding all secondary

stresses. The allowable value of this stress intensity is
NF-3200 DESIGN RULES FOR PLATE AND 1.5S m .
SHELLTYPE SUPPORTS NF-3221.2 Service Level A Through D Service Limits.
NF-3210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The rules and stress limits which must be satisfied in an
elastic analysis for any Level A through D Service Loadings
NF-3211 Basis for Determining Stresses in Design stated in the Design Specification are those given in
by Analysis NF-3221.1 and NF-3223 multiplied by the appropriate
The theory of failure used in the rules of this Subsection stress intensity limit factor from Table NF-3221.2-1 for
for combining stresses for the design of Class 1 Plate and the particular loading and stress categories.
ShellType Supports is the maximum shear stress theory; NF-3221.3 Test Limits. The rules and stress limits
for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate and ShellType Supports, it is which must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in
the maximum stress theory. the Design Specification are those given in NF-3221.1
and NF-3223 multiplied by the appropriate stress inten-
sity limit factor in Table NF-3221.2-1 under Test
NF-3212 Definitions Loadings.
Terms used in the design of Plate and ShellType Sup- NF-3221.4 Limit Analysis. The limits on primary
ports by stress analysis are defined in NF-3121 and in membrane plus primary bending stress intensity
NF-3212.1 below. [NF-3221.1(b)] need not be satisfied at a specific location
NF-3212.1 Stress Intensity. 9 Stress intensity is de- if it can be shown by means of limit analysis or by tests
fined as twice the maximum shear stress which is the dif- that the specified loadings do not exceed twothirds of
ference between the algebraically largest principal stress the lower bound collapse load for Design Loadings and
and the algebraically smallest principal stress at a given Service Level A and B Loadings, and do not exceed 0.8
point. Tensile stresses are considered positive and com- times the lower bound collapse load for Service Level C
pressive stresses are considered negative. Loadings. The rules of Appendix F (Section III Appendices)
shall apply for Service Level D Loadings. For materials in
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 for which allowable stresses,
NF-3220 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1 or stress intensities, may reach 90% of the yield strength
S y at temperature, the specified loading shall not exceed
NF-3221 Stress Limits
the product of the applicable permanent strain limiting
Stress limits for elements of Class 1 supports are given factor of Table Y2, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 times
in this paragraph. Stress limits for bolts and welds are gi- the lower bound collapse load.
ven in NF-3225 and NF-3226. General requirements con-
cerning stress determinations, definitions, derivations of NF-3222 Derivation of Stress Intensities
stress intensities, and classification of stresses are given One requirement for the acceptability of a design
in NF-3210. (NF-3130) is that the calculated stress intensities shall
Plate and ShellType Supports may be designed by not exceed specified allowable limits. These limits differ
either elastic or limit analysis, stress intensity limits for depending on the stress category (primary, secondary,
which are given in NF-3221.1 through NF-3221.4. etc.) from which the stress intensity is derived. This
Table NF-3221.2-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1 Plate And ShellType Supports
Designed by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Categories [Note (1)]
Service Level B Service Level C
Stress Category Design Service Level A [Note (2)] [Note (3)] Service Level D Test Loadings
Primary stresses K m = 1.0 K m = 1.0 K m = 1.33 K m = 1.5 K m = 1.33
[Note (4)],
[Note (5)] K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 K v = 1.5 K v = 1.33
K b k = 1.0 K b k = 1.0 K b k = 1.33 K b k = 1.5 Use Appendix F K b k = 1.33
but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of
critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling
stress stress stress stress stress
Primary plus Evaluation is required for critical buckling for all loading categories. The requirements of this Subarticle shall be met for
secondary this evaluation.
stresses [Note
(5)], [Note (6)]
Peak stresses Evaluation not required.
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity
(compression only)
K m = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity
(see NF-3221.1 and NF-3221.2)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3223.2)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control
must be considered separately.
(2) K m , K v , and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 Su .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of
piping shall be considered as primary stresses.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated.
(6) Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary stresses shall be limited to a range of 2S y or S u at temperature, whichever is less
for component supports only.
paragraph describes the procedure for the calculation of (c) For each category, calculate the algebraic sum of the
the stress intensities which are subject to the specified values of t that result from the different types of load-
limits. The steps in the procedure are stipulated in (a) ings, and similarly for the other five stress components.
through (e). Certain combinations of the categories must also be
(a) At the point on the support which is being investi- considered.
gated, choose an orthogonal set of coordinates, such as (d) Translate the stress components for the t, l, and r di-
tangential, longitudinal, and radial, and designate them rections into principal stresses 1 , 2 , and 3 .
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
by the subscripts t, l, and r . The stress components in (e) Calculate the stress differences S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and S 3 1
these directions are then designated t , l , and r for di- from the following equations:
rect stresses and T l t , T l r , and T r t for shear stresses.
(b) Calculate the stress components for each type of
loading to which the item will be subjected and assign
each set of stress values to one or a group of the following
categories:
(1) g e n e r a l p r i m a r y m e m b r a n e s t r e s s P m
(NF-3121.7)
(2) primary bending stress P b (NF-3121.8)
(3) secondary stress Q (NF-3121.3)
The stress intensity S is the largest absolute value of NF-3223.4 Applications of Elastic Analysis for
S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and S 3 1 . Stresses Beyond the Yield Strength. Certain of the allow-
NOTE: Membrane stress intensity is derived from the stress compo- able stresses permitted in the design criteria are such that
nents averaged across the thickness of the section. The averaging the maximum stress calculated on an elastic basis may ex-
shall be performed at the component stress level in (b) or (c). ceed the yield strength of the material.
NF-3224 Design Stress Values

NF-3223 Special Stress Limits The design stress intensity values S m are given in
The following deviations from the basic stress limits are Tables 2A, 2B, and 4, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 for sup-
provided to cover special Service Loadings or configura- port material. Values for intermediate temperatures may
tions. Some of these deviations are more restrictive and be found by interpolation. Values of yield strength and ul-
some are less restrictive than the basic stress limits. In timate tensile strength are given in Tables Y1 and U, Sec-
cases of conflict between these requirements and the basic tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, respectively. Values of the
stress limits, the rules of this paragraph take precedence coefficient of thermal expansion and of the modulus of
for the particular situations to which they apply. elasticity are given in Tables TE and TM, Section II, Part
D, Subpart 2.
NF-3223.1 Bearing Loads.
(a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crushing NF-3225 Design of Bolting
under the maximum load, experienced as a result of De- NF-3225.1 Design Limits. The rules and stress limits
sign Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, ex- that must be satisfied for any Design Loading stated in the
cept those for which Level D Limits are designated, shall Design Specification are those given in NF-3324.6.
be limited to S y at temperature, except that when the dis-
tance to a free edge is larger than the distance over which NF-3225.2 Service Limits, Level A Through D. The
the bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5S y at tempera- rules and stress limits which must be satisfied for any Le-
ture is permitted. vel A through D Service Loading stated in the Design Spe-
cification are those given in NF-3324.6 multiplied by the
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges,
appropriate stress limit factor for the particular service
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear fail-
loading level and stress category specified in
ure shall be considered. The average shear stress shall be
Table NF-3225.2-1. This product shall not exceed the yield
limited to 0.6S m in the case of primary stress (NF-3121.2)
strength of the material at temperature.
and 0.5S y in the case of primary stress plus secondary
stress (NF-3121.9). NF-3225.3 Test Limits. The rules and stress limits
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and simi- that must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the
lar members, the S y at temperature is applicable, except Design Specification are those given in NF-3324.6 multi-
that a value of 1.5S y may be used if no credit is given to plied by the appropriate stress limit factor for the particu-
the bearing area within one pin diameter from a plate lar Service Loading Level and stress category specified in
edge. Table NF-3225.2-1.
NF-3225.4 FrictionType Joints. Multiplying factors
NF-3223.2 Pure Shear. normally used to increase the allowable limits for Service
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section Level B, C, and D are not applicable to frictiontype joints
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design [see NF-3324.6(a)(4)].
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, except
those for which Level D Limits are designated, shall be lim- NF-3226 Design of Welded Joints
ited to 0.6S m .
NF-3226.1 Permissible Types of Welded Joints in
(b) The maximum primary shear, experienced as a re-
Plate and ShellType Supports. All welded joints in
sult of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service
Plate and ShellType Supports shall be continuous and
Loadings except those for which Level D Limits are desig-
shall be of one of the types listed in (a) through (c). Typical
nated, exclusive of stress concentration at the periphery of
examples of those permitted types are shown in
a solid circular section in torsion, shall be limited to 0.8S m .
Figure NF-3226.1-1. Fillet and partial penetration welds
Primary plus secondary shear stresses shall be converted
shall meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(d), except that
to stress intensities (equal to two times pure shear stress)
NF-3324.5(d)(7) does not apply.
and as such shall not exceed the basic stress limits of
(a) Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be one of the following:
Table NF-3221.2-1.
(1) full penetration, single or double welded
NF-3223.3 Triaxial Stresses. The algebraic sum of [Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketches (a1) and (a2)].
the three primary principal stresses ( 1 + 2 + 3 ) shall (2) p a r t i a l p e n e t r a t i o n , d o u b l e w e l d e d
not exceed four times the tabulated value of S m . [Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (b)].
Table NF-3225.2-1
Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Bolt Design by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Levels Stated in Design Specification [Note (1)]
Stress Service Service Service Service Test
Category Design Level A Level B Level C Level D Loading
Tension and K b o = 1.0 K b o = 1.0 K b o = 1.15 K b o = 1.25 [Note K b o = 1.25
shear (2)]
GENERAL NOTE:
K b o = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and shear stresses
NOTES:
(1) Not to be used for friction type connections.
(2) Use Appendix F.
(3) the applicable welds may be either square groove, NF-3226.2 Stress Intensities and Stress Limits for
V groove, bevel groove, J groove, U groove, flare V groove, Welded Joints in Plate and ShellType Supports.
or flare bevel groove [see Figure NF-3226.1(a)-1]. (a) Design Limits. The stress intensity and allowable
(4) when angle joints are used for connecting a tran- stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for the De-
sition in diameter to a cylinder, the angle of sign Loadings stated in the Design Specification shall be
Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (f) shall not exceed 30 deg. the following:
(5) A tapered transition having a length not less than (1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress intensity
three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of limits for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed
abutting sections, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2, the applicable stress intensity value for the base metal
shall be provided at joints between sections that differ being joined, as specified in NF-3221.1 and
in thickness by more than onefourth of the thickness of Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. See NF-3111.
the thinner section or by more than 1/8 in. (3 mm), which- (2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
ever is less. The transition may be formed by any process (-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
that will provide a uniform taper. The weld may be partly Shear on Effective Throat. The stress intensity and stress
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or entirely in the tapered section, or adjacent to it. This limits shall be the same as those for the base metal as re-
paragraph also applies when there is a reduction in thick- quired in NF-3221.1.
ness within a spherical shell, or cylindrical course or plate. (-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
(6) When the use of backing rings will result in unde- Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in
sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion, the Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
requirements of NF-4240 shall be met. (3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
following: (b) Service Limits, Levels A, B, C, and D, and Test. The
(1) full penetration, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1-1, rules and stress limits that must be satisfied for welds
sketch (d1) for any Level A, B, C, and D Service and Test Loadings sta-
ted in the Design Specification are those given in (a) multi-
(2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in
plied by the appropriate base material stress limit factor
Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketches (d2) and (d3)
given in Table NF-3251.2-1.
(3) the applicable welds are fillet, square groove, V (c) The effective sizes of welds shall be as given in
groove, bevel groove, U groove, J groove, flare V groove NF-3324.5(d) and NF-3324.5(f).
and flare bevel groove
(c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: NF-3226.3 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing.
Weld ed joint c onfigurations c ausing significant
(1) full penetration, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketches (c)
throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
and (g)
NF-1215(b)] during fabrication and/or service on rolled
(2) partial penetration, double welded with or with- product forms should be avoided. However, if this type
out additional fillet welds, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (e) of construction is used, the designer should consider one
(3) partial penetration, single welded between the or several of the following factors that may reduce the sus-
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed ceptibility of the joint to experience lamellar tearing and
section, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (h) provide documentation, including fabrication require-
(4) the applicable welds may be square groove, bevel ments, in the Design Output Documents:
groove, J groove, flare V groove or flare bevel groove (a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical.
Figure NF-3226.1-1
Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Plate and ShellType Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-3226.1(a)-1
Typical Weld Details Referenced
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2
Butt Welding of Plates of Unequal Thickness
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 3y , where is required length of taper and y is the offset between the adjacent surfaces of abutting sections.
(b) Length of required taper may include the width of the weld.
(c) In all cases shall not be less than 3y.
(b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar NF-3251.2 Service Loadings Service Level A
tearing. Through D. The rules and stress limits that must be satis-
(c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements of fied in an elastic analysis for any Level A through D Service
NF-4441. Loading stated in the Design Specification are those given
for Design Loadings in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appro-
NF-3250 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 AND priate stress limit factor specified in Table NF-3251.2-1.
MC
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3251.3 Test Loadings. The rules and stress limits
Plate and ShellType Supports may be designed by that must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the
either elastic or limit analysis, limits for which are given Design Specification are those given for Design Loadings
in the following subparagraphs. Limits for bolts and welds in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appropriate stress limit
are given in NF-3255 and NF-3256. For general require- factor specified in Table NF-3251.2-1.
ments and definitions, see NF-3100 and NF-3210.
NF-3251.4 Limit Analysis. The limits for Class 1
NF-3251 Stress Limits Plate and ShellType Supports designed by limit analysis
apply.
NF-3251.1 Design Loadings. The stress10 limits are
satisfied for the Design Loadings (NCA2142.1) stated in
the Design Specifications if the requirements of eqs. (1) NF-3252 Special Stress Limits
and (2) are met. The following deviations from the basic stress limits are
provided to cover special Service Loadings or configura-
1
tions. Some of these deviations are more restrictive and
some are less restrictive than the basic stress limits. In
2 cases of conflict between these requirements and the basic
stress limits, the rules of this paragraph take precedence
where for the particular situations to which they apply.
S = allowable stress value, ksi (MPa), from the applic- NF-3252.1 Bearing Loads.
able table of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, as refer- (a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crushing
enced in Table NF-2121(a)-1 under the maximum load, experienced as a result of De-
b = bending stress, ksi (MPa) (NF-3121.8) sign Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings,
m = membrane stress, ksi (MPa) (NF-3121.7) shall be limited to S y at temperature, except that when
Table NF-3251.2-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate And
ShellType Supports Designed by Analysis
Primary stresses K m = 1.0 K m = 1.0 K m = 1.33 K m = 1.5 K m = 1.33
[Note (4)], K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 [Note (6)] K v = 1.5 [Note (6)] K v = 1.33 [Note

[Note (5)] (6)]
but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of
critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling
stress stress stress stress stress
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (compression only)
K m = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (see NF-3251.1 and
NF-3261)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3252.2 and NF-3261)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control must
be considered separately.
(2) K m and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 Su .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of pip-
ing shall be considered as primary stresses.
(6) Shear stress shall not exceed 0.42Su .
the distance to a free edge is larger than the distance over NF-3256 Design of Welded Joints
which the bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5S y at tem- NF-3256.1 Permissible Types of Welded Joints in
perature is permitted. Plate and ShellType Supports. All welded joints in
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges, Plate and ShellType Supports shall be continuous and
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear fail- shall be of one of the types listed in (a) through (d). Typi-
ure shall be considered. In the case of load controlled cal examples of those permitted types are shown in
stress only, the average shear stress shall be limited to Figure NF-3256.1-1. Fillet and partial penetration welds
0.6S in the case of primary stress (NF-3121.2). shall meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(d), except that
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and simi- NF-3324.5(d)(7) does not apply. Plug and slot welds shall
lar members, the S y at temperature value is applicable, ex- meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(e). Lap joints shall
cept that a value of 1.5S y may be used if no credit is given meet the requirements of NF-3324.3.
to the bearing area within one pin diameter from a plate
edge. (a) Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be one of the following:
NF-3252.2 Pure Shear. (1) full penetration, single and double welded,
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (a1) and (a2).
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design
(2) p a r t i a l p e n e t r a t i o n , d o u b l e w e l d e d ,
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, shall
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (b).
be limited to 0.6S .
(b) The maximum primary shear, experienced as a re- (3) when angle joints are used for connecting a tran-
sult of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service sition in diameter to a cylinder, the angle of
Loadings exclusive of stress concentration at the periph- Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (n) shall not exceed 30 deg.
ery of a solid circular section in torsion, shall be limited (4) A tapered transition having a length not less than
to 0.8S. three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of
abutting sections, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2,
shall be provided at joints between sections that differ
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3255 Design of Bolting

in thickness by more than onefourth of the thickness of
The provisions of NF-3225 apply. the thinner section or by more than 1/8 in. (3 mm),
Figure NF-3256.1-1
Permissible Welded Joints for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate and ShellType Supports
whichever is less. The transition may be formed by any (b) Service Limits. Level A Through D, and Test. The rules
process that will provide a uniform taper. The weld may and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for any
be partly or entirely in the tapered section or adjacent Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated in the
to it. Design Specification are those given in (a) multiplied by
(5) When the use of backing rings will result in unde- the appropriate base material stress limit factor given in
sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion, the Table NF-3251.2-1.
requirements of NF-4240 shall be met. NF-3256.3 Effective Size. The effective sizes of welds
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the shall be as given in NF-3324.5(d) through NF-3324.5(f).
following:
NF-3256.4 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing.
(1) full penetration, as shown in Figure NF-3256.1-1,
Weld ed joint c onfigurations c ausing significant
sketch (c)
throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
(2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in NF-1215(b)] during fabrication and/or service on rolled
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (d) and (e) product forms should be avoided. However, if this type
(c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: of construction is used, the designer should consider one
(1) full penetration, single or double welded, or several of the following factors that may reduce the sus-
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (f1), (f2), and (h) ceptibility of the joint to experience lamellar tearing and
(2) partial penetration, with or without additional fil- provide documentation, including fabrication require-
let welds, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (g) ments, in the Design Output Documents:
(3) partial penetration, single welded between a plate (a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical.
and the end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed (b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar
formed section, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (j) tearing.
(4) fillet, double welded, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements of
(k1); single welded when double members are used, NF-4441.
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (k2)
(5) fillet, single welded between a flat surface and the NF-3260 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed NF-3261 Stress Limits
section, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (l) The design of Class 3 supports shall be in accordance
(d) Lap Joints. Lap joints shall be fillet, double welded, with the requirements of NF-3250 using one of the design
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (m). procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1 for Class 3
(e) The applicable welds for the joints permitted in (a) construction.
through (d) are
(1) square groove, bevel groove, J groove, flare bevel NF-3265 Design of Bolting
groove, U groove and V groove The provisions of NF-3225 apply.
(2) plug and slot welds are permitted in (c) and (d)
only NF-3266 Design of Welded Joints
(3) fillet welds are permitted in (c)(4), (c)(5), and (d) The types of welded joints shall be as stipulated in
only NF-3256 for Class 2 and MC supports, except that for
13 NF-3256.2 Allowable Stress Limits. groove welded Tjoints, groove welded corner joints, and
(a) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits which fillet welded Tjoints, as listed in NF-3256.1(a)(2) and
must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated in the De- NF-3256.1(a)(3), the welds may be intermittent instead
sign Specification shall be the following: of continuous. Intermittent fillet welds shall meet the re-
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The allowable quirements of NF-3324.5(d)(7). The allowable stress lim-
stress limits for full penetration groove welds shall not ex- its shall be as stipulated in NF-3256.2.
ceed the applicable allowable stress value for the base me-
NF-3270 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
tal being jointed, as specified in NF-3251.1 and
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. Supports may be designed by experimental stress ana-
(2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds lysis in accordance with Appendix II (Section III
(-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or Appendices).
Shear on Effective Throat. The allowable stress limits shall
NF-3280 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING
be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
(-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective NF-3281 Procedure for Load Rating
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing a
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. total load on one or more duplicate fullsize samples of a
(3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limit for fillet support equal to or less than the load under which the
welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. support fails to perform its required function. Fullsize
samples composed of various parts may have each part or NF-3282.2 Plate and ShellType Supports. The load 13
a number of parts load rated, provided that all parts in the ratings for Plate and ShellType Supports for the Service
load path are either load rated or otherwise qualified per Loadings shall be determined by the following equations:
NF-3200, or by experimental stress analysis. When parts Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values)
are connected by bolting or welding, the connection shall
be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or NF-3226.
Should more than one part be load rated in a single load 1
test, then the load rating equations of NF-3280 shall be
evaluated for each part using the parts Sy(act) and Su(act)
values. The part having the lowest load rating shall estab-
lish the load rating for the combination of parts. A single 2
test sample is permitted but, in that case, the load ratings
shall be reduced by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall be run on a
statistically significant number of samples. The permissi- Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ble types of welded joints shall be as permitted for the spe-
cific class of construction in NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, and
3
NF-3266. The fullsize sample shall be fabricated for test-
ing using welds not exceeding weld sizes stipulated in the
Design Drawings. Bolted joints in the test sample shall be
made up using the lowest strength bolt material and mini-
4
mum edge distance allowed by the specification.
Level C Limits (lower of the two values)

NF-3282 Load Ratings in Relation to Design
Service and Test Loadings
5
The load rating for Design Loadings shall be determined
in accordance with the requirements for Service Level A
limits. The load ratings for Service Loadings for which Le-
vel A, B, or C Limits have been designated shall be deter- 6
mined by means of the equations in the following
subparagraphs. For Level D Limits, see Appendix F of Sec-
tion III Appendices. The load rating for Test Loadings shall NF-3282.3 Supports Loaded in Compression. The 13
be determined in accordance with the requirements for load rating for supports loaded in compression shall be
Service Level B limits. determined for Service Levels A through C by the methods
of NF-3282.2. In addition, for cases where buckling gov-
NF-3282.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this erns, T L u shall be corrected for the ratio of Youngs Mod-
paragraph are defined as follows: ulus at the Design Temperature to Youngs Modulus at the
Kl = l o a d r a t i n g c o e f f i c i e n t f o r s u p p o r t i n test temperature. The load rating shall be determined by
compression the following equations:
S = allowable stress value at the Design Tempera- Design and Level A Limits
ture (NF-3112.1) from the applicable tables of
7
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, ksi (MPa)
S u = specified minimum tensile strength of the mate- Test and Level B Limits
rial used in the support as given in the applic-
able tables of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, ksi 8
(MPa)
Su ( a c t ) = actual tensile strength of the material used in Level C Limits
the part or support which had reached ultimate
9
capacity during the test, ksi (MPa)
Sy ( a c t ) = actual yield strength of the material used in the
part or support which yielded during the test,
ksi (MPa)
T L u = support test load at which a substantial in-
crease in load displacement results in zero or
negative increase in actual support load
T L y = support test load at or below yield
NF-3282.4 Alternative Load Rating Method Using Multiply S by 1.5 to arrive at S y values for the material
TL y or T L u Test Results Only. Either T L y or TL u test re- [round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa)] if an S y va-
sults may be used to establish a support load rating, pro- lue for the material is needed.
vided the load rating as determined by the method of
NF-3282.2 or NF-3282.3 is modified as follows: NF-3311.2 High Cycle Fatigue Analysis. The rules for
(a) For load rating based on T L y test results only designing LinearType Supports given in NF-3330 are es-
(1) for supports constructed of materials having defi- sentially the same as those given in NF-3320 for linear
nitely determinable yield points and specified minimum elastic analysis, except that the maximum range of stress,
Sy/Su ratios not greater than 0.625, the load rating shall namely, the difference between the minimum and maxi-
be multiplied by 0.83. If Sy(act) of the material is not known, mum value of the stress throughout each cycle and the fre-
150% of the material specified minimum yield strength quency with which the support will be subjected to this
shall be assumed as the S y /Sy(act) in place of multiplier range of stress, shall be taken into consideration when
0.83 so stipulated by the Design Specification (NCA3250).
(2) for supports constructed of carbon steel with spe-
NF-3311.3 Limit Analysis. The rules for limit (plastic)
cified minimum tensile strengths of not over 70,000 psi
analysis given in NF-3340 may be used as an alternative to
(485 MPa), S y ( a c t ) shall be increased by 5,000 psi
the linear elastic analysis method. These rules permit pro-
(34 MPa) prior to determining the load rating
portioning LinearType Supports on the basis of limit de-
(3) for all other materials the determined load rating
sign by determining their lower bound collapse loads.
shall be multiplied by 0.67
The requirements set forth in NF-3320 governing allow-
For supports loaded in compression, a T L u test shall be
able stresses to be used in designing LinearType Supports
performed with the compressive load rating determined
are waived when the limit design procedure is employed,
in accordance with NF-3282.3.
but all other pertinent provisions of NF-3320 shall apply.
(b) For load rating based on T L u test results, the deter-
mined load rating shall be multiplied by 0.50. NF-3311.4 Basis for Determining Stress in Design by
Analysis. The theory of failure used in the rules for the de-
sign of LinearType Supports is the maximum stress theo-
NF-3300 DESIGN RULES FOR LINEARTYPE ry. In the maximum stress theory, the controlling stress is
SUPPORTS the maximum principal stress.
NF-3310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-3311.5 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis.
This Subarticle provides rules for the design of Linear Terms used in the design of LinearType Supports by
Type Supports by either linear elastic analysis stress analysis are defined in NF-3313.
(NF-3320) or plastic (limit) analysis (NF-3340). Linear
e l a s t i c a n a l yt i c al p r o c e d u r e s ar e a l s o p r o v i d e d
(NF-3330) for the design of members and connections NF-3312 Analysis Methods
which will be subjected to high cycle fatigue conditions
in service. LinearType Supports may be designed by either elastic
or limit analysis, limits for which are given in NF-3312.1.
NF-3311 Design Considerations
NF-3312.1 Elastic Analysis. In elastic analysis it is as-
13 NF-3311.1 Linear Elastic Analysis. The rules for lin- sumed that all component and support stiffnesses remain
ear elastic analysis are based on the yield strength values constant.
at temperature of the materials used in constructing (a) Design Limits. The rules and stress limits that must
lineartype supports that are set forth in Tables 3, 4, and
be satisfied in an elastic analysis for any Design Loading
Y1 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1. The allowable stresses
shall be stated in the Design Specification.
are determined in NF-3320 by applying factors of safety
dependent on the structural member involved to these (b) Service Limits, Level A Through D. The rules and
specified yield strength values. stress limits which must be satisfied in an elastic analysis
S m values for bolting materials listed in Table 4, Section for any Level A through D Service Loading stated in the De-
II, Part D, Subpart 1 are based on one-third of the calcu- sign Specification are those given in NF-3321 multiplied
lated yield strength at temperature and other factors. Mul- by the appropriate stress limit factor from
tiply S m by 3 to arrive at S y values for the material [round Table NF-3312.1(b)-1.
up to next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa)] if an S y value for the (c) Test Limits. The rules and stress limits that must be
material is needed. satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the Design Speci-
S values for bolting materials listed in Table 3, Section fication are those given in NF-3321 multiplied by the ap-
II, Part D, Subpart 1 are based on two-thirds of the calcu- propriate stress limit factor in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1
lated yield strength at temperature and other factors. under Test Loadings.
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Linear-Type
Supports Designed by Analysis
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Primary stresses [Note K s = 1.0 K s = 1.0 K s = 1.33 K s = 1.5 K s = 1.33
(4)], [Note (5)]
K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 [Note K v = 1.5 [Note (6)] K v = 1.33 [Note

(6)] (6)]
but stress 2/3 of but stress 2/3 of but stress 2/3 of

critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling
stress stress stress
Primary plus secondary Evaluation is required for critical buckling for all loading categories. The requirements of this Subarticle shall be
stresses [Note (5)], met for this evaluation.
[Note (7)]
Peak stresses Evaluation not required.
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable compressive axial and bending stresses to determine buckling limit
K s = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and bending stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350,
and NF-3360)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350, and NF-3360)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control
must be considered separately.
(2) K s , K v , and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 S u .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of
piping shall be considered as primary stresses.
(6) Shear stress shall not exceed 0.42 S u .
(7) Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary stresses, shall be limited to a range of 2 S y or S u at temperature, whichever is
less for component supports only.
NF-3313 Nomenclature and Numbering of A s t = crosssectional area of stiffener or pair of stiffen-

Equations ers, in.2 (mm2)
A w = area of girder web, in.2 (mm2)
NF-3313.1 Nomenclature. Except where symbols are C = ratio of bolt tensile strength to tensile strength of
used in the text of the paragraphs that follow to represent connected part
the value of complex algebraic expressions, the nomencla- C b = bending coefficient dependent upon moment
ture adopted in NF-3300 is defined as follows: gradient
C c = slenderness ratio separating elastic and inelastic
A = gross area of an axially loaded compression mem-
buckling
ber, in.2 (mm2)
C c = effective column slenderness ratio
A b = nominal body area of a fastener, in.2 (mm2); area
C m = coefficient applied to bending term in interaction
of an upset rod based upon the major diameter
equation and dependent upon column curvature
of its threads, i.e., the diameter of a coaxial cylinder
caused by applied moments
that would bound the crests of the upset threads,
C t = reduction coefficient in computing effective net
in.2 (mm2)
area of an axially loaded tension member
A e = effective net area of an axially loaded tension
C v = ratio of critical web stress, according to the linear
member, in.2 (mm2)
buckling theory, to the shear yield stress of web
A f = area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2)
material
A n = net area of an axially loaded tension member, in.2
(mm2)
C 1 = increment used in computing minimum spacing of P c r = maximum strength of axially loaded compression
oversized and slotted holes member or beam, kips (N)
C 2 = increment used in computing minimum edge dis- P e = Euler buckling load, kips (N)
tance for oversized and slotted holes P s = maximum slip resistance of the joint, lb (N)
D = factor dependent upon type of transverse P y = axial plastic load, equal to member area times spe-
stiffeners cified minimum yield stress, kips (N)
= outside diameter of tubular members, in. (mm) Q a = ratio of effective area of an axially loaded member
E = modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi (MPa) to its total area
F a = axial compressive stress permitted in the absence Q s = axial stress reduction factor
of bending moment, ksi (MPa) R = reaction or concentrated transverse load applied
F a s = axial compressive stress permitted in the absence to beam or girder, kips (N); radius, in. (mm)
of bending moment, for bracing and other second- S u = tabulated values of ultimate tensile strength of ma-
ary members, ksi (MPa) terial at temperature (Table U, Section II, Part D,
F b = bending stress permitted in the absence of axial Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
force, ksi (MPa) S y = yield strength at temperature (Table Y1, Section
F b = allowable bending stress in compression flange of II, Part D, Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
plate girders as reduced for hybrid girders or be- T b = specific pretension of a high strength bolt, kips (N)
cause of large web depththickness ratio, ksi T i = initial clamping force per bolt, lb (N)
(MPa) V u = shear produced by required factored loading, ulti-
F e = Euler stress divided by factor of safety, ksi (MPa) mate load, kips (N)
F p = allowable bearing stress on the projected area of Y = ratio of yield stress of web steel to yield stress of
bolts or pins, or on contact area of milled surfaces stiffener steel
and ends of rollers, rockers, or fitted bearing stif- Z x = plastic section modulus for axis of bending, in.3
feners at temperature, ksi (MPa) (mm3)
F s r = stress range, ksi (MPa) a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners; di-
F t = allowable tensile stress, ksi (MPa) mension parallel to the direction of stress,
F t b = allowable tensile stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) Table NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
F v = allowable shear stress, ksi (MPa) a = distance required at ends of welded partial length
F v b = allowable shear stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) cover plate to develop stress, in. (mm)
F y c = column yield stress, ksi (MPa) b = actual width of stiffened and unstiffened compres-
F y s t = stiffener yield stress, ksi (MPa) sion elements, in. (mm)
K = effective length factor = dimensions normal to the direction of stress,
L = span length Table NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
= distance from center of bolt hole to edge of con- b e = effective width of stiffened compression element,
nected part, in. (mm) in. (mm)
M = moment, inkip (Nmm) (NF-3320); factored bend- b f = flange width of rolled beam or plate girder, in.
ing moment, inkip (Nmm) (NF-3340) (mm)
M = lesser of the factored moments at the ends of un- d = depth of beam or girder, in. (mm)
braced segment, inkip (Nmm) = diameter of roller or rocker bearing, in. (mm)
M 1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam = nominal diameter of fastener, in. (mm)
column, inkip (Nmm) d c = column web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm)
M 2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam e = horizontal displacement, in the direction of the
column, inkip (Nmm) span, between top and bottom of simply sup-
M m = critical moment that can be resisted by a plasti- ported beam at its ends, in. (mm)
cally designed member in the absence of axial load, f = axial compression stress on member based on ef-
inkip (Nmm) fective area, ksi (MPa)
M p = plastic moment, inkip (Nmm) f a = computed axial stress, ksi (MPa)
N = length of bearing of applied load, in. (mm) f b = computed bending stress, ksi (MPa)
P = force transmitted b y a fastener, k ips ( N) f c = specified compression strength of concrete, ksi
( NF-3320); factored axial load, kips (N) (MPa)
(NF-3340); axial load, kips (N) (NF-3340) f p = computed bearing stress, ksi (MPa)
P b f = factored beam flange or connection plate force in a f t = computed tensile stress, ksi (MPa)
restrained connection f v = computed shear stress, ksi (MPa)
= the computed force delivered by the flange or mo- f v s = shear between girder web and transverse stiffen-
ment connection plate, multiplied by fivethirds ers, kips/linear in. (N/mm) of single stiffener or
for Level A loads and multiplied by fourthirds pair of stiffeners
for Level B, C, and D loads, kips (N)
g = transverse center to center spacing (gage) be- NF-3320 DESIGN BY LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS
tween successive holes in line of stress, in. (mm) FOR CLASS 1
h = clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder NF-3321 General Design Requirements
at the section under investigation, in. (mm)
k = coefficient relating linear buckling strength of a NF-3321.1 Design and Service Conditions.
plate to its dimensions and condition of edge (a) Except as otherwise provided in this Subarticle, all
support items of the structure shall be so proportioned that the
= also distance between outer face of column flange stress, ksi (MPa), for Design and Level A Service Limits,
and web toe of its fillet if column is a rolled shape, shall not exceed the values of NF-3322. For Level B, C,
or equivalent distance if column is a welded shape, and D Service Limits, allowable stresses may be increased
in. (mm) by the factors shown in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1. Bearing
k s = slip coefficient for the particular surface condition type stress limits are excluded from rules for Level D Ser-
taken from Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 vice Limits.
l = for beams, distance between cross section braced (b) To avoid column buckling in compression members,
against twist or lateral displacement of the com- local instability associated with compression flange buck-
pression flange, in. (mm) ling in flexural members, and web buckling in plate gir-
= for columns, actual unbraced length of member or ders, the allowable stress shall be limited to twothirds
unsupported length of lacing bar, in. (mm) of the critical buckling stress.
l b = actual unbraced length in plane of bending, in. NF-3321.2 Design for High Cycle Fatigue Condi-
(mm) tions. Design for high cycle fatigue conditions shall be in
l c r = critical unbraced length adjacent to plastic hinge, accordance with the requirements of NF-3330, using the
in. (mm) allowable stresses of NF-3322 as modified by NF-3332.4.
m = number of shear planes per bolt
n = number of bolts in the joint NF-3322 Design Requirements for Structural
r = governing radius of gyration, in. (mm) Steel Members
r b = radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bend-
NF-3322.1 Allowable Stresses Design and Level A
ing, in. (mm)
Service Conditions.
r c = radius of gyration of a section comprising the com-
(a) Stress in Tension. The allowable stress in tension
pression flange plus onethird of the compression
shall be as given in (1) through (3)
web area, taken about an axis in the plane of the
web, in. (mm) (1) Except for pinconnected members and threaded
r y = radius of gyration of a member about its weak axis, members used in bolting applications, F t shall be
in. (mm) 1
s = longitudinal centertocenter spacing (pitch) of
any two consecutive holes, in. (mm) but not more than 0.5 times S u on the effective net area.11
t = girder, beam, or column web thickness, in. (mm); (2) For pinconnected members, using the net area11
thickness of a connected part, in. (mm)
= wall thickness of a tubular member, in. (mm) 2
t b = thickness of beam flange or moment connection
(3) For threaded parts in tension used in bolting ap-
plate at rigid beam to column connection, in. (mm)
plications, see NF-3324.6(a)(1).
t f = flange thickness, in. (mm)
t l = thickness of thinner part joined by partial penetra- (b) Stress in Shear
tion groove weld, in. (mm) (1) Except as provided in (2) and NF-3324.6(a)(2),
x = subscript relating to bending about the strong on the crosssectional area effective in resisting shear
principal axis 3a
y = subscript relating to bending about the weak prin-
cipal axis The effective area in resisting shear of rolled and fab-
= ratio of hybrid girder web yield stress to flange ricated shapes may be taken as the overall depth times the
yield stress web thickness.
= displacement of the neutral axis of a loaded mem- (2) At the beam end connections where the top flange
ber from its position when the member is not is coped, and in similar situations where failure might oc-
loaded, in. (mm) cur by shear along a plane through the fasteners, or by a
combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners
NF-3313.2 Numbering of Equations. A separate ser-
plus tension along a perpendicular plane, on the effective
ies of equation numbers is used for each paragraph and
area in resisting tearing failure shall be
each series, beginning with eq. (1).
3b
The effective area is the minimum net failure surface, (-b) Where Kl/r Is Greater Than 120. The following
bounded by the bolt holes. compressive stress limit applies to bracing and secondary
(c) Stress in Compression. The allowable stress in com- members, as well as main members:
pression shall be as required by (1) through (3). The al-
lowable compressive stress for columns, except those 6b
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel, shall be as re-
quired by (1). The allowable compressive stress for col-
(3) Member Elements Other Than Columns
umns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be
as required by (2). The allowable compressive stress for (-a) Plate Girder Stiffeners. On the gross area of
member elements other than columns constructed of plate girder stiffeners, the allowable stress in compression
any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be shall be
as required by (3). 7
(1) Gross Sections of Columns, Except Those Fabricated
of Austenitic Stainless Steel (-b) Webs of Rolled Shapes. On the web of rolled
shapes at the toe of the fillet, the allowable stress in com-
(-a) Where Kl/r Is Less Than Cc. On the gross sec-
pression shall be
tion of axially loaded compression members whose cross
sections meet the provisions of NF-3322.2(d), when K l/r 8
(the largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced
segment as defined in NF-3322.2) is less than C c , the al- For the use of stiffeners to avoid web crippling, see
lowable stress in compression shall be NF-3322.6(a).
(d) Stress in Bending. The allowable bending stress re-
sulting from tension and compression in structural mem-
4 bers shall be as required by (1) through (6).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) Compact Sections

(-a) Tension and compression on extreme fibers of
where compact hot rolled or builtup members (except hybrid
beams and members made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or
greater S y material) symmetrical about and loaded in
the plane of their minor axes and meeting the require-
(-b) Where Kl/r Is Greater Than Cc. On the gross ments of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending
section of axially loaded compression members when stress
Kl/r exceeds C c , the allowable stress in compression shall
9
be
In order to qualify, a member shall meet the re-
5 quirements of (-1) through (-7).
(-1) The flanges shall be continuously connected
to the web or webs.
(-c) Where the Slenderness Ratio Exceeds 120. On
(-2) The widththickness ratio of unstiffened
the gross section12 of axially loaded bracing and second-
projecting elements of the compression flange [as defined
ary members, when l/r exceeds 120 the allowable stress
in compression shall be in NF-3322.2(d)] shall not exceed (For SI units,
use ).
6 (-3) The widththickness ratio of stiffened ele-
men ts o f t he c o mp res sion fl ange [as def ined in
NF-3322.2(d)] shall not exceed (For SI units,
(2) Gross Sections of Columns Fabricated From Auste-
nitic Stainless Steel. On the gross section of axially loaded use ).
compression members whose cross sections meet the pro- (-4) The depththickness ratio of the web or
visions of NF-3322.2(d) the allowable stress in compres- webs shall not exceed the value given by eq. (10) or
sion shall be as required by (-a) and (-b). (11), as applicable
(-a) Where Kl/r Is Less Than or Equal to 120.
(U.S. Customary Units)
6a
10
the combined axial and bending loading, provided that

(SI Units) the stress f a due to any concurrent axial load on the mem-
ber does not exceed 0.15F a .
10
(2) Members With High Flange WidthThickness Ratio.
Members that meet the requirements of (1), except that
when f a /S y 0.16;
b f /2t f exceeds (For SI units, use )
(U.S. Customary Units) but is less than (For SI units, use ),
11 may be designed on the basis of an allowable bending
stress
(SI Units) (U.S. Customary Units)
11 13
when f a /S y > 0.16.

(-5) The laterally unsupported length of the (SI Units)
compression flange of members other than boxshaped
13
members shall not exceed the value (for SI
units, use ) nor 20,000/[(d A f )S y ] {for SI units, (3) Doubly Symmetrical Members With Bending About
use 138 000/[(d A f ) S y ]}. the Minor Axis. Tension and compression on extreme fi-
bers of doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members [ex-
(-6) The laterally unsupported length of the
cept for hybrid girders and members made from 65 ksi
compression flange of a boxshaped member of rectangu-
(450 MPa) or greater S y material] which are bent about
lar cross section, whose depth is not more than six times
their minor axis, meeting the requirements of (1)(-a)
the width and whose flange thickness is not more than
and (1)(-b); solid round and square bars; and solid rectan-
two times the web thickness, shall not exceed the value
gular sections bent about their weaker axis shall not ex-
ceed a bending stress of
14
12
Doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members bent
about their minor axis [except for hybrid girders and
(SI Units)
members made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or greater S y ma-
12
terial], meeting the requirements of (1)(-a), except where
b f /2t f exceeds (for SI units, use ) but
except that it need not be less than 1,200 (b /S y ) [for SI
is less than (for SI units, use ), may
units, use 8 300 (b /S y )].
be designed on the basis of an allowable bending stress
(-7) The diameterthickness ratio of hollow cir-
cular sections shall not exceed 3,300/S y (for SI units,
use 23 000/S y ).
(-b) Beams and girders (except for hybrid girders 15a
and members made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or greater S y
material) which meet the requirements of (-a)(-1) through
(-a)(-7) and are continuous over supports or are rigidly (SI Units)
framed to columns by means of high strength bolts or
welds may be proportioned for ninetenths of the negative 15a
moments produced by gravity loading which are maxi-
mum at points of support, provided that for such members
Rectangular tubular sections meeting the require-
the maximum positive moment shall be increased by one
ments of (1)(-a)(-1), (1)(-a)(-3), and (1)(-a)(-4), and bent
tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction
about their minor axis, may be designed on the basis of an
shall not apply to moments produced by loading on canti-
allowable bending stress
levers. If the negative moment is resisted by a column ri-
gidly framed to the beam or girder, the onetenth 15b
reduction may be used in proportioning the column for
(4) BoxType Flexural Members. Tension and com-

pression on extreme fibers of boxtype flexural members (SI Units)
whose compression flange or web widththickness ratio
does not meet the requirements of (1), but does conform
to the requirements of NF-3322.2(d), shall not exceed a
bending stress of then
16 (U.S. Customary Units)
Lateral torsional buckling need not be investigated 18

for a box section whose depth is less than six times its
width. Lateral support requirements for box sections of
larger depthwidth ratios must be determined by special (SI Units)
analysis.
(5) Miscellaneous Members 18
(-a) Tension on extreme fibers of flexural mem-
bers not covered in (1) through (4), shall not exceed a When the compression flange is solid and approxi-
bending stress as determined by using eq. (4)(16). mately rectangular in cross section and its area is not less
than that of the tension flange
(-b) Compression on extreme fibers of flexural
members included in (-a), meeting the requirements of
NF-3322.2(d)(1)(-b), and having an axis of symmetry in
and loaded in the plane of their web and compression 19
on extreme fibers of channels 13 bent about their major
axis, shall have the larger value of bending stress com-
puted by eqs. (17) through (19), as applicable, but not (SI Units)
more than 0.60S y .14
When 19
(U.S. Customary Units) where

C b = 1.75 + 1.05(M 1 /M 2 ) + 0.3 (M 1 /M 2 )2 2.3, where
M 1 is the smaller and M 2 is the larger bending mo-
ment at the ends of the unbraced length taken about
the strong axis of the member, and where M 1 /M 2
(SI Units) (the ratio of end moments) is positive when M 1
and M 2 have the same sign (reverse curvature
bending) and is negative when they are of opposite
signs (single curvature bending). When the bending
then moment at any point within an unbraced length is
larger than that at both ends of this length, the value
(U.S. Customary Units) of C b shall be taken as 1. When computing F b x and
F b y to be used in eq. (e)(1)(20), C b may be com-
puted by the equation given above for frames sub-
17
ject to joint translation. C b may conservatively be
taken as 1 for cantilever beams.15
(SI Units) For cantilevers braced against twist only at the

support, l may be conservatively taken as the actual
17
length.
(-c) For hybrid plate girders, S y for eqs. (-b)(17)
and (-b)(18) is the yield stress of the compression flange.
When Equation (-b)(19) shall not apply to hybrid girders.
(6) Miscellaneous Members Braced Laterally. Com-
(U.S. Customary Units) pression in extreme fibers of flexural members meeting
the requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1)(-b), but not included
in (5)(-b), shall result in a maximum bending stress as de-
termined by using eq. (4)(16), provided that sections bent
about their major axis are braced laterally in the region of where
compression stress at intervals not exceeding M1 /M2 = the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
(For SI units, use ). ends of that portion of the member unbraced in
the plane of bending under consideration.
(e) Combined Stresses M 1 /M2 is positive when the member is bent
(1) Axial Compression and Bending. For members sub- in reverse curvature and negative when it is
jected to both axial compression and bending, including bent in single curvature.
bending moment resulting in secondary stress, stresses (-c) For compression members in frames braced
shall be proportioned to satisfy the requirements of eqs. against joint translation in the plane of loading and sub-
(20) through (22) jected to transverse loading between their supports, the
value of C m may be determined by rational analysis; how-
20
ever, in lieu of such analysis, the following values may be
used:
(-1) for members whose ends are restrained
against rotation in the plane of bending
21
(-2) for members whose ends are unrestrained

After evaluating primary stresses, the righthand side against rotation in the plane of bending
of eq. (22) may be replaced by 1.5 when both primary and
secondary bending stresses are considered. When f a /
Fa 0.15, eq. (22) may be used in lieu of eqs. (20) and
(21) (2) Axial Tension and Bending. Members subject to
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
both axial tension and bending stresses shall be propor-
tioned at all points along their length to satisfy the re-
22 quirements of eq. (1)(21), where f b is the computed
bending tensile stress. However, the computed bending
compressive stress, taken alone, shall not exceed the ap-
In eqs. (20) through (22), the subscripts x and y indi-
plicable value according to (d), Stress in Bending.
cate the axis of bending about which a particular stress or
design property applies, and (3) Shear and Tension. Bolts subject to combined
shear and tension shall be proportioned in accordance
with the requirements of NF-3324.
(f) Bearing on Contact Area
(1) Milled Surfaces. On contact area of milled surfaces
for all members except those fabricated of austenitic stain- and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners16 on projected area of
less steel, or pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, the maximum bear-
ing stress shall be
23
for members fabricated of austenitic stainless steel (in the (2) Rollers and Rockers. The maximum bearing stress,
expression for Fe, as in the case of F a , F b , and 0.60S y , Fe ksi (MPa), shall be
may be multiplied by the appropriate stress limit factor
from Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 for the particular stress cate- (U.S. Customary Units)
gory), where C m is a coefficient whose value shall be as gi-
ven in (-a) through (-c) 24a
(-a) For compression members in frames subject
to joint translation (sidesway), C m = 0.85.
(-b) For rotationally restrained compression mem- (SI Units)
bers in frames braced against joint translation and not
subject to transverse loading between their supports in 24a
the plane of bending
(3) Bolts. The maximum bearing load on projected
area of bolts in bearing connections shall be
(2) The slenderness ratio l /r of tension members,

24b other than rods, preferably should not exceed 240 for
main members, and 300 for lateral bracing members
(4) Concrete Bearing. In the absence of any other Code and other secondary members.
rules governing bearing stresses on concrete, the maxi-
(d) Width Ratios
mum bearing stress values shall be as given in (-a) and
(-b) (1) Unstiffened Elements Under Compression
(-a) Effective Width. Unstiffened (projecting) com-
(-a) on the full area of a concrete support
pression elements are those having one free edge parallel
25 to the direction of compression stress. The width of unstif-
fened plates shall be taken from the free edge to the first
(-b) on less than the full area of a concrete support row of fasteners or welds; the width of legs of angles,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
channel and zee flanges, and stems of tees shall be taken
26 as the full nominal dimension; the width of flanges of I
and H shaped members and tees shall be taken as onehalf
where of the full nominal width. The thickness of a sloping flange
shall be measured at a section halfway between a free
A 1 = bearing area, in.2 (mm2) edge and the corresponding face of the web.
A 2 = full crosssectional area of concrete support, in.2
(-b) Determination of Effective Width. Unstiffened
(mm2)
elements subject to axial compression or compression
(g) Single Angle Members. Single angle members shall be due to bending shall be considered as fully effective when
designed in accordance with Mandatory Appendix NF-II. the widththickness ratio is not greater than the following:
(-1) for single angle struts and double angle
NF-3322.2 Stability and Slenderness and
struts with separators, (For SI units, use
WidthThickness Ratios.
(a) General Requirements .)
(1) General stability shall be provided for the struc- (-2) for struts comprising double angles in con-
ture as a whole and for each compression element. Design tact; angles or plates projecting from girders, columns,
consideration shall be given to significant load effects re- or other compression members; compression flanges of
sulting from the deflected shape of the structure or of in- beams; and stiffeners on plate girders, (For SI
dividual elements of the lateral load resisting system,
including the effects on beams, columns, bracing, connec- units, use .)
tions, and shear walls.
(-3) for stems of tees, (For SI units,
(2) In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially
loaded compression member, except as provided in use .)
NF-3322.1(c)(3), the length shall be taken as its effective
When the actual widththickness ratio exceeds these
length K l, and r shall be taken as the corresponding radius
values, the design stress shall be governed by the provi-
of gyration.
sions of (e).
(b) Lateral Stability (2) Stiffened Elements Under Compression
(1) Braced Frames. In frames [where lateral stability (-a) Effective Width. Stiffened compression ele-
is provided by adequate attachment to diagonal bracing ments are those having lateral support along both edges
(to shear walls), to an adjacent structure having adequate which are parallel to the direction of the compression
lateral stability, or to floor slabs (or roof decks) secured stress. The width of such elements shall be taken as
horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel to the follows:
plane of the frame] and in trusses, the effective length fac- (-1) For webs of rolled, builtup, or formed sec-
tor K for the compression members shall be taken as 1.0, tions, h is the clear distance between flanges.
unless analysis shows that a smaller value may be used.
(-2) For webs of rolled, builtup, or formed sec-
(2) Unbraced Frames. In frames where lateral stability tions, d is the full nominal depth.
is dependent upon the bending stiffness of rigidly con- (-3) For flange or diaphragm plates in builtup
nected beams and columns, the effective length Kl of com- sections, the width b is the distance between adjacent
pression members shall be determined by a rational lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
method and shall not be less than the actual unbraced
(-4) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural
length.
sections, the width b is the clear distance between webs
(c) Maximum Slenderness Ratios less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner ra-
(1) The slenderness ratio Kl /r of compression mem- dius is not known, the flat width may be taken as the total
bers shall not exceed 200. section width minus three times the thickness.
(-b) Determination of Effective Width. Stiffened ele-

ments subject to axial compression or to uniform com- (SI Units)
pression due to bending, as in the case of the flange of a
flexural17 member, shall be considered as fully effective
when the widththickness ratio is not greater than the
following: then
(-1) for flanges of square and rectangular box
sections of uniform thickness, (For SI units,
27
use .)
(-2) for unsupported width of cover plates per-
forated with a succession of access holes, 18 (SI Units)
(For SI units, use .) 27
(-3) for all other uniformly compressed stiffened

when
elements, (For SI units, use .)
Except in the case of perforated cover plates, when
the actual widththickness ratio exceeds these values, the
design stress shall be governed by the provisions of (e).
(-c) Circular Tubular Elements. Circular tubular
elements subject to axial compression shall be considered (SI Units)
as fully effective when the ratio of the outside diameter to
the wall thickness is not greater than 3,300/S y (22 700/
S y ). For diameter to thickness ratios greater than 3,300/
S y (22 700/S y ) but less than 13,000/S y (89 600/S y ), the then
calculated stress shall be governed by the provisions of
(e). (U.S. Customary Units)
(e) Slender Compression Elements
(1) General Requirements. Axially loaded members 28
and flexural members, containing elements subject to
compression and having a widththickness ratio in excess
of the applicable limit given in (d)(1) and (d)(2), shall be (SI Units)
proportioned to meet the requirements of the following
subparagraphs: 28
(2) Unstiffened Compression Elements. Except as pro-
vided herein, stress on unstiffened compression elements,
(-b) For angles or plates projecting from columns
the widththickness ratio of which exceeds the applicable
or other compression members and for projecting ele-
limit given in (d)(1), shall be subject to a reduction of fac-
ments of compression flanges of girders, when
tor Q s . The value of Q s shall be determined by eqs.
(-a)(27) to (-c)(32), as applicable, where b is the width
of the unstiffened element as defined in (d)(1). When such
elements comprise the compression flange of a flexural
member, the maximum allowable bending stress shall
not exceed 0.6S y Qs, nor the applicable value as provided
in (5) or (6). The allowable stress of axially loaded com- (SI Units)
pression members shall be modified by the appropriate
reduction factor Q s as provided in (5).
(-a) For single angles, when
then
29
(SI Units) (SI Units)
29
when then
(U.S. Customary Units) (U.S. Customary Units)
32
32
then
(-d) However, unstiffened elements of channels
(U.S. Customary Units) and tees whose proportions exceed the limits of (d)(1)
shall conform to the limits given in
30 Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1.
(3) Stiffened Compression Elements
(-a) When the widththickness ratio of uniformly
(SI Units) compressed stiffened elements, except for perforated cov-
er plates, exceeds the applicable limit given in (d)(2), a re-
30 duced effective width b e shall be used in computing the
flexural design properties of the section containing the
element and the permissible axial stress, except that the
ratio b e /t need not be taken as less than the applicable va-
lue permitted in (d)(2).
(-1) For the flanges of square and rectangular
(-c) For stems of tees, when sections of uniform thickness
33
(SI Units)
(SI Units)
then 33
31
Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1
Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees
(SI Units)
Ratio of Flange Ratio of Flange
31 Width to Profile Thickness to Web or
Shape Depth Stem Thickness
when Builtup or rolled 0.25 3.0
channels 0.50 2.0
(U.S. Customary Units) Builtup tees 0.50 1.25
Rolled tees 0.50 1.10
(-2) For other uniformly compressed elements: accordingly, except that for sections otherwise symmetri-
cal, the properties may conservatively and more easily be
(U.S. Customary Units) computed using a corresponding effective area on the ten-
sion side of the neutral axis as well. That portion of the
area that is neglected in arriving at the effective area shall
34 be located at and symmetrical about the center line of the
stiffened element to which it applies.
(-b) The stress f a due to axial loading, and the ra-
(SI Units) dius of gyration r , shall be computed on the basis of actual
crosssectional area. However, the allowable axial stress
F a , as provided in (5) shall be subject to the form factor
34
where where the effective area is equal to the actual area less
b = the actual width, in. (mm), of a stiffened compres- (bbe) t.
sion element as defined in (d)(2) (5) Axially Loaded Compression Members. The allow-
f = computed compressive stress, ksi (MPa), in the stif- able stress for axially loaded compression members con-
fened elements based on the design properties as taining unstiffened or stiffened elements shall not exceed
specified in (4). If unstiffened elements are included
in the total cross section for the stiffened element, f
must be such that the maximum compressive stress
in the unstiffened element does not exceed F a Qs or 35
F b Qs, as applicable.
(-b) The allowable stress for axially loaded circular
tubular members not meeting the requirements of when the largest effective slenderness ratio of any un-
NF-3322.1(e), but having a diametertothickness ratio braced segment is less than C c or the value given by
of less than 13,000/S y (For SI units, use 89 000/S y .), shall eq. NF-3322.1(c)(1)(-b)(5) when Kl /r exceeds C c , where
not exceed either the smaller value determined by
NF-3322.1(e) or

and
(-a) Cross sections composed entirely of unstif-

(SI Units)
fened elements
(-b) Cross sections composed entirely of stiffened

(-c) When the allowable stresses are increased for
elements
Level C Service Limits, the effective width b e shall be de-
termined on the basis of 0.75 times the computed com-
pressive stress, f, caused by Level C Service Loadings.
(4) Design Properties. Properties of sections shall be (-c) Cross sections composed of both stiffened and
determined in accordance with conventional methods, unstiffened elements
using the full cross section of the member, except as re-
quired in (-a) and (-b).
(-a) In computing the moment of inertia and sec- (6) Combined Axial and Flexural Stress. In applying the
tion modulus of flexural members with respect to the axis provisions of NF-3322.1(e) to members subject to com-
of bending under consideration, the effective width of stif- bined axial and flexural stress and containing stiffened ele-
fened compression elements parallel to the axis of bending ments whose widththickness ratio exceeds the applicable
and having a widththickness ratio in excess of the applic- limit given in (d)(2), the stresses F a , f b x , and f b y shall be
able limit given in (d)(2), rather than the actual width, calculated on the basis of the section properties as pro-
shall be used, and the axis of bending shall be located vided in (4) and (5), as applicable. The allowable bending
stress F b for members containing unstiffened elements maximum width of the member, or by continuous welds
whose widththickness ratio exceeds the applicable limit having a length not less than the maximum width of the
given in (d)(1) shall be the smaller value 0.6S y Qs or that member.
provided in NF-3322.1(d)(5). (3) Intermediate Fasteners. The longitudinal spacing
for intermediate bolts or intermittent welds in builtup
NF-3322.3 Plate Girders, Rolled Beams, and Built
members shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of
Up Members.
calculated stress. The maximum longitudinal spacing of
(a) Girders and Rolled Beams. Rolled or welded shapes, bolts or intermittent welds connecting two rolled shapes
plate girders, and coverplated beams shall, in general, in contact with one another shall not exceed 24 in.
be proportioned by the moment of inertia of the gross sec- (600 mm). In addition, for painted members and un-
tion. No deduction shall be made for shop or field bolt or painted members not subject to corrosion where the out-
rivet holes in either flange provided that side component consists of a plate, the maximum
35a longitudinal spacing shall not exceed:
(-a) (For SI units, use .) times
where A f g is the gross flange area and A f n is the net flange
the thickness of the outside plate nor 12 in. (300 mm)
area, calculated in accordance with the provisions of
when fasteners are not staggered along adjacent gage
NF-3322.8.
lines;
If
(-b) (For SI units, use .) times
35b the thickness of the outside plate nor 18 in. (450 mm)
when fasteners are staggered along adjacent gage lines.
the member flexural properties shall be based on an effec-
(b) Local Slenderness Ratio. Compression members com-
tive tension flange area A f e
posed of two or more rolled shapes separated by intermit-
tent fillers shall be connected at these fillers at intervals
35c such that the slenderness ratio K l /r of either shape, be-
tween the fasteners, does not exceed 3/4 times the govern-
(b) Hybrid Girders. Hybrid girders may be proportioned ing slenderness ratio of the builtup member. The least
by the moment of inertia of their gross section, provided radius of gyration r shall be used in computing the slen-
that they are not required to resist an axial force greater derness ratio of each component part. At least two inter-
than 0.15S y times the area of the gross section, where S y mediate connectors shall be used along the length of the
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
is the yield stress of the flange material. To qualify as hy- builtup member.
brid girders, the flanges at any given section shall have the (c) Tie Plates. Open sides of compression members built
same crosssectional area and be made of the same grade up from plates or shapes shall be provided with lacing
of steel. having tie plates at each end and at intermediate points
(c) Open BoxType Beams and Grillages. When two or if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near to
more rolled beams or channels are used side by side to the ends as practicable. In main members carrying calcu-
form a flexural member, they shall be connected together lated stress, the end tie plates shall have a length of not
at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m). Throughbolts less than the distance between the lines of bolts or welds
and separators may be used, provided that in beams hav- connecting them to the elements of the member. Inter-
ing a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) or more, no fewer than two mediate tie plates shall have a length not less than onehalf
bolts shall be used at each separator location. When con- of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less
centrated loads are carried from one beam to the other than onefiftieth of the distance between the lines of bolts
or distributed between the beams, diaphragms having suf- or welds connecting them to the segments of the mem-
ficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be bolted or bers. In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction
welded between the beams. of stress in tie plates shall be not more than six diameters
and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at
NF-3322.4 Compression Members. least three fasteners. In welded construction, the welding
(a) Requirements for Fasteners on each line connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less
(1) Transverse Spacing of Fasteners. All parts of built than onethird of the length of the plate.
up compression members and the transverse spacing of (d) Lacing. Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels,
their lines of fasteners shall meet the requirements of or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that
NF-3322.2. the ratio l/r of the flange included between their connec-
(2) End Fasteners. At the ends of builtup compres- tions shall not exceed 3/4 times the governing ratio for the
sion members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist
all components in contact with one another shall be con- a shearing stress normal to the axis of the member equal
nected by bolts, spaced longitudinally not more than four to 2% of the total compressive stress in the member.
diameters apart for a distance equal to 1 1/2 times the The ratio l /r for lacing bars arranged in single systems
shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not (150 mm). The spacing of tie plates shall be such that
exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at their in- the slenderness ratio of any component in the length be-
tersections. For lacing bars in compression, the unsup- tween tie plates shall not exceed 300.
ported length of the lacing bar shall be taken as the
distance between fasteners or welds connecting it to the NF-3322.6 Webs, Flanges, and Stiffeners.
components of the builtup member for single lacing, (a) W e b s . The ratio of the clear distance between
and 70% of that distance for double lacing. The inclination flanges to the web thickness shall not exceed
of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall preferably be
not less than 60 deg for single lacing and 45 deg for double (U.S. Customary Units)
lacing. When the distance between the lines of fasteners or
welds in the flanges is more than 15 in. (381 mm), the la- 36
cing preferably shall be double or be made of angles.
(e) Perforated Cover Plates. The function of tie plates
and lacing may be performed by continuous cover plates
(SI Units)
perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsup-
ported width of such plates at access holes, as defined in
NF-3322.2(d)(2), is assumed to be available to resist axial 36
stress, provided that
(1) the widththickness ratio conforms to the limita- except that when transverse stiffeners are provided,
tions of NF-3322.2(d)(2) spaced not more than 11/2 times the girder depth, the limit-
(2) the ratio of length in direction of stress to width of ing ratio may be (For SI units, use
hole shall not exceed 2
.), where S y is the yield stress of the compres-
(3) the clear distance between holes in the direction
of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance be- sion flange.
tween nearest lines of connection bolts or welds (1) Combined Shear and Tension Stress. Plate girder
(4) the periphery of the holes at all points connecting webs which depend upon tension field action, as provided
shall have a minimum radius of 11/2 in. (38 mm) in eq. (e)(2)(45), shall be so proportioned that bending
tensile stress due to moment in the plane of the girder
NF-3322.5 BuiltUp Tension Members. web shall not exceed 0.6S y , or
(a) Longitudinal Spacing of Connectors. The longitudinal
spacing of connectors between elements in continuous
contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates 37
shall not exceed
(1) 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or
12 in. (300 mm) for painted members or unpainted mem- where
bers not subject to corrosion F v = allowable web shear stress, ksi (MPa), according to
(2) 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or 7 in. eq. (e)(2)(45)
(175 mm) for unpainted members of weathering steel
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders hav-
subject to atmospheric corrosion
ing flanges and webs with yield values greater than 65 ksi
In a tension member the longitudinal spacing of fasten- (450 MP a) shall not exceed the values given by
ers and intermittent welds connecting two or more shapes eq. (e)(2)(44) if the flexural stress in the flange f b exceeds
in contact shall not exceed 24 in. (600 mm). Tension mem- 0.75F b .
bers composed of two or more shapes or plates separated
by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at (2) Web Crippling
these fillers at intervals such that the slenderness ratio of (-a) Local Web Yielding. Webs of beams and
either component between the fasteners does not exceed welded plate girders shall be so proportioned that the
300. compressive stress at the web toe of the fillets, resulting
(b) Perforated Cover and Tie Plates. Either perforated from concentrated loads not supported by bearing stiffen-
cover plates or tie plates without lacing may be used on ers, shall not exceed the value of 0.66S y ; otherwise, bear-
the open sides of builtup tension members. Tie plates ing stiffeners shall be provided. The governing equations
shall have a length not less than twothirds the distance shall be
between the lines of bolts or welds connecting them to (-1) for interior loads
the elements of the member. The thickness of such tie
plates shall not be less than onefiftieth of the distance be-
38
tween these lines. The longitudinal spacing of bolts or in-
termittent welds at tie plates shall not exceed 6 in.
(-2) for end reactions concentrated compressive loads, when the compressive
force exceeds the following limits:
If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation
39
and(d c /t w )/(l /b f ) is less than 2.3
where N is greater than or equal to k for end reactions. (U.S. Customary Units)
(-b) Stress on Compression Edge of Web Plate. Bear-
ing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of members 41a
under concentrated loads, when the compressive force ex-
ceeds the following limits:
when the concentrated load is applied at a distance
not less than d /2 from the end of the member (SI Units)

41a
40
If the loaded flange is not restrained against rota-
tion and (d c /t w )/(l /b f ) is less than 1.7

(SI Units)
41b
40
when the concentrated load is applied less than a distance (SI Units)
d /2 from the end of the member
(U.S. Customary Units) 41b
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
41
where
b f = flange width, in. (mm)
d c = d 2k = web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm)
(SI Units) l = largest laterally unbraced length along either flange
at the point of load, in. (mm)
Equations (41a) and (41b) need not be checked
41
providing (d c /t w )/(l/b f ) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7, respectively,
or for webs subject to uniformly distributed load.
(b) Flanges
where (1) The thickness of outstanding parts of flanges shall
conform to the requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1).
d = overall depth of the member, in. (mm)
S y = specified minimum yield stress of beam web, ksi (2) Flanges of welded plate girders may be varied in
(MPa) thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by
t f = flange thickness, in. (mm) the use of cover plates.
t w = web thickness, in. (mm) (3) The total crosssectional area of cover plates of
bolted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total flange
If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one area.
half the web depth, eqs. (40) and (41) need not be (c) Flange Development
checked. (1) Highstrength bolts or welds connecting flange to
Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of web or cover plate to flange shall be proportioned to resist
members with flanges not restrained against relative the total horizontal shear resulting from the bending
movement by stiffeners or lateral bracing and subject to forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of these
bolts or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the in- in NF-3322.1(d). The maximum stress in either flange of a
tensity of the shear, but the longitudinal spacing shall not hybrid girder shall not exceed the value given in eq. (42)
exceed the maximum permitted, respectively, for com- or
pression or tension members in NF-3322.4(a)(3) or
NF-3322.5(a). Additionally, bolts or welds connecting
flange to web shall be proportioned so as to transmit to 43
the web any loads applied directly to the flange unless
provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
(2) Partial length cover plates shall be extended be- (e) Stiffeners
yond the theoretical cutoff point and the extended por- (1) Bearing. Bearing stiffeners shall be placed in pairs
tion shall be attached to the beam or girder by high at unframed ends on the webs of plate girders and, where
strength bolts for frictiontype joints or fillet welds ade- required by (a)(2), at points of concentrated loads. Such
quate at the applicable stresses allowed in NF-3324.6(a), stiffeners, when the load normal to the flange is tensile,
NF-3324.5(d), or NF-3332.4, to develop the cover plate shall be welded to the loaded flange and when the load
portion of the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at normal to the flange is compressive may be welded or
the theoretical cutoff point. In addition, for welded cover bear on the loaded flange. They shall be designed as col-
plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to umns subject to the provisions of NF-3322.1, assuming
the beam or girder in the length a , defined in (-a) through the column section to comprise the pair of stiffeners and
(-c), shall be adequate at the allowed stresses to develop a centrally located strip of the web whose width is equal
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the cover plate portion of the flexural stresses in the beam to not more than 25 times its thickness at interior stiffen-
or girder at the distance a from the end of the cover plate. ers, or a width equal to not more than 12 times its thick-
The length a measured from the end of the cover plate, ness when the stiffeners are located at the end of the web.
shall be The effective length shall be taken as not less than three
(-a) a distance equal to the width of the coverplate fourths of the length of the stiffeners in computing the ra-
when there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than tio l /r . Only that portion of the stiffener outside of the
threefourths of the plate thickness across the end of the flange angle fillet or the flange to web welds shall be con-
plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover sidered effective in bearing.
plate in the length a (2) Average Web Shear. Except as provided herein, the
(-b) a distance equal to 11/2 times the width of the largest average web shear f v , ksi (MPa), computed for any
cover plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than condition of complete or partial loading, shall not exceed
threefourths of the plate thickness across the end of the the value given by eq. (44)
plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
plate in the length a (U.S. Customary Units)
(-c) a distance equal to two times the width of the
44
cover plate when there is no weld across the end of the
plate, but continuous welds along both edges of the cover
plate in the length a
(SI Units)
(d) R e d u c t i o n i n F l a n g e S t r e s s . W h e n t h e w e b
depththickness ratio exceeds (for SI units, 44
use ), the maximum stress in the compression
flange shall not exceed where, when C v is less than 0.8,
42
42
where F b is the applicable bending stress, ksi (MPa), given when C v is greater than 0.8,
where
D = 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
= 1.8 for single angle stiffeners
= 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
(-c) When the greatest shear stress f v in a panel is
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
less than that permitted by eq. (2)(45), this gross area re-
quirement may be reduced proportionately.
(SI Units)
(-d) I n t e r m e d i a t e s t i f f e n e r s r e q u i r e d b y
eq. (2)(45) shall be connected for a total shear transfer,
kips/linear in. (N/linear mm) of single stiffener or pair
of stiffeners, not less than that computed by eq. (47)

where
k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a /h )2], when a /h is less than 1.0
= 5.34 + [4.00/(a /h )2], when a /h is more than 1.0 47
Alternatively, for girders other than hybrid girders

and tapered members, if intermediate stiffeners are pro-
vided and spaced to satisfy the provisions of (3) and if (SI Units)
C v 1, the allowable shear given by eq. (45)19 may be used
in lieu of the value given in eq. (44)
47
45
This shear transfer may be reduced in the same
proportion that the largest computed shear stress f v in
(3) Intermediate Stiffeners the adjacent panels is less than that permitted by
eq. (2)(45). However, bolts and welds in intermediate stif-
(-a) Subject to the limitations of (a), intermediate
feners which are required to transmit to the web an ap-
stiffeners are not required when the ratio h /t is less than
plied concentrated load or reaction shall be
260 and the maximum web shear stress f v is less than that
proportioned for not less than the applied load or reaction.
permitted for F v by eq. (2)(44).
(-b) The spacing of intermediate stiffeners, when (-e) Intermediate stiffness may be stopped short of
stiffeners are required, shall be such that the web shear the tension flange, provided bracing is not needed to
stress will not exceed the value for F v given by eq. transmit a concentrated load or reaction; the weld by
(2)(44) or eq. (2)(45), as applicable, and the ratio a /h which intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall
shall not exceed [260/(h /t)]2 or 3. be terminated not closer than four times nor more than six
(-c) In girders designed on the basis of tension times the web thickness from the near toe of the web to
field action, the spacing between stiffeners at end panels, flange welds. When single stiffeners are used, they shall
at panels containing large holes, and at panels adjacent to be attached to the compression flange, if it consists of a
panels containing large holes shall be such that f v does not rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due to tor-
exceed the value for F v given by eq. (2)(44). sion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to a stif-
(4) Moment of Inertia and Gross Area fener or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be
connected to the compression flange to transmit 1% of
(-a) The moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4), of a pair of
the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only
intermediate stiffeners or a single intermediate stiffener,
of angles.
with reference to an axis in the plane of the web, shall
not be less than (h /50)4. (-f) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web
(-b) The gross area, in.2 (mm 2), of intermediate shall be spaced not more than 12 in. (300 mm) on center.
stiffeners spaced as required for eq. (2)(45) (total area, If intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance be-
when stiffeners are furnished in pairs), shall be not less tween welds shall not be more than 16 times the web
than that computed by eq. (46) thickness, or more than 10 in. (250 mm).
(f) Splices. Groove welded splices in the plate girders
and beams shall develop the full strength of the smaller
46 spliced section; other types of splices in cross sections of
plate girders and in beams shall develop the strength re-
quired by the stresses at the point of splice.
(g) Rotational Restraint at Points of Support. Beams, gir- (-d) The effective net area A e of axially loaded ten-
ders, and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about sion members, where the load is transmitted by bolts
their longitudinal axis at points of support. through some but not all of the crosssectional elements
of the member, shall be computed from the following
NF-3322.7 Simple and Continuous Spans, and Provi- equation:
sion for Expansion.
(a) Design Requirements for Spans
(1) Simple Spans. Beams, girders, and trusses shall or-
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests
dinarily be designed on the basis of simple spans whose
or other recognized criteria, the following values of C t
effective length is equal to the distance between centers
shall be used in computations:
of gravity of the members to which they deliver their
end reactions. (-1) W, M, or S shapes with flange widths not
less than twothirds of the depth, and structural tees cut
(2) Continuous Spans. When designed on the assump-
from these shapes, provided the connection is to the
tion of full or partial end restraint, due to continuous,
flanges and has no fewer than three fasteners per line in
semicontinuous, or cantilever action, the beams, girders,
the direction of applied stress
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and trusses, as well as the sections of the members to

which they connect, shall be designed to carry the shears
and moments so introduced, as well as all other forces,
without exceeding at any point the unit stresses pre- (-2) W, M, or S shapes not meeting the condi-
scribed in NF-3321.1, except that some nonelastic but self tions of (-1), structural tees cut from these shapes, and
limiting deformation of a part of the connection may be all other shapes, including builtup cross sections, pro-
permitted when this is essential to the avoidance of over- vided the connection has not less than three fasteners
stressing of fasteners. per line in the direction of applied stress
(3) Provision for Expansion. Adequate provision shall
be made for expansion and contraction appropriate to
the function of the support structure. (-3) all members whose connections have only
NF-3322.8 Gross and Net Areas. two fasteners per line in the direction of applied stress
(a) Determination of Gross and Net Areas. The gross area
of a member at any point shall be determined by summing
the products of the thickness and the gross width of each When the load is transmitted by welds through
element as measured normal to the axis of the member. some but not all of the crosssectional elements of the
The net area shall be determined by substituting the net member, the effective net area A e shall be computed as
width, computed in accordance with (c), for the gross
width.
(b) Net Area and Effective Net Area. Unless otherwise
specified, tension members shall be designed on the basis where
of net area. Compression members shall be designed on A g = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
the basis of gross area. Beams and girders shall be de-
signed in accordance with NF-3322.3(a). The effective When load is transmitted by transverse welds to
net area of threaded members shall be the tensile stress some but not all of the crosssectional elements of W, M,
area, with the exception that threaded hanger rods shall or S shapes and structural tees cut from these shapes, A e
comply with NF-3412.3. shall be taken as the area of the directly connected
elements.
(c) Calculation of Net Area
When the load is transmitted to a plate by longitu-
(1) Parts With Holes
dinal welds along both edges at the end of the plate, the
(-a) In the case of a chain of holes extending across length of the welds shall not be less than the width of
a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the the plate. The effective net area A e shall be computed as
part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width above.
the sum of the diameters of all the holes in the chain and
adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests
s 2/4g . or other criteria, the following values of U shall be used:
when l > 2w , U = 1.0; when 2w > l > 1.5w , U = 0.87; when
(-b) The critical net area A n of the part is obtained
1.5w > l > w, U = 0.75
from that chain which gives the least net width.
where
(-c) In determining the net area across plug or slot
welds, the weld metal shall not be considered as adding to l = weld length, in. (mm)
the net area. w = plate width (distance between welds), in. (mm)
(-e) Bolted splice and gusset plates, and other con- (-e) Thickness limitations on both eyebars and pin
nection fittings subject to tensile force shall be designed in connected plates may be waived whenever external nuts
accordance with the provisions of NF-3322.1(a) where the are provided so as to tighten pin plates and filler plates
effective net area shall be taken as the actual net area, ex- into snug contact. When the plates are thus contained,
cept that for the purpose of design calculations it shall not the allowable stress in bearing shall be no greater than
be taken as greater than 85% of the gross area. as specified in NF-3322.1(f)(1).
(2) Size of Bolt Holes. In computing net area, the dia-
NF-3322.9 Rectangular Tubular Sections. For elec-
meter of a bolt hole shall be taken as 1/16 in. (1.5 mm)
tric resistance welded rectangular tubular sections, the
greater than the nominal dimension of the hole normal
designer shall use a wall thickness of 0.93 times the nom-
to the direction of applied stress.
inal wall thickness for calculating section properties.
(3) Angles. For angles, the gross width shall be the
sum of the widths of the legs less the thickness. The gage
for holes in opposite legs shall be the sum of the gages NF-3323 Design Requirements for Steel Castings
from the back of angles less the thickness. and Forgings
(4) PinConnected Members NF-3323.1 Allowable Stresses. Allowable stresses for
(-a) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness without steel castings and forgings shall be the same as those pro-
reinforcement at the pinholes.20 They shall have circular vided in NF-3322 with the applicable values for yield
heads in which the periphery of the head beyond the pin- strength of Table Y1, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1.
hole is concentric with the pinhole. The radius of transi-
tion between the circular head and the body of the NF-3324 Design Requirements for Connections
eyebar shall be equal to or greater than the diameter of and Joints
the head. The width of the body of the eyebar shall not ex-
NF-3324.1 General Requirements.
ceed eight times its thickness and the thickness shall not
be less than 1/2 in. (13 mm). The minimum net area beyond (a) Types of Connections Permitted. Structural Connec-
the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be tions of a welded, bolted, or welded and bolted type shall
less than 2/3 of the net area across the pin hole. The thick- be used.
ness may be less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) only if external nuts Types of bolted connections include
are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into (1) Frictiontype connections that are mechanically
snug contact. The diameter of the pin shall not be less than fastened structural connections that use high strength
seveneighths of the width of the body of the eyebar. The bolts (such as SA-325 and SA-490) and are sufficiently
diameter of the pinhole shall not be more than 1/32 in. tightened to reliably produce a high clamping force that
(0.8 mm) greater than the diameter of the pin. For steels prevents slip between faying surfaces. Load is transferred
having a yield stress greater than 70.0 ksi (480 MPa), at the faying surfaces by friction [Figure NF-3324.1(a)(1)].
the diameter of the pinhole shall not exceed five times (2) Bearingtype connections that are mechanically
the plate thickness. fastened structural connections that depend on direct
(-b) In pinconnected plates other than eyebars, shear of the fastener to transfer the load from one con-
the tensile stress on the net area transverse to the axis nected part to another.
of the member shall not exceed the stress allowed in (3) Other connections that are not covered by (1) and
NF-3322.1(a), and the bearing stress on the projected area (2), such as clamps and Ubolts shown in
of the pin shall not exceed the stress allowed in Figure NF-1214-1, are not frictiontype connections and
NF-3322.1(f)(1). The minimum net area beyond the pin- shall meet the requirements of NF-3380, unless otherwise
hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less indicated in the design documents.
than twothirds of the net area across the pinhole. (b) Provision for Eccentric Connections. Axially stressed
(-c) The distance used in calculations, transverse members meeting at a point shall have their gravity axes
to the axis of pinconnected plates or any individual ele- intersect at a point if practicable; if not, provision shall
ment of a builtup member, from the edge of the pinhole be made for bending stresses due to the eccentricity.
to the edge of the member or element shall not exceed 4 (c) Placement of Bolts and Welds. Except as otherwise
times the thickness at the pinhole. For calculation pur- provided, groups of bolts or welds at the ends of any mem-
poses, the distance from the edge of the pinhole to the ber transmitting axial stress into that member shall have
edge of the plate or to the edge of a separated element their centers of gravity on the gravity axis of the member,
of a builtup member at the pinhole, shall not be assumed unless provision is made for the effect of the resulting ec-
to be more than 0.8 times the diameter of the pinhole. centricity. Except in members subject to repeated varia-
(-d) The corners beyond the pinhole may be cut at tion in stress, as stipulated in NF-3330, disposition of
45 deg to the axis of the member, provided the net area fillet welds to balance the forces about the neutral axes
beyond the pinhole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut, for end connections of single angle, double angle, and simi-
is not less than that required beyond the pinhole parallel lar type members is not required. Eccentricity between
to the axis of the member. the gravity axes of such members and the gage lines for
Figure NF-3324.1(a)(1)
Typical FrictionType Connections Using High Strength Bolts
their bolted end connections may be neglected in statically

loaded members, but should be considered in members (SI Units)
subjected to fatigue loading.
NF-3324.2 Connection Design.

(a) Connections for Unrestrained Members
(1) Except as otherwise indicated by the design docu- and a pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite the ten-
ments, connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be sion flange when the thickness of the column flange t f is
designed as flexible and may ordinarily be proportioned less than
for the reaction shears only.
(2) Flexible beam connections shall accommodate
end rotations of unrestrained (simple) beams. To accom-
plish this, inelastic action in the connection is permitted.
(b) Connections for Restrained Members (4) Stiffeners required by the provisions of (2) and
(1) Fasteners or welds for end connections of beams, (3) shall comply with the following criteria:
girders, and trusses shall be designed for the combined ef- (-a) The width of each stiffener plus onehalf the
fect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced by thickness of the column web shall not be less than
the rigidity of the connections. onethird the width of the flange or moment connection
(2) When flanges or moment connection plates for plate delivering the concentrated force.
end connections of beams and girders are welded to the
(-b) The thickness of stiffeners shall not be less
flange of an I or H shaped column, a pair of column web
than t b /2.
stiffeners having a combined crosssectional area A s t not
less than that computed from eq. (48) shall be provided (-c) When the concentrated force delivered occurs
whenever the calculated value of A s t is positive on only one column flange, the stiffener length need not
exceed onehalf the column depth.
48
(-d) The weld joining stiffeners to the column web
shall be sized to carry the force in the stiffener caused by
unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the column.
(3) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2), a stif- (5) The thickness of column webs within the bound-
fener or a pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite aries of rigid connections of two or more members whose
the compression flange when the column web depth clear webs lie in a common plane shall not be less than
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of fillets d c is greater than

shear stress in the bolts is reduced by the factor, 0.4

(SI Units) (t 0.25) [For SI units, use 0.016 (t 6)], where t is
the total thickness of the fillers, up to 3/4 in. (19 mm).
(2) Welded Construction. In welded construction, any
filler 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more in thickness shall extend be-
yond the edges of the splice plate and shall be welded to
where the part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to trans-
d b = the beam depth, in. (mm) mit the splice plate stress, applied at the surface of the fil-
d c = the column depth, in. (mm) ler as an eccentric load. The welds joining the splice plate
M = the algebraic sum of clockwise and counterclock- to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
wise moments, kipft (Nmm), applied on opposite stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing
sides of the connection boundary the filler along the toe of the weld. Any filler less than
1
t m i n = the web thickness, in. (mm) /4 in. (6 mm) thick shall have its edges made flush with
the edges of the splice plate, and the weld size shall be
When the web thickness is less than t m i n doubler the sum of the size necessary to carry the splice plate
plates or longitudinal stiffeners may be provided to rein- stress plus the thickness of the filler plate.
force the column web.
(c) Connections of Tension and Compression Members in NF-3324.4 Joint Combinations.
Trusses. The connections at ends of the tension or com- (a) Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the general
pression member in trusses shall develop the force due types of weld (groove, fillet, plug, or slot) are combined in
to the Design Load but not less than 50% of the effective a single joint, the effective capacity of each shall be sepa-
strength of the member, based upon the kind of stress that rately computed with reference to the axis of the group,
governs the selection of the member. in order to determine the allowable capacity of the
(d) Connections for Compression Members With Bearing combination.
Joints (b) Bolts in Combination With Welds. SA-307 bolts or
(1) For members subjected to compression forces high strength bolts used in bearingtype connections shall
only, which bear on bearing plates, sufficient bolts or not be considered as sharing the stress in combination
welds shall be provided to hold all parts securely in place. with welds. Welds, if used, shall be provided to carry the
(2) For members subjected to compression forces entire stress in the connection. High strength bolts in-
only, which are finished to bear at splices, the splice mate- stalled as a frictiontype connection prior to welding
rial and its bolting or welding shall be arranged to hold all may be considered as sharing the stress with the welds.
parts in line and shall be proportioned for 50% of the com-
NF-3324.5 Design of Welded Joints.
puted stress.
(3) All of the foregoing joints shall be proportioned to (a) Permissible Types of Welded Joints in Linear Supports.
resist any tension that would be developed by design mo- All welded joints in Linear Supports shall be as described
ments acting in conjunction with 75% of the axial com- in NF-3256.1 except that intermittent or lap joints using
pression forces. fillet welds may not be used for the support of Class 1
Components or Class 2 vessels designed to NC3200.
NF-3324.3 Design of Lap Joints and Fillers. The allowable stress limits shall be as defined in (b) and
(a) Lap Joint Design. The minimum amount of lap on lap (c).
joints shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part (b) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits that must
joined but not less than 1 in. (25 mm). Lap joints subjected be satisfied for welds for Design Loadings stated in the De-
to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of both sign Specification shall be as follows:
lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress limits
parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent opening of the
for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed the ap-
joint under maximum loading.
plicable stress value for the base metal being joined, as
(b) Filler Design
specified in NF-3321.1 and Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
(1) Bolted Construction. When bolts carrying com-
puted stress pass through fillers thicker than 1/4 in. (2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
(6 mm), except in frictiontype connections assembled (-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
with highstrength bolts, the fillers shall be extended be- Shear on Effective Throat. The stress limits shall be the
yond the splice material and the filler extension shall be same as those for the base metal, as required by
secured by enough bolts to distribute the total stress in NF-3321.1.
the member uniformly over the combined section of the (-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
member and the filler or an equivalent number of fasten- Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in
ers shall be included in the connection. Fillers between Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
1
/4 in. (6 mm) and 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick, inclusive, need (3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet
not be extended and developed, provided the allowable welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1
Allowable Stress Limits for Class 1 LinearType Support Welds
Base Metal TS Range, Weld Metal Min. TS, ksi
Kind of Stress ksi (MPa) (MPa) [Note (1)] Stress Limits, ksi (MPa)
Tension and compression parallel to axis Same as for base metal
of any full penetration groove weld
Tension normal to effective throat of full Same as allowable tensile stress
penetration groove weld for base metal
Compression normal to effective throat Same as allowable compressive
of full penetration groove weld and stress for base metal
partial penetration groove weld
Shear stress on effective throat of fillet 4560 (310410) 60 (410) 0.30 minimum tensile strength
weld, regardless of direction of 6170 (411480) 70 (480) of weld metal [ksi (MPa)],
application of load; tension normal to 71 80 (481550) 80 (550) except shear stress on base
the axis on the effective throat of a 8190 (551620) 90 (620) metal shall not exceed
partial penetration groove weld and 91100 (621690) 100 (690) 0.40 yield stress of base
shear stress on effective area of a plug 101120 (691830) 120 (830) metal
or slot weld. The given stresses shall
also apply to such welds made with
the specified electrode on steel having
a yield stress greater than that of the
matching base metal.
NOTE:
(1) Weld metal one nominal strength level stronger than shown will be permitted (e.g., E70xx for E60xx applications).
(c) Service Limits, Level A Through D, and Test. The rules (3) Length of Fillet Welds
and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for any (-a) The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the
Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated in the overall length of a fullsize fillet, including returns.
Design Specification are those given in (b) multiplied by
(-b) The minimum effective length of a strength fil-
the appropriate base material stress limit factor given in
let weld shall be not less than four times the nominal size,
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1.
or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to ex-
(d) Fillet Welds ceed onefourth of its effective length.
(1) Minimum Size of Fillet Welds and Partial Penetra- (-c) If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in
tion Welds. Fillet and partial penetration welds shall not be end connections of tension members, the length of each fil-
specified less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) (NF-4427). When fillet or let weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance
partial penetration welds less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) are used between them. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet
to join heavy section members, the designer shall consider welds used in end connections shall not exceed 8 in.
specifying preheat and special requirements for fitup of (200 mm), unless the design otherwise prevents excessive
members to ensure adequate weld deposition. transverse bending in the connection.
(2) Maximum Effective Size of Fillet Welds. The maxi- (4) Effective Throat Thickness of Fillet Welds. The ef-
mum size of a fillet weld that may be assumed in the defective throat thickness of a fillet weld joining members
sign of a connection shall be such that the stresses in the at angles between 60 deg and 135 deg, inclusive
adjacent base material do not exceed the values allowed (Figure NF-4427-1), shall be the shortest distance from
in Tables NF-3324.5(a)-1 and NF-3321.1. The maximum the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld, except that
size that may be used along edges of connected parts shall for fillet welds made by the submerged arc process the ef-
be as stipulated in (-a) and (-b) fective throat thickness shall be taken equal to the leg size
(-a) along edges of material less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) for 3/8 in. (10 mm) and smaller fillet welds, and equal to
thick, the maximum size may be equal to the thickness of the theoretical throat plus 0.11 in. (2.8 mm) for fillet welds
the material over 3/8 in. (10 mm). For fillet welds joining members at
(-b) along edges of material 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more angles less than 60 deg use the rules for partial penetra-
in thickness, the maximum size shall be 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) tion groove welds, (f)(3).
less than the thickness of the material, unless the weld (5) Effective Area of Fillet Welds. The effective area of
is especially designated on the drawings to be built up fillet welds shall be considered as the effective length of
to obtain full throat thickness the weld times the effective throat thickness.
(6) Effective Area of Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. The than 21/4 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of
effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots shall be the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners
computed as specified in (5) for fillet welds using for effec- rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part
tive length the length of center line of the weld through the containing it, except for those ends which extend to the
center of the plane through the throat. However, in the edge of the part.
case of overlapping fillets the effective area shall not ex- (5) Spacing of Slot Welds. The minimum spacing of
ceed the nominal crosssectional area of the hole or slot lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length
in the plane of the faying surface.
shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum cen-
(7) Intermittent Fillet Welds. Intermittent fillet welds
ter to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line
may be used to transfer calculated stresses across a joint
shall be two times the length of the slot.
or faying surface, when the strength required is less than
that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest (6) Thickness of Plug and Slot Welds. The thickness of
permitted size, and to join elements of builtup members. plug and slot welds in material 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less in
The effective length of any segment of intermittent fillet thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material.
welding shall not be less than four times the weld size with In material over 5/8 in. (16 mm) in thickness, it shall be
a minimum of 11/2 in. (38 mm). at least onehalf the thickness of the material but not less
(8) End Returns to Fillet Welds. Side or end fillet welds than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
terminating at ends or sides, respectively, of parts or (7) Effective Shearing Area of Plug and Slot Welds. The
members shall, when required by the designer, be re- effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be con-
turned continuously around the corners for a distance sidered as the nominal crosssectional area of the hole or
not less than twice the nominal size of the weld. This pro- slot in the plane of the faying surface.
vision shall apply to side and top fillet welds connecting
(f) Full Penetration and Partial Penetration Joints. The
brackets, beam seats, and similar connections, on the
effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied
plane about which bending moments are computed. For
by the effective throat thickness.
framing angles and simple endplate connections which
depend upon flexibility of the outstanding legs for connec- (1) The effective weld length for any groove weld,
tion flexibility, end returns shall not exceed four times the square or skewed, shall be the length of weld throughout
nominal size of the weld. Fillet welds which occur on op- which the correct proportioned cross section exists. In a
posite sides of a common plane shall be interrupted at curved weld it shall be its true length measured along
the corner common to both welds. End returns, when re- its curvature.
quired by the designer, shall be indicated on the drawings. (2) The effective throat thickness of a full penetration
(9) Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. Fillet welds in holes groove weld which shall conform to the requirements of
or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to NF-4000 shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined.
prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts and No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.
to join elements of builtup members. Such fillet welds
(3) The effective throat of partial penetration groove
may overlap, subject to the provisions of (6). Fillet welds
welds is dependent upon the type of groove.
in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or slot
welds. (-a) For square, U, and J groove welds, the effective
(e) Plug and Slot Welds. throat is equal to the depth of preparations.
(1) Use of Plug and Slot Welds. Plug and slot welds (-b) For V and bevel groove welds with an included
may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to prevent angle at the root equal to or greater than 60 deg, the effec-
buckling of lapped parts and to join component parts of tive throat shall be the minimum distance from the root to
builtup members. the face of the weld.
(2) Diameter of Holes for Plug Welds. The diameter of (-c) For V and bevel groove welds with an included
the holes for a plug weld shall be not less than the thick- angle at the root less than 60 deg but equal to or greater
ness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded than 45 deg, the effective throat shall be the minimum dis-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to the next greater odd 1/16 in. (1.5 mm), nor greater than tance from the root to the face of the weld less 1/8 in.
the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 21/4 times the (3 mm).
thickness of the weld metal.
(3) Spacing of Plug Welds. The minimum centerto (-d) For V and bevel groove welds, with an in-
center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the dia- cluded angle at the root less than 45 deg but equal to or
meter of the hole. greater than 30 deg, the effective throat shall be the mini-
(4) Length of Slot Welds. The length of slot for a slot mum distance from the root to the face of the weld less
1
weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. /8 in. (3 mm) and multiplied by 0.75. The required effec-
The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of tive throat must be specified on the drawing.
the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded to the (-e) For V and bevel groove welds, angles less than
next greater odd 1/16 in. (1.5 mm), nor shall it be greater 30 deg at the root are not allowed.
(-f) For flare bevel groove welds, when filled flush For austenitic steels
to the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.31 times the
outside radius of the curved section forming the groove.
For formed rectangular tubing, the outside radius may
be considered as two times the wall thickness.
The applied load shall be the sum of the external load
(-g) For flare V groove welds, when filled flush to and any tension resulting from prying action produced
the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.5 (except use by deformation of the connected parts.
0.375 for GMAW when R 1/2 in. (13 mm) times the out-
side radius when the outside radius is less than 1 in. (2) Shearing Stress Only
(25 mm). For flare bevel groove welds, the effective throat (-a) BearingType Joints
shall be 0.312 times the outside radius. (-1) Threads Excluded From Shear Planes. The al-
(-h) Consideration of Lamellar Tearing. Welded lowable shear F v b in bolts and threaded parts loaded in di-
joint configurations causing significant throughthickness rect shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual shear stress
tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during fabrica- area available (applicable to the total nominal bolt area
tion and/or service on rolled product forms should be in the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
avoided. However, if this type of construction is used, For ferritic steels
the designer should consider one or several of the follow-
ing factors that may reduce the susceptibility of the joint
to experience lamellar tearing and provide documenta-
tion, including fabrication requirements, in the Design
Output Documents: For austenitic steels
(-1) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent
practical.
(-2) Select materials that are resistant to lamel-
lar tearing. (-2) Threads Not Excluded From Shear Planes.
(-3) Invoke any of the special fabrication re- The allowable shear stress F v b in bolts and threaded parts
quirements of NF-4441. loaded in direct shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual
shear stress area available (applicable to the total bolt root
NF-3324.6 Design Requirements for Bolted Joints.
area in the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
The rules and stress limits for bolting shall be as given
in this paragraph. The stress limits which must be satisfied For ferritic steels
for any Design, Levels A through D, and Test Loadings,
shall be those given in this paragraph, multiplied by the
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
appropriate stress limit factors given in
Table NF-3225.2-1 for the particular Loading specified in For austenitic steels
the Design Specification (NCA3250). This product shall
not exceed the yield strength of the material at
temperature.
(a) Allowable Stresses. Allowable tensile, shearing, and
bearing stresses in bolts and threaded parts shall be as gi- (3) Combined Tensile and Shear Stresses
ven in the paragraphs below. All allowables are expressed (-a) BearingType Joints. Bolts subjected to com-
in ksi (MPa) acting on the actual bolt area available in the bined shear and tension shall be so proportioned that
shear planes of the connected parts. All are expressed in either the shear or the tensile stress, ksi (MPa) of actual
terms of the ultimate tensile strength at temperature crosssectional area, shall not exceed the value derived
(Table U, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1). The shear capacity from the ellipse equation below when the corresponding
of bolts is directly proportional to the shear area available computed tensile or shearing stress is substituted
in the shear planes. Shear strength is unaffected by shear
plane location.
(1) Tensile Stress Only. Bolts loaded in direct tension
shall be so proportioned that their average tensile stress
F t b , computed on the basis of the actual tensile stress area The allowable tensile and shear stress values shall
available (independent of any initial tightening force), be those derived from the equations given in (1) and (2).
shall not exceed (-b) FrictionType Joints. A bolt in a connection de-
For ferritic steels signed as a frictiontype joint is not subjected to shear
(provided the joint does not slip into bearing); it experi-
ences tension only. Frictiontype joints shall be designed
as given in (4).
(4) Slip Resistance FrictionType Joints. The maxi-

Table NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1
mum slip resistance to which a frictiontype joint may
Minimum Edge Distances
be designed shall not exceed the value of P s , calculated
in the following equation [see Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1]: Minimum Edge Distance for Punched, Reamed,
or Drilled Holes, in. (mm)
At Rolled Edges of Plates,
Bolt Diameter, Shapes, or Bars, or Gas
If the joint clamping force will be reduced by any di- in. (mm) At Sheared Edges Cut Edges [Note (1)]
rect tension load on the joint, the T i value shall be reduced 1 7 3
/2 (12.7) /8 (22.2) /4 (19.1)
by an equivalent amount before substituting in the above 5
/8 (15.9) 11/8 (28.6) 7
/8 (22.2)
equation. SA-307 and austenitic steel bolting shall not be 3
/4 (19.1) 11/4 (31.8) 1 (25.4)
used for frictiontype joints. 7
/8 (22.2) 11/2 (38.1) [Note (2)] 11/8 (28.6)
(5) Bearing Stress. Allowable bearing stress on the 1 (25.4) 13/4 (44.5) [Note (2)] 11/4 (31.8)
projected area of bolts in bearing type connections shall be 11/8 (28.6) 2 (50.8) 11/2 (38.1)
11/4 (31.8) 21/4 (57.2) 15/8 (41.3)
>11/4 (31.8) 13/4 diam. 11/4 diam.
NOTES:
(b) Minimum Edge Distance (1) All edge distances in this column may be reduced 1/8 in.
(1) Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Load. In both (3.2 mm) when the hole is at the point where stress does
not exceed 25% of the maximum allowed stress in the
bearing and frictiontype joints the minimum distance
element.
from the center of the end bolt in a connection to that edge (2) These may be 11/4 in. (32 mm) at the ends of beam connec-
of the connected part toward which the load is directed tion angles.
shall be determined in accordance with either (-a) or (-b).
(-a) The edge distance shall satisfy all of the
following:
For unpainted, builtup members made of weathering
(-1) L /d 0.5 + 1.43 (f p /S u )
steel which will be exposed to atmospheric corrosion,
(-2) L /d 1.2
the spacing of fasteners connecting a plate and a shape
(-3) f p /S u 1.5
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or twoplate components in contact shall not exceed 14

where
times the thickness of the thinnest part nor 7 in.
f p = P/d t (175 mm), and the maximum edge distance shall not ex-
ceed eight times the thickness of the thinnest part, or
(-b) The edge distance shall be as shown in 5 in. (125 mm).
Table NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1.
(c) Maximum Edge Distance. The maximum distance (d) Minimum Spacing. The distance between centers of
from the center of any rivet or bolt to the nearest edge standard, oversized, or slotted fastener holes shall be
of parts in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the not less than three times the nominal diameter of the bolt.
connected part under consideration, but shall not exceed Along a line of transmitted force, the distance between
6 in. (150 mm). Bolted joints in unpainted steel exposed centers of holes shall be not less than the following:
to atmospheric corrosion require special limitations on
pitch and edge distance.
(e) Effective Bearing Area. The effective bearing area of
bolts shall be the diameter multiplied by the length in
Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 bearing, except that for countersunk bolts onehalf the
Effective Slip Coefficient Versus Surface depth of the countersink shall be deducted.
Condition (f) Long Grips. SA-307 bolts, which carry calculated
Slip Coefficient, stress and the grip of which exceeds five diameters, shall
Surface Condition ks have their number increased 1% for each additional
1
Clean mill scale 0.25 /16 in. (1.5 mm) in the grip.
Gritblasted carbon and low alloy 0.41 (g) Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts shall be designed to pro-
highstrength steel vide resistance to all conditions of tension and shear at the
Gritblasted, heattreated steel 0.25 bases of columns, including the net tensile components of
Hot dip galvanized wire, brushed, 0.31 any bending moments which may result from fixation or
scored, or blasted partial fixation of columns.
Blast cleaned, zinc rich paint 0.31
Blast cleaned, zinc silicate paint 0.45
NF-3324.7 Design Requirements for Column Bases.
Proper provision shall be made to transfer the column
loads and moments, if any, to the footings and foundations.
NF-3330 HIGH CYCLE FATIGUE DESIGN FOR NF-3332.5 Provisions for Mechanical Fasteners.
CLASS 1 Range in tensile stress in properly tightened ASTM A325
NF-3331 Introduction or ASTM A490 bolts need not be considered, but the max-
imum computed stress, including prying action, shall not
NF-3331.1 Scope. Members and their connections, exceed the values given in NF-3332.4 subject to the follow-
subject to a number of cycles (>20,000) of fatigue loading ing stipulations:
resulting in damage as defined in NF-3331.2, shall be pro-
portioned to satisfy the stress range limitations provided (a) Connections subject to more than 20,000 cycles, but
therein. not more than 500,000 cycles of direct tension may be de-
NF-3331.2 Definitions. High cycle fatigue, as used in signed for the stress produced by the sum of applied and
this Subsubarticle, is defined as the damage that may re- prying loads if the prying load does not exceed 10% of the
sult in fracture after a sufficient number of fluctuations externally applied load. If the prying force exceeds 10%,
of stress. Stress range is defined as the numerical sum of the allowable tensile stress given in NF-3324.6(a)(1) shall
maximum repeated tensile and compressive stresses or be reduced 40%, applicable to the external load alone.
the sum of maximum shearing stresses of opposite direc-
tion at a given point, resulting from differing arrange- (b) Connections subject to more than 500,000 cycles of
ments of live load. direct tension may be designed for the stress produced by
the sum of applied and prying loads if the prying load does
NF-3332 Design Requirements not exceed 5% of the externally applied load. If the prying
NF-3332.1 Design Considerations. In the design of force exceeds 5%, the allowable tensile stress given in
members and connections subject to repeated variation NF-3324.6(a)(1) shall be reduced 50%, applicable to the
of live load stress, consideration shall be given to the num- external load alone. The use of other bolts and threaded
ber of stress cycles, the expected range of stress, and the parts subject to tensile fatigue loading is not recom-
type and location of member or detail. mended. Bolts and threaded parts subjected to cyclic load-
ing in shear may be designed for the bearingtype shear
NF-3332.2 Classification of Loading Conditions. stresses given in NF-3324.6(a)(2) insofar as the fatigue
Loading conditions shall be classified as shown in strength of the fasteners is concerned.
Table NF-3332.2-1.
NF-3332.3 Stress Categories. Stress categories for
use in establishing the maximum range of stress in rela-
tion to the type of member or part, material, and location
shall be as stipulated in Table NF-3332.3-1. For illustra-
tions of the members and parts, see Figure NF-3332.3-1. NF-3340 LIMIT ANALYSIS DESIGN FOR CLASS 1
NF-3332.4 Allowable Stresses. The maximum stress NF-3341 Introduction
shall not exceed the basic allowable stress permitted by
NF-3341.1 Scope.
NF-3322 and the maximum range of stress shall not ex-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ceed that given in Table NF-3332.4-1. (a) Subject to the limitation of this Subsubarticle, simple
or continuous beams, rigid frames, and similar portions of
structures rigidly constructed so as to be continuous over
at least one interior support21 may be proportioned on the
Table NF-3332.2-1
basis of plastic design, namely, on the basis of low bound
Classification of Loading Conditions
collapse load. This strength, as determined by rational
Loading Number of Loading Cycles analysis, shall not be less than that required to support a
Condition From To factored load equal to 1.7 times those of the level A and
1 20,000 [Note (1)] 100,000 [Note (2)] Level B Service Limits or 1.3 times that of the Level C Ser-
2 100,000 500,000 [Note (3)] vice Limits.
3 500,000 2,000,000 [Note (4)]
4 >2,000,000
(b) Connections joining a portion of a structure de-
NOTES: signed on the basis of plastic behavior with a portion
(1) Approximately equivalent to two applications every day not so designed need be no more rigid than ordinary seat
for 25 years. and cap angle or ordinary web connections.
(2) Approximately equivalent to ten applications every day
for 25 years. (c) When plastic design is used as the basis for propor-
(3) Approximately equivalent to 50 applications every day
tioning continuous beams and structural frames, the pro-
for 25 years.
(4) Approximately equivalent to 200 applications every day visions relating to allowable working stress contained in
for 25 years. NF-3320 are waived. Except as modified by these rules,
all other provisions of NF-3320 shall govern.
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories
Illustrative Example
Kind of [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
Stress Stress Category (See (See
Situation [Note (1)] Table NF-3332.4-1) Figure NF-3332.3-1)
General Condition Plain material
Base metal with rolled or cleaned surfaces T or Rev. A (1), (2)
General Condition Built-up members
Base metal and weld metal in members, without T or Rev. B (3) through (6)
attachments, built up plates or shapes connected by
continuous full or partial penetration groove welds, or
continuous fillet welds parallel to the direction of
applied stress
Base metal in members without attachments, builtup T or Rev. B (3) through (6)
plates or shapes connected by continuous
fullpenetration groove welds or by continuous fillet
welds parallel to the direction of applied stress
Calculated flexural stress f b in base metal at toe of welds T or Rev. C (7)
on girder webs or flanges adjacent to welded transverse
stiffeners
Base metal at ends of partial length welded cover plates
narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends,
with or without welds across the ends or wider than
flange with welds across the ends
Flange thickness 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E (5)
Flange thickness > 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E (5)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Base metal at end of partial length welded cover plates E (5)

wider than the flange without welds across the ends
General Condition Mechanically fastened connections
Base metal at gross section of highstrength bolted T or Rev. B (8)
slipcritical connections, except axially loaded joints
which induce outofplane bending in connected
material
Base metal at net section of other mechanically fastened T or Rev. D (8), (9)
joints [Note (3)]
Base metal at net section of fully tensioned highstrength, T or Rev. B (8), (9)
boltedbearing connections
General Condition Fillet welded connections
Base metal at intermittent fillet welds T or Rev. E
Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with
filletwelded end connections. Welds shall be disposed
about the axis of the member so as to balance weld
stresses
b 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (17), (18)
b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (17), (18)
Base metal at members connected with transverse fillet
welds
b 1/2 in. (13 mm) (20), (21)
T or Rev. C [Note (4)]
b > 1/2 in. (13 mm) (20), (21)
General Condition Fillet welds
Weld metal of continuous or intermittent longitudinal or S F [Note (4)] (15), (17), (18), (20), (21)
transverse fillet welds
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories (Cont'd)
General Condition Groove welds
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. B (10)
welded splices of parts of similar cross section ground
flush, with grinding in the direction of applied stress
and with weld soundness established by radiographic
or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. B (12), (13)
welded splices at transitions in width or thickness, with
welds ground to provide slopes no steeper than 1 to
21/2, with grinding in the direction of applied stress, and
with weld soundness established by radiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. C (10) through (13)
welded splices, with or without transitions having
slopes no greater than 1 to 21/2, when reinforcement is
not removed and with weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with the requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
General Condition Partial penetration groove welds
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Weld metal of partial penetration transverse groove T or Rev. F [Note (4)] (16)
welds, based on effective throat area of the weld or
welds
General Condition Plug or slot welds
Base metal at plug or slot welds T or Rev. E (27)
Shear on plug or slot welds S F (27)
General Condition Attachments
Base metal at details attached by fullpenetration groove
welds subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth and for transverse
loading, the weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
Longitudinal loading
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
24 in. (600 mm) > R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal
thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal
thickness and reinforcement not removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal
thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories (Cont'd)
General Condition Attachments (Cont'd)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal
thickness and reinforcement not removed
all R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading
R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (19)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at detail attached by fullpenetration groove
welds subject to longitudinal loading
2 < a < 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) T or Rev. D (15)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15)
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or
partialpenetration groove welds subject to longitudinal
loading
a 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. C (15), (23) through (26)
2 in. (50 mm) < a 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) T or Rev. D (15), (23), (24), (26)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15), (23), (24), (26)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15), (23), (24), (26)
Base metal attached by fillet welds or partialpenetration
groove welds subjected to longitudinal loading when
the weld termination embodies a transition radius with
the weld termination ground smooth:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Filletwelded attachments where the weld termination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground
smooth, and main material subject to longitudinal
loading:
Detail base metal for transverse loading:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at studtype shear connector attached by fillet T or Rev. C (22)
weld or automatic end weld
Shear stress on nominal area of studtype shear S F
connectors
NOTES:
(1) T signifies range in tensile stress only; Rev. signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; S signifies range
in shear, including shear stress reversal.
(2) These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
(3) When stress reversal is involved, use of SA-307 bolts is not recommended.
(4) Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial penetration and transverse fillet welds is a function of the effective throat,
depth of penetration and plate thickness. See Frank and Fisher, Fatigue Strength of Fillet Welded Cruciform Joints, Journal of
the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 105, No. 519, 1979.
Figure NF-3332.3-1
Illustrative Examples
(1)
(8)
(2)
(3)
(9)
Groove or fillet weld
(4) (10)
Plate as shown
or wider than B E or E' Category
flange (11)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(13)
(7)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-3332.3-1
Illustrative Examples (Cont'd)
Groove weld
(14) (21)
(15) a
(22)
(16)
b (avg.)
(23)
b = thickness
(17) a
b
(18) (24)
a
b
Groove or fillet weld
(19)
(25)
a a
(26)
b
(20) b
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(27)
Table NF-3332.4-1
Allowable Stress Ranges
Allowable Range of Stress, F s r , ksi (MPa)
Stress Category Used in Loading Condition 1, Loading Condition 2, Loading Condition 3, Loading Condition 4,
Table NF-3332.3-1 Fsr1 Fsr2 Fsr3 Fsr4
A 63 (430) 37 (255) 24 (165) 24 (165)
B 49 (340) 29 (200) 18 (125) 16 (110)
B 39 (270) 23 (160) 15 (100) 12 (85)
C 35 (240) 21 (145) 13 (90) 10 (70) [Note (1)]
D 28 (195) 16 (110) 10 (70) 7 (50)
E 22 (150) 13 (90) 8 (55) 5 (35)
E 16 (110) 9 (60) 6 (40) 3 (20)
F 15 (100) 12 (85) 9 (60) 8 (55)
NOTE:
(1) Flexural stress range of 12 ksi (83 MPa) permitted at toe of stiffener welds on webs or flanges.
NF-3342 Design Requirements

(SI Units)
NF-3342.1 General Design Requirements.
(a) Shear. Unless reinforced by diagonal stiffeners or a
2
doubler plate, the webs of columns, beams, and girders, in-
cluding areas within the boundaries of the connections,
shall be so proportioned that
1
when
where V u is the shear, kips (N), that would be produced by

the required factored loading.
(b) Combined Loads. When the interaction method of
calculation (Section III Appendices, A9000) is used, mem-
bers shall be so proportioned that the interaction of fac-
tored loads at a section shall satisfy the interaction (U.S. Customary Units)
equations of Table A9210(d)1 (Section III Appendices),
except that columns subjected to combined bending and
compression shall be governed by the requirements of 3
NF-3342.2(b)(3).
(c) DepthThickness Ratio of Webs. The depththickness
ratio of webs of members subjected to plastic bending
shall not exceed the value given by eqs. (2) and (3), as when
applicable
(SI Units)
3
when
when
(3) Members subject to combined axial load and

bending moment, including moment resulting in second-
ary stress, shall be proportioned so as to satisfy the follow-
(d) Web Crippling. Web stiffeners are required on a ing interaction equations:
member at a point of load application where a plastic
hinge would form. At points on a member where the con- 6
centrated load delivered by the flanges of a member fram-
ing into it would produce web crippling opposite the
compression flange or high tensile stress in the tension 7
flange, web stiffeners are required in accordance with
the provisions of NF-3324.2(b).
where
(e) WidthThickness Ratios of Flanges
P e = 1.92 A F e , where F e is defined in NF-3322.1(e)
(1) The widththickness ratio for flanges of rolled W
C m = coefficient defined in NF-3322.1(e)
shapes and similar builtup single web shapes that would
be subjected to compression involving hinge rotation un- The righthand side of eq. (7) may be replaced by 1.5
der ultimate loading shall not exceed the following values: when it can be shown that the bending moment results
only in secondary stress.
(4) For columns braced in the weak direction
Sy b f /2t f
36 (248) 8.5
42 (290) 8.0 (5) For columns unbraced in the weak direction
45 (310) 7.4
50 (345) 7.0 (U.S. Customary Units)
55 (380) 6.6
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
60 (413) 6.3
65 (448) 6.0 8
(SI Units)
The thickness of sloping flanges may be taken as their
average thickness. 8
(2) The widththickness ratio of similarly com-
pressed flange plates in box sections and cover plates shall
(c) Basis for Maximum Strength Determination. For one
not exceed . For this purpose the or two story frames, the maximum strength may be deter-
width of a cover plate shall be taken as the distance be- mined by a routine plastic analysis procedure, and the
tween longitudinal lines of connecting high strength bolts frame instability effect P may be ignored. For braced
or welds. multistory frames, provisions should be made to include
NF-3342.2 Specific Design Requirements. the frame instability effect in the design of the bracing sys-
(a) Beams. The maximum bending strength of a flexural tem and frame members. For unbraced multistory frames,
member shall be the frame instability effect should be included directly in
the calculations for maximum strength. The vertical bra-
4 cing system for a plastically designed braced multistory
frame shall be shown to be adequate, as determined by
(b) Columns a rational analysis, to prevent buckling of the structure un-
(1) In the plane of bending of columns which would der factored gravity load, and maintain the lateral stability
develop a plastic hinge at ultimate loading, the slender- of the structure, including consideration of the overturn-
ness ratio l/r shall not exceed C c defined in NF-3322.1(c). ing effects of drift, under factored horizontal and gravity
(2) The maximum strength of an axially loaded com- loads.
pression member shall be taken as (1) Stability of Braced Frames. The vertical bracing
5
system may be considered to function together with in-
plane shearresisting exterior and interior walls, floor
where A is the gross area of the member, and F a , as slabs, and roof decks, if these walls, slabs, and decks are
defined by eq. NF-3322.1(c)(1)(-a)(4) , is based upon the secured to the structural frames. The columns, girders,
applicable slenderness ratio. beams, and diagonal members, when used as the vertical
bracing systems, may be considered to comprise a cantile-

ver, simply connected truss in the analysis for frame buck-
ling and lateral stability. Axial deformation of all members
in the vertical bracing system shall be included in the lat- where
eral stability analysis. The axial force in these members, M/Mp = the end moment ratio, positive when the seg-
caused by factored horizontal and gravity loads, shall ment is bent in reverse curvature and negative
not exceed 0.85P y , where P y is the product of yield stress when bent in single curvature
times area of the member. Girders and beams included in
the vertical bracing system of a braced multistory frame (2) The provisions of (1) need not apply in the region
shall be proportioned for axial force and moment caused of the last hinge to form, in the failure mechanism as-
by the concurrent factored horizontal and gravity loads, sumed as the basis for proportioning a given member,
in accordance with eq. (b)(2)(5) with P c r taken as the nor in members oriented with their weak axis normal to
maximum axial strength of the beam, based on the actual the plane of bending. However, in the region of the last
slenderness ratio between braced points in the plane of hinge to form and in regions not adjacent to a
bending. plastic hinge, the maximum distance between points
(2) Stability of Unbraced Frames. The strength of an of lateral support shall be such as to satisfy the require-
unbraced multistory frame shall be determined by a ra- ments of eq. NF-3322.1(d)(5)(-b)(17),
tional analysis which includes the effects of frame instabil- e q . N F - 3 3 2 2 . 1 ( d ) ( 5 ) ( - b ) ( 1 8 ) ,
ity and column axial deformation. Such a frame shall be eq. NF-3322.1(d)(5)(-b)(19) , eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(20) or
designed to be stable under the following conditions: eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(21) . For this case, the value of f a
and f b shall be computed from the moment and axial force
(-a) factored gravity loads at factored loading, divided by the applicable load factor.
(-b) factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads (3) Members built into a masonry wall and having
The axial force in the column at factored load levels their web perpendicular to this wall can be assumed to
shall not exceed 0.75P y . be laterally supported with respect to their weak axis of
(d) Lateral Bracing bending.
(e) Connections
(1) Members shall be adequately braced to resist lat-
(1) General Requirements. All connections, the rigidity
eral and torsional displacements at the plastic hinge loca-
of which is essential to the continuity assumed as the basis
tions associated with the failure mechanism. The laterally
for the analysis, shall be capable of resisting the moments,
unsupported distance l c r from such braced hinge loca-
shears, and axial loads to which they would be subjected
tions to similarly braced adjacent points on the member
by the full factored loading, or any probable partial distri-
or frame shall not exceed the value determined from eq.
bution thereof.
(9) or eq. (10), as applicable
(2) C o r n e r C o n n e c t i o n s . C o r n e r c o n n e c t i o n s
(haunches) that are tapered or curved for architectural
reasons shall be so proportioned that the full plastic bend-
9 ing strength of the section adjacent to the connection can
be developed, if required.
(3) Stiffeners. Stiffeners shall be used, as required, to
(SI Units) preserve the flange continuity of interrupted members
at their junction with other members in a continuous
9 frame. Such stiffeners shall be placed in pairs on opposite
sides of the web of the member which extends continu-
when
ously through the joint.
(4) Stress in Bolts and Welds. High strength bolts,
SA-307 bolts, and welds shall be proportioned to resist
or the forces produced at factored load, using stresses equal
to 1.7 times those given in NF-3324.6(a) for bolts and
(U.S. Customary Units) Table NF-3324.5(a)-1 for welds. In general, groove welds
are preferable to fillet welds, but their use is not
10 mandatory.
(5) Joints With Painted Contact Surfaces. High
strength bolts may be used in joints having painted con-
(SI Units)
tact surfaces when these joints are of such size that the slip
10 required to produce bearing would not interfere with the
formation, at factored loading, of the plastic hinges as-
when sumed in the design.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,
NF-3350 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 AND NF-3382.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
MC paragraph are defined as follows:
The design by analysis of Class 2 and MC supports shall F a l l = allowable value for the type of stress in
be in accordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340. NF-3310, ksi (MPa)
Kl = load rating coefficient for supports in
NF-3360 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 compression
The design by analysis of Class 3 supports shall be in ac- Su ( a c t ) = actual tensile strength of the material used in
cordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340. the part or support which had reached ultimate
capacity during the test, ksi (MPa)
NF-3370 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS Sy ( a c t ) = actual yield strength of the material used in the
Supports of all types may be designed by experimental part or support which yielded during the test,
stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II of Section ksi (MPa)
III Appendices. T L u = support test load at which a substantial in-
crease in load displacement results in zero or
NF-3380 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING negative increase in actual support load
NF-3381 Procedure for Load Rating T L y = support test load at or below yield
The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing a NF-3382.2 LinearType Supports. The load ratings 13
total load on one or more duplicate fullsize samples for a for LinearType Supports for the Service Loadings shall
support equal to or less than the load under which the be determined by the following equations:
support fails to perform its required function. Fullsize Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values)
samples composed of various parts may have each part
or a number of parts load rated provided that all parts
in the load path are either load rated or otherwise quali- 1
fied per NF-3300 or by experimental stress analysis. When
parts are connected by bolting or welding, the connection
shall be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or
NF-3226. Should more than one part be load rated in a sin- 2
gle load test, then the load rating equations of NF-3380
shall be evaluated for each part using the parts S y(act)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and Su(act) values. The part having the lowest load rating Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values)
shall establish the load rating for the combination of parts.
A single test sample is permitted, but in that case, the load
ratings shall be decreased by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall 3
be run on a statistically significant number of samples.
The permissible types of welded joints shall be as per-
mitted for the specific class of construction in
NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, NF-3266, and NF-3324. The re-
4
quirements of NF-3324.5(b) for size of fillet and partial
penetration welds do not apply, provided the fullsize
sample is fabricated for testing using the minimum weld
Level C Limits (lower of the two values)
stipulated in the Design Drawings. Bolted joints in the test
sample shall be made up using the lowest strength bolt
material and minimum edge distance allowed by the 5
specification.
NF-3382 Load Ratings in Relation to Design

Service and Test Loadings
6
The load rating for Design Loadings shall be determined
in accordance with the requirements for Service Level A
limits. The load ratings for Service Loadings for which Le-
vel A, B, or C Limits have been designated shall be deter- NF-3382.3 Supports Loaded in Compression. The 13
mined by means of the equations in the following load rating for the supports loaded in compression shall
subparagraphs. For Level D Limits, see Appendix F of Sec- be determined for Service Level A, B, and C by the methods
tion III Appendices. The load rating for Test Loadings shall of NF-3382.2. In addition, for cases where buckling gov-
be determined in accordance with the requirements for erns, T L u shall be corrected for the ratio of Youngs Mod-
Service Level B limits. ulus at the Design Temperature to Youngs Modulus at the
test temperature. The load rating shall be determined by NF-3411.1 Standard Supports Used as Component
the following equations: Supports. Standard Supports may be used as component
Design and Level A Limits supports, as defined in NF-3500.
7 NF-3411.2 Standard Supports Used as Piping Sup-

ports. Standard Supports may be used as piping supports,
Test and Level B Limits as defined in NF-3600.
8
NF-3411.3 Loads.
Level C Limits (a) Standard Supports shall be capable of carrying all
concurrently acting loads listed in NF-3111 and stipulated
9
in the Design Specification. The supports shall be designed
to provide the required supporting effort and to permit
the designed piping or component movement.
(b) Spring supports shall be capable of exerting a sup-
porting force equal to the load, as determined by weight
balance calculations, plus the weight of all hanger parts
such as clamps and rods that will be supported by a spring
at the point of attachment to a pressure retaining compo-
NF-3382.4 Alternate Load Rating Method Using T L y nent or to an integral attachment.
or T L u Test Results Only. Either T L y or T L u test results (1) The design shall be such as to prevent complete
may be used to establish a support load rating provided release of the piping or component load in the event of
the load rating as determined by the method of spring failure or misalignment.
NF-3382.2 or NF-3382.3 is modified as follows:
(2) When springs are to be enclosed in spaces where
(a) For load rating based on T L y test results only
high ambient temperatures occur, the spring material
(1) for supports constructed of materials having defi-
shall be such that the spring constants will not be signifi-
nitely determinable yield points and specified minimum
S y /S u ratios not greater than 0.625, the load rating shall cantly changed at the temperature to be experienced.
be multiplied by 0.83. If Sy(act) of the material is not known, (c) Snubbers and dampers shall meet the requirements
150% of the material specified minimum yield strength of (a), (c)(1), and (c)(2).
shall be assumed as the S y /Sy(act) in place of multiplier (1) T h e f o l l o w i n g o c c a s i o n a l l o a d s s h a l l b e
0.83 considered:
(2) for supports constructed of carbon steel with spe-
(-a) seismic inertial
cified minimum tensile strengths of not over 70,000 psi
(480 MPa), S y ( a c t ) shall be increased by 5,000 psi (-b) seismic anchor displacement
(34 MPa) prior to determining the load rating (-c) hydraulic transient loads resulting from, but
(3) for all other materials the determined load rating not limited to, water hammer, steam hammer, pump start-
shall be multiplied by 0.67 up, pump shutdown, and safety and safety relief valve dis-
For supports loaded in compression, a T L u test shall be charges, as specified in the Design Specification
performed with the compressive load rating determined (2) Thermal Expansion and Thermal Anchor Displace-
in accordance with NF-3382.3. ment. The snubber and damper shall not resist the effects
(b) For load rating based on TL u test results, the deter- of thermal growth of the component, the piping system, or
mined load rating shall be multiplied by 0.50. the anchorage to the degree where it imposes a significant
load or stress on the piping or component.
NF-3400 DESIGN RULES FOR STANDARD
SUPPORTS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3412 Standard Support Items

NF-3410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The following requirements apply in addition to the re- NF-3412.1 Constant Support Spring Hangers. Con-
quirements of NF-3100, NF-3200, and NF-3300. stant support spring hangers may be used to support pip-
ing or components at those locations requiring a
NF-3411 General Design Requirements substantially uniform supporting force throughout the tra-
Standard Supports (NF-1214) shall conform to the de- vel range but which, while subject to thermal movement,
sign considerations of NF-3120, the design rules of cannot tolerate appreciable variability of the supporting
NF-3200 or NF-3300, and the following additional force. They shall have a mean variability (deviation), in-
requirements. cluding friction, of no more than 6% throughout the travel
range. Deviation is the sum of kinematic friction and man- (c) The Design Specification shall contain, as a mini-
ufacturing tolerance factors. Determination of deviation is mum, the following:
by load test machine and is calculated as follows: (1) the Design Loadings for loading conditions and
transients, and combinations of loadings for which the
snubber is designed to accommodate
(2) r e q u i r e d f o r c e , t i m e , a n d d i s p l a c e m e n t
relationship
(3) the environmental conditions that the snubber
will be exposed to, such as
(-a) temperature
NF-3412.2 Variable Support Spring Hangers. Vari- (-b) irradiation
able support spring hangers may be used to support pip- (-c) corrosive atmosphere
ing or components at those locations subject to vertical (-d) moisture
movement due to temperature differences. The variability (-e) airborne particles
factor of the supporting force is calculated by the follow- (4) consideration of material characteristics, such as
ing equation: (-a) compatibility
(-b) stability
(-c) fire resistance
The recommended maximum variability factor is 0.25. (-d) wear
(a) The variability factor of the supporting force result- (-e) aging
ing from movement of the piping or component shall be (5) tests which are required prior to installation
considered in the loadings used in the stress analysis of (d) Design of functional members such as interconnec-
the piping or component. tions, tubing and fittings reservoirs, and flow distributors
(b) Variable support spring hangers shall be provided shall consider the effect of internal pressure, thermal ex-
with means to limit misalignment, buckling, and eccentric pansion, and vibration loading.
loading and to prevent overstressing of the spring. NF-3412.5 Dampers. Dampers provide similar sys-
(c) It is recommended that all hangers employing tem behavior as snubbers and can be used to mitigate dy-
springs be provided with means to indicate at all times namic events. Dampers shall meet the requirements of
the compression of the spring with respect to the appro- NF-3412.4.
priate hot and cold positions of the piping or component.
NF-3412.3 Hanger Rods. Design loads for threaded NF-3420 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
hanger rods shall be based on the root area of the threads. NF-3421 General Design Requirements
In no case shall hanger rods less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) dia- The design of Class 1 Standard Supports shall be in ac-
meter be used for supporting pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and cordance with the requirements of NF-3420 using one of
smaller, or less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) diameter rod for sup- the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1
porting pipe NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger. Pipe, structural for Class 1 construction.
shapes, or bars may be used instead of hanger rods. Hang-
er rods, structural shapes, etc., shall be designed to permit NF-3422 Design of Plate and ShellType
the free movement of piping as indicated in the thermal Standard Supports
stress analysis. The possibility of moment loading of hang-
er rods or shapes as a result of pipe motion shall be con- The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
sidered and avoided unless the support is specifically
designed for such loading.
NF-3423 Design of LinearType Standard
Supports
NF-3412.4 Snubbers.22
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met.
(a) Snubbers may be incorporated in the system design
to accommodate Design Mechanical Loads or conditions of NF-3425 Design of Bolting
a vibratory or dynamic nature. Snubbers may be attached
to a piping or component to protect it against dynamic The requirements of NF-3225 and NF-3324.6 shall be
type loading. Snubbers shall allow essentially free move- met.
ment of the piping or component to which they are at-
tached during nondynamic application of load such as NF-3426 Design of Welded Joints
that imposed by expansion and contraction. NF-3426.1 Permissible Types. The permissible types
(b) Snubbers shall be carefully applied to ensure that of welded joints for Standard Supports are described in
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
they will perform their intended function without placing paragraphs NF-3226.1 and NF-3256.1. Additional types
unacceptable loads on the piping system or other of joints are as follows. Typical examples of the types
components. are shown in Figure NF-3426.1-1.
Figure NF-3426.1-1
Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Standard Supports
(a) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: (2) Fillet welds between the edge of a plate and the
(1) fillet, double welded, sketch (a1). end surface of a closed tubular section or partially closed
tubular section or partially closed formed section,
(2) fillet, single welded, when double members are
sketches (b), (c), and (d). In addition, weld joints (b) and
used, sketch (a2).
(d) may be used only if the lengths of the respective legs
(3) fillet, single welded, between a flat surface and the of the fillet weld are equal to the exposed thickness of
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed the plate and shell elements. Partially closed tubular sec-
section, sketch (f). Partially closed tubular sections or par- tions or partially closed formed sections as well as the to-
tially closed formed sections and the total length of their tal length of their respective welds shall encompass a
respective welds shall encompass a minimum of 270 deg minimum of 270 deg of the circumference and provide
of the circumference and provide symmetrical loadings symmetrical loadings on closure plates.
on closure plates.
(3) The use of welded joints permitted by (a)(3) and
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the (b) is limited to housings for spring encapsulation of stan-
following: dard supports.
(1) Partial penetration, without a fillet weld between
the edge of a plate and the end surface of a closed tubular
section or partially closed formed section, sketch (e). Par- NF-3426.2 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
tially closed tubular sections or partially closed formed Stress Limits for Welded Joints. The limit of design stress
sections as well as the total length of their respective intensity or of allowable stress for welded joints for Stan-
welds shall encompass a minimum of 270 deg of the cir- dard Supports shall not exceed the applicable design
cumference and provide symmetrical loadings on closure stress intensity value or allowable stress value for the
plates. base metal being joined.
NF-3450 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 NF-3520 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
NF-3451 General Design Requirements NF-3521 General Design Requirements
The design of Class 2 Standard Supports shall be in ac- This Subsubarticle provides stress limits for elements of
cordance with the requirements of NF-3450 using one of Class 1 component supports. For general requirements as
the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1. to stress determinations, definitions, derivations of stress
intensities, and classification of stresses, refer to NF-3120.
NF-3452 Design of Plate and ShellType
Standard Supports NF-3522 Design of Plate and ShellType
Component Supports
The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
(a) The design rules and stress intensity limits which
must be satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings
NF-3453 Design of LinearType Standard are given in NF-3220.
Supports (b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met. tors for each loading and stress category are specified in
Table NF-3221.2-1.
NF-3455 Design of Bolting NF-3523 Design of LinearType Component

The requirements of NF-3225 and NF-3324.6 shall be Supports
met. (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3456 Design of Welded Joints NF-3320.
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
The requirements of NF-3426 shall be met, except that
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in
for groove welded and fillet welded Tjoints, the welds
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1.
may be intermittent instead of continuous.
NF-3524 Design of Standard Component
NF-3460 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 Supports
The design of Class 3 Standard Supports shall be in ac- (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
cordance with the requirements of NF-3450, using one of tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1. NF-3420.
NF-3470 DESIGN BY EXPERIMENTAL STRESS tors for each loading and stress category are specified in
ANALYSIS Table NF-3221.2-1 or Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 , as
applicable.
Standard Supports may be designed by experimental
stress analysis in accordance with the requirements of
NF-3270 for Plate and ShellType Standard Supports
and NF-3370 for LinearType Standard Supports. The number and crosssectional area of bolts required
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
for the Design Loadings of NF-3112 shall be determined

in accordance with the procedures of NF-3324.6.
13 NF-3480 PROCEDURE FOR LOAD RATING
Standard Supports may be designed by the procedure NF-3526 Design of Welded Joints
for load rating in accordance with the requirements of
(a) Welded joints in Plate and ShellType Component
NF-3280 for Plate and ShellType Standard Supports
Supports shall be as stipulated in NF-3226.
and NF-3380 for LinearType Standard Supports.
(b) Welded joints used in LinearType Component Sup-
ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3500 DESIGN RULES FOR COMPONENT NF-3550 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2, 3,
SUPPORTS AND MC
NF-3510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-3552 Design of Plate and ShellType
The design of component supports shall be in accor- Component Supports
dance with this Subarticle and the applicable general re- (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
quirements of NF-3110, NF-3210, NF-3310, and tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3410. NF-3250 and NF-3260.

Table NF-3611-1
Suggested Piping Support Spacing
Table NF-3251.2-1.
Nominal Suggested Maximum Span, ft (m)
NF-3553 Design of LinearType Component Pipe Size, Steam, Gas, or
Supports in. (DN) Water Service Air Service
1 (25) 7 (2.1) 9 (2.7)
The design rules and stress limits which must be satis-
2 (50) 10 (3.0) 13 (3.9)
fied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in 3 (80) 12 (3.6) 15 (4.5)
NF-3523. 4 (100) 14 (4.2) 17 (5.1)
6 (150) 17 (5.1) 21 (6.4)
NF-3554 Design of Class 2 and 3 Standard 8 (200) 19 (5.7) 24 (7.3)
Component Supports 12 (300) 23 (7.0) 30 (9.1)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
16 (400) 27 (8.2) 35 (10.6)
The design of Standard Component Supports shall be in 20 (500) 30 (9.1) 39 (11.8)
accordance with NF-3524. 24 (600) 32 (9.7) 42 (12.8)
NF-3555 Design of Bolting GENERAL NOTES:

(a) Suggested maximum spacing between piping sup-
The provision of NF-3525 shall be met. ports for horizontal straight runs of standard and
heavier piping with a maximum operating tempera-
NF-3556 Design of Welded Joints ture of 750F (400C).
(b) Does not apply where span calculations are made or
(a) Welded joints in Plate and ShellType Component where there are concentrated loads between sup-
Supports shall be as stipulated in NF-3256 for Class 2 ports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc.
and MC and NF-3266 for Class 3. (c) The spacing is based on a maximum combined bend-
(b) Welded joints in LinearType Component Supports ing and shear stress of 1.5 ksi (10 MPa) and insu-
shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5. lated piping filled with water or the equivalent
weight of steel pipe for steam, gas, or air service,
and the pitch of the line is such that a sag of
NF-3570 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) between supports is permissible.
Component supports of all types may be designed by ex-
perimental stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II
of Section III Appendices.
NF-3612 Vibration
NF-3580 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING Piping shall be arranged and supported so that vibra-
Component supports of all types may be designed by tion will be minimized.
load rating in accordance with the requirements of
NF-3280 for Plate and ShellType, NF-3380 for Linear NF-3613 Anchors, Guides, Pivots, and Restraints
Type, and the applicable Subsubarticle for Standard Com- Anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints shall be designed
ponent Supports. to secure the desired points of piping in a relatively fixed
position. They shall permit the piping to expand and con-
tract freely as directed from the anchored or guided point
NF-3600 DESIGN RULES FOR PIPING
and shall be structurally capable of withstanding the
SUPPORTS thrusts, moments, and other imposed loads.
The design of piping supports shall be in accordance NF-3614 Support Adjustments
with this Subarticle and the applicable general require- (a) Screwed adjustments shall have threaded parts to
ments of NF-3110, NF-3210, NF-3310, and NF-3410. conform to ASME B1.1 coarse threaded series, Class 2 fit.
Alternatively, other thread forms, series, and fits may be
NF-3611 Spacing of Piping Supports used which permit adjustment after erection, and are de-
Supports for piping with a longitudinal axis in approxi- signed to withstand the forces, moments, and other im-
mately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent exposed loads acting on the support, considering the worst
cessive shear stresses resulting from sag and bending in combination of thread tolerances.
the piping, with special consideration given when compo- (b) Turnbuckles and adjusting nuts shall have the full
nents such as pumps and valves impose concentrated length of thread in engagement. Means shall be provided
loads. The suggested maximum spans for spacing of for determining that full thread length is engaged. All
weight supports for standard weight and heavier piping screw and equivalent adjustments shall be provided with
are given in Table NF-3611-1. suitable locking devices.
NF-3615 Piping Clamps

Figure NF-3626(a)-1
(a) When clamps are used to support vertical piping Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1
lines, it is recommended that shear lugs be welded to Piping Supports
the piping to prevent slippage.
(b) In addition to the provision of (a), clamps to support
vertical piping lines shall be designed to support the total
load on either arm in the event the load shifts because of
piping or hanger movement, or both.
NF-3616 Hanger Rods

The provisions for hanger rods of NF-3412.3 apply.
NF-3620 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1

NF-3622 Design of Plate and ShellType Piping
Supports
(a) The design rules and stress intensity limits which
must be satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings
are given in NF-3220.
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress intensity
limit factors for each loading and stress category are spe-
cified in Table NF-3221.2-1.
NF-3623 Design of LinearType Piping Supports NF-3650 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2
(a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa- AND 3
tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in NF-3652 Design of Plate and ShellType Piping
NF-3320. Supports
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1. tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3250 and NF-3260.
NF-3624 Design of Standard Piping Supports (b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
(a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa- Table NF-3251.2-1.
tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3420.
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac- NF-3653 Design of LinearType Piping Supports
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in The design rules and stress limits which must be satis-
Table NF-3221.2-1 or Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 , as fied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
applicable. NF-3623.

NF-3654 Design of Standard Piping Supports
The number and crosssectional area of bolts required
for the Design Loadings of NF-3112 shall be determined The design of Standard Piping Supports shall be in ac-
in accordance with the procedures of NF-3324.6. The al- cordance with NF-3624.
lowable bolt design stress value shall be determined in ac-
cordance with NF-3324.6. NF-3655 Design of Bolting
The provisions of NF-3625 shall be met.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3626 Design of Welded Joints

(a) Welded joints in Plate and ShellType Piping Sup-
NF-3656 Design of Welded Joints
ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3226. In addition,
tee joints, double fillet welded, sketch (a) (a) Welded joints in Plate and ShellType Piping Sup-
[Figure NF-3626(a)-1] and single welded, when double ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3256 for Class 2 and
members, sketch (b), are permitted. NF-3266 for Class 3.
(b) Welded joints used in LinearType Piping Supports (b) Welded joints used in LinearType Piping Supports
shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5. shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3670 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS NF-3680 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING

Piping supports of all types may be designed by experi- Piping supports of all types may be designed by load
mental stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II of rating in accordance with the requirements of NF-3280
Section III Appendices. for Plate and ShellType, NF-3380 for LinearType, and
the applicable Subsubarticle for Standard Piping Supports.
ARTICLE NF-4000
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
NF-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS be repeated by the Certificate Holder on test specimens ta-
ken from test coupons which have been taken and treated
NF-4110 INTRODUCTION in accordance with the requirements of NF-2000.
NF-4111 Fabrication and Installation
Supports shall be fabricated and installed in accordance NF-4122 Material Identification
with the requirements of this Article and shall be manufac- Material for supports shall carry identification markings
tured from material which meets the requirements of which will remain distinguishable until the support is fab-
NF-2000. ricated or installed. If the original identification markings
are cut off or the material is divided, the marks shall be ac-
NF-4112 Reassembly of Subsection NF Supports curately transferred to the parts or a coded marking shall
The Certificate Holder may reassemble supports from be used to assure identification of each piece of material
completed supports that have not been in operating ser- during subsequent fabrication or installation, unless
vice or from parts and material of disassembled supports otherwise provided by NF-2150. Material supplied with
that have not been in operating service, provided all re- a Certificate of Compliance and welding and brazing mate-
quired documentation is available and the applicable Code rial shall be identified and controlled so that they can be
requirements are met. traced to each support, or else a control procedure shall
The program for maintaining identification of material be employed which ensures that the specified material is
and parts, including material documentation and certifica- used.
tion documents (Certificate of Compliance and NS1 Certi-
ficate of Conformance) shall be described in a written NF-4123 Visual Examinations
procedure. Visual examination activities that are not referenced for
examination by other specific Code paragraphs, and are
NF-4120 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND performed solely to verify compliance with requirements
FABRICATION BY SUPPORT of NF-4000, may be performed by the persons who per-
CERTIFICATE HOLDER form or supervise the work. These visual examinations
NF-4121 Means of Certification are not required to be performed by personnel and proce-
dures qualified to NF-5500 and NF-5100, respectively, un-
The NS Certificate Holder for a support shall certify less so specified.
Code compliance by the furnishing of an NS1 Certificate
of Conformance (NCA3687) for welded supports or a Cer-
NF-4125 Testing of Welding and Brazing
tificate of Compliance (NCA3689) for nonwelded
Materials
supports.
All welding and brazing materials shall meet the re-
NF-4121.1 Certification of Treatments, Tests, and
quirements of NF-2400.
Examinations. If the Certificate Holder performs treat-
ments, tests, repairs, or examinations required by other
Articles of this Section, he shall certify that he has fulfilled
NF-4130 REPAIR OF MATERIAL
that requirement [NCA3861(c)]. Reports of all required NF-4131 Elimination and Repair of Defects
treatments and the results of all required tests, repairs, Material originally accepted on delivery in which de-
and examinations performed by the NS Certificate Holder fects exceeding the limits of NF-2500 are known or discov-
shall be maintained as quality assurance records in accor- ered during the process of fabrication or installation is
dance with NCA4134.17. unacceptable. The material may be used provided the con-
NF-4121.2 Repetition of Tensile or Impact Tests. If dition is corrected in accordance with the requirements of
during the fabrication or installation of the support the NF-2500 for the applicable product form, except
material is subjected to heat treatment that has not been (a) weld repair is not required if the defect is removed
covered by treatment of the test coupons (NF-2200) and by mechanical means and does not reduce the section be-
that may reduce either the tensile or impact properties below the minimum thickness required by NF-3000
low the required values, the tensile and impact tests shall (b) when weld repair is performed
(1) the weld repair restores the section to the mini- (a) hotformed material, such as forgings, in which the
mum thickness required by NF-3000 hot forming is completed by the Material Organization
(2) the limitation on the depth of weld repair does not prior to removal of the impact test specimens
apply (b) hotformed material represented by test coupons
(3) the time of examination of weld repairs to weld which has been subjected to heat treatment representing
edge preparations and to material shall be in accordance the hot forming procedure and the heat treatments to be
with NF-5120 applied to the parts
(4) the provisions of NF-2610(e) for weld repair of (c) material which does not require impact tests in ac-
structural material apply cordance with NF-2300
(d) material which has final strain less than 0.5%
(e) material where the final strain is less than that of a
NF-4200 FORMING, FITTING, AND ALIGNING previously qualified procedure for that material
(f) material from which the impact testing required by
NF-4210 CUTTING, FORMING, AND BENDING NF-2300 is performed on each heat and lot, as applicable,
NF-4211 Cutting after forming
Material may be cut to shape and size by mechanical NF-4213.2 Procedure Qualification Test. The proce-
means such as machining, shearing, or chipping, or by dure qualification test shall be performed in the manner
grinding or thermal cutting. Thermally cut edges that are stipulated in (a) through (f).
to be welded shall be smooth and free of all loose scale (a) The tests shall be performed on three different heats
and slag accumulations. of material both before and after straining to establish the
effects of the forming and subsequent heat treatment
NF-4211.1 Preheating Before Thermal Cutting. operations.
When thermal cutting is performed to prepare weld joints
(b) Specimens shall be taken in accordance with the re-
or edges, to remove attachments or defective material, or
quirements of NF-2000 and shall be taken from the ten-
for any other purpose, consideration shall be given to pre-
sion side of the strained material.
heating the material using preheat schedules, such as sug-
(c) The percent strain shall be established by the fol-
gested in Appendix D (Section III Appendices).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
lowing equations:
For cylinders:
NF-4212 Forming and Bending Processes
Any process may be used to hot or cold form or bend
materials, including weld metal, provided the required di-
mensions are attained (see NF-4214 and NF-4220), and For spherical or dished surfaces
provided the specified impact properties of the material,
when required, are not reduced below the minimum spe-
cified values or they are effectively restored by heat treat-
ment following the forming operation. Hot forming is For pipe
defined as forming with the material temperature higher
than 100F (56C) below the lower transformation tem-
perature of the material. When required, the process shall where
be qualified for impact properties as outlined in NF-4213.
R = nominal bending radius to the center line of the
pipe, in. (mm)
NF-4213 Qualification of Forming Processes for R f = final radius to center line of shell, in. (mm)
Impact Property Requirements R o = original radius (equal to infinity for a flat part), in.
When impact testing is required by the Design Specifica- (mm)
tions, a procedure qualification test shall be conducted r = nominal radius of the pipe, in. (mm)
using specimens taken from material of the same material t = nominal thickness, in. (mm)
specification, grade or class, heat treatment, and with simi-
(d) The procedure qualification shall simulate the max-
lar impact properties as required for the material in the
imum percent surface strain, employing a bending process
support. These specimens shall be subjected to the equiva-
similar to that used in the fabrication of the material or by
lent forming or bending process and heat treatment as the
direct tension on the specimen.
material in the support. Applicable tests shall be con-
(e) Sufficient Charpy Vnotch specimens shall be taken
ducted to determine that the required impact properties
from each of three heats of material to establish a transi-
of NF-2300 are met after straining.
tion curve showing in both the upper and lower shelves.
NF-4213.1 Exemptions. Procedure qualification tests On each of these three heats, tests consisting of three im-
are not required for material listed in (a) through (f) pact specimens shall be conducted at a minimum of five
different temperatures distributed throughout the transi- NF-4230 FITTING AND ALIGNING
tion region. The upper and lower shelves may be estab- NF-4231 Fitting and Aligning Methods
lished by the use of one test specimen each, depending
on the product form. Parts that are to be joined may be fitted, aligned, and re-
(f) Using the results of the impact test data from each of tained in position during the joining operation by the use
three heats, taken both before and after straining, deter- of bars, jacks, clamps, drift pins, tack welds, or temporary
mine either attachments. Mechanical devices shall be carefully used to
(1) the maximum change in NDT temperature along avoid damage to surfaces of the parts and to avoid enlar-
with gement of bolt holes.
(-a) the maximum change of lateral expansion and NF-4231.1 Tack Welds. Tack welds used to secure
energy of the temperature under consideration or alignment shall either be removed completely, when they
(-b) the maximum change of temperature at the have served their purpose, or their stopping and starting
lateral expansion and energy levels under consideration ends shall be properly prepared by grinding or other sui-
or table means so that they may be satisfactorily incorpo-
(2) when lateral expansion is the acceptance criterion rated into the final weld. Tack welds shall be made by
(NF-2300), either the maximum change in temperature or qualified welders using qualified welding procedures.
the maximum change in lateral expansion When tack welds are to become part of the finished weld,
NF-4213.3 Acceptance Criteria for Formed Material. they shall be visually examined and defective tack welds
To be acceptable, the formed material used in the support removed.
shall have impact properties before forming sufficient to NF-4231.2 Column Bases.
compensate for the maximum loss of impact properties (a) Column bases shall be set level and to correct eleva-
due to the qualified forming procedure used. tion with full bearing on the masonry.
NF-4213.4 Requalification. A new procedure qualifi- (b) Column bases shall be finished in accordance with
cation test is required when any of the following changes the requirements of (1) through (3).
are made: (1) Rolled steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less in
(a) the actual postweld heat treatment time at tempera- thickness may be used without milling, provided a satis-
ture is greater than previously qualified considering factory contact bearing is obtained. Rolled steel bearing
NF-2211; if the material is not postweld heat treated, plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4 in. (100 mm)
the procedure must be qualified without postweld heat in thickness may be straightened by pressing or, if presses
treatment are not available, by milling for all bearing surfaces except
(b) the maximum calculated strain of the material ex- those noted in (3) to obtain satisfactory contact bearing.
ceeds the previously qualified strain by more than 0.5% Rolled steel bearing plates over 4 in. (100 mm) in thick-
(c) where preheat over 250F (120C) is used in the ness shall be milled for all bearing surfaces except as
forming or bending operation but not followed by a subse- noted in (3).
quent postweld heat treatment (2) Column bases other than rolled steel bearing
plates shall be planed for all bearing surfaces, except as
NF-4214 Minimum Thickness of Fabricated noted in (3).
Material (3) The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column
bases which are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
If any fabrication operation reduces the thickness below
foundation need not be planed.
the minimum required to satisfy the rules of NF-3000, the
material may be repaired in accordance with NF-4130.
NF-4220 SUPPORT TOLERANCES

Tolerances not specified in this subsection shall be spe-
cified by the designer in accordance with NF-3134.
NF-4221 Tolerances for Plate and ShellType

Supports Table NF-4232-1
Maximum Allowable Offset in Final Butt
(a) The outer surface of a plate and shelltype support Welded Joints
shall not deviate from the specified shape by more than
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
11/4% of the overall design dimension. Such deviations Section Thickness, in. (mm) Maximum Allowable Offset
shall not include abrupt changes. Up to 3/4 (19), Incl. 1
/4t
Over 3/4 to 11/2 (19 to 38), Incl. 3
/16 in. (5 mm)
(b) For plate and shelltype supports which are skirts,
Over 11/2 to 6 (38 to 150), Incl. 1
/8t
the difference between the maximum and minimum out- Over 6 (150) 3
/4 in. (19 mm)
side diameters shall not exceed 1% of the nominal outside
diameter.
NF-4232 Maximum Offset of Aligned Sections (a) temporary attachments are removed in accordance
with the provisions of NF-4435(b)
Alignment of butt joints shall be such that the maximum
offset of the finished weld will not be greater than the ap- (b) the energy output for permanent nonstructural at-
plicable amount listed in Table NF-4232-1, where t is the tachments such as strain gages and thermocouples is lim-
nominal thickness of the thinner section of the joint. ited to 125 W-sec and the minimum thickness of the
material to which the attachment is made is greater than
NF-4232.1 Fairing of Offsets. Any offset within the 0.09 in. (2.3 mm)
allowable tolerance of Table NF-4232-1 shall be blended (c) a Welding Procedure Specification is prepared de-
uniformly over the width of the finished weld or, if neces- scribing the capacitor discharge equipment, the combina-
sary, by adding additional weld metal beyond what would tion of materials to be joined, and the technique of
otherwise be the edge of the weld. application; qualification of the welding procedure is not
required
NF-4240 REQUIREMENTS FOR WELDED JOINTS
Butt welds may be made with or without backing or NF-4311.4 Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction
consumable insert rings. When the use of permanent back- Welding.
ing rings is undesirable [NF-3226.1(a) or NF-3256.1(a)] (a) Inertia and continuous drive friction welding shall
(a) the backing ring shall be removed and the inside of not be used for fabrication of Class 1 Plate and ShellType
the joint ground smooth Component Supports.
(b) the joint shall be welded without backing rings or (b) The weld between the two members shall be a full
(c) consumable insert rings shall be used penetration weld.
NF-4245 Complete Joint Penetration Welds NF-4320 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS AND

RECORDS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Complete joint penetration is considered to be achieved

when the acceptance criteria for the examinations speci- NF-4321 Required Qualifications
fied by this Subsection have been met. No other examina-
tion is required to assess that complete penetration has (a) Each Certificate Holder is responsible for the weld-
been achieved. ing done by his organization and shall establish the proce-
dure and conduct the tests required by this Article and
Section IX in order to qualify both the welding procedures
NF-4300 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS and the performance of welders and welding operators
who apply these procedures.
NF-4310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (b) Procedures, welders, and welding operators used to
NF-4311 Types of Processes Permitted join permanent or temporary attachments to support ele-
Only those welding processes which are capable of pro- ments and to make permanent or temporary tack welds
ducing welds in accordance with the welding procedure used in such welding shall also meet the qualification re-
qualification requirements of Section IX and this Subsec- quirements of this Article.
tion shall be used for welding support material or attach- (c) When making procedure test plates for butt welds,
ments thereto. Any process used shall be such that the consideration shall be given to the effect of angular, lat-
records required by NF-4320 can be prepared except that eral, and end restraint on the weldment. This applies par-
records for stud welds shall be traceable to the welders ticularly to material and weld metal of 80 ksi (550 MPa)
and welding operators, and not necessarily to each specific tensile strength or higher and heavy sections of both low
weld. and high tensile strength material. The addition of re-
straint during welding may result in cracking difficulties
NF-4311.1 Stud Welding Restrictions. Stud welding
that otherwise might not occur.
is acceptable for insulation supports, nameplates, and lo-
(d) NCA3131 provides specific additional require-
cating lugs. Studs shall be limited to 1 in. (25 mm) maxi-
ments when welding services are subcontracted to or
mum diameter for round studs or an equivalent
through organizations not holding an appropriate Certifi-
crosssectional area for studs of other shapes when weld-
cate of Authorization.
ing in the flat position and 3/4 in. (19 mm) diameter for all
other welding positions. When studs are 1/2 in. (13 mm) in
diameter or less, postweld heat treatment, qualified weld- NF-4322 Maintenance and Certification of
ing procedures, and certified welding materials are not Records
required. The Certificate Holder shall maintain a record of his
NF-4311.2 Capacitor Discharge Welding. Capacitor qualified welding procedures and of the welders and
discharge welding may be used for welding temporary at- welding operators qualified by him, showing the date
tachments and permanent nonstructural attachments and results of tests and the identification mark assigned
provided to each welder. These records shall be reviewed, verified,
and certified by the Certificate Holder by signature or NF-4330 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
some other method of control in accordance with the Cer- WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
tificate Holders Quality Assurance Program. TESTS
NF-4322.1 Identification of Joints for Class 1 Com- NF-4331 Conformance to Section IX
ponent Supports. Requirements
(a) For Class 1 Plate and ShellType, and LinearType All welding procedure qualification tests shall be in ac-
Component Supports, the welder or welding operator cordance with the requirements of Section IX as supple-
shall apply the identification mark assigned to him by mented by the requirements of this Article.
the Certificate Holder on or adjacent to all permanent
welds, including fillet welds, at 3 ft (1 m) intervals or less, NF-4334 Preparation of Test Coupons and
except as noted in (b). The marking shall be done with Specimens
either blunt nose continuous or blunt nose interrupted
(a) Removal of test coupons from the test weld and the
dot die stamps. As an alternative, the Certificate Holder
dimensions of specimens made from them shall conform
shall keep a record of permanent welded joints in a com-
to the requirements of Section IX, except that the removal
ponent support, and of the welders and welding operators
of impact test coupons and the dimensions of impact test
used in making each of the joints.
specimens shall be in accordance with (b).
(b) For partial penetration welds with a depth less than (b) Weld deposit of each process in a multiple process
1 in. (25 mm) and fillet welds with a throat dimension less weld shall, where possible, be included in the impact test
than 1 in. (25 mm) in primary members, and for all welds specimens. When each process cannot be included in the
in secondary members, the Certificate Holder need not fullsize impact test specimen at the 1/4t location required
identify the welder or welding operator who welded each by this Section, additional fullsize specimens shall be ob-
joint provided tained from locations in the test weld that will ensure that
(1) the Certificate Holder maintains a system that will at least a portion of each process has been included in full
identify the welders or welding operators who made such size test specimens. As an alternative, additional test
welds on each item welds can be made with each process so that fullsize spe-
(2) the welds in each category are all of the same type cimens can be tested for each process.
and configuration and are welded with the same Welding
NF-4334.1 Coupons Representing the Weld Depos-
Procedure Specification
its. Impact test specimen and testing methods shall con-
NF-4322.2 Identification of Other Joints. For all form to NF-2321. The impact specimen shall be located
types of Class 2, 3, and MC component supports and for so that the longitudinal axis of the specimen is at least
1
all classes of piping supports and Standard Supports, the /4t, and where the thickness of the test assembly permits,
Certificate Holder shall certify that only welders and weld- not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) from the weld surface of the
ing operators qualified in accordance with NF-4321 were test assembly. In addition, when the postweld heat treat-
used in making all welds. ment temperature exceeds the maximum temperature
specified in NF-4620, and the test assembly is cooled at
NF-4322.3 Identification of Tack Welds. The identi- an accelerated rate, the longitudinal axis of the specimen
fication of welder or welding operator is not required shall be a minimum of t from the edge of the test assembly.
for tack welds. The specimen shall be transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the weld with the area of the notch located in the weld.
The length of the notch of the Charpy Vnotch specimen
NF-4323 Welding Prior to Qualification shall be normal to the surface of the weld.
No welding shall be undertaken until after the welding NF-4334.2 Coupons Representing the HeatAffected
procedures which are to be used have been qualified. Only Zone. Where impact tests of the heataffected zone are re-
welders and welding operators who are qualified in accor- quired by NF-4335.2, specimens shall be taken from the
dance with NF-4320 and Section IX shall be used. welding procedure qualification test assemblies in accor-
dance with (a) through (c).
(a) If the qualification test material is in the form of a
NF-4324 Transferring Qualifications
plate or a forging, the axis of the weld shall be oriented
The welding procedure qualifications and the perfor- either parallel to or perpendicular to the principal direc-
mance qualification tests for welders and welding operation of rolling or forging.
tors conducted by one Certificate Holder shall not (b) The heataffected zone impact test specimens and
qualify welding procedures and shall not qualify welders testing methods shall conform to NF-2321. The specimens
or welding operators to weld for any other Certificate shall be removed from a location as near as practical to a
Holder, except as provided in Section IX, QW201 and depth midway between the surface and center thickness.
QW300.2. The coupons for heataffected zone impact specimens
shall be taken transverse to the axis of the weld and etched (b) The impact test requirements and acceptance stan-
to define the heataffected zone. The notch of the Charpy dards for welding procedure qualification weld metal shall
Vnotch specimen shall be cut approximately normal to be the same as specified in NF-2330 for the base material
the material surface in such a manner as to include as to be welded or repaired. Where two materials which have
much heataffected zone as possible in the resulting frac- different fracture toughness requirements are to be joined
ture. Where the material thickness permits, the axis of a by welding, the test requirements and acceptance stan-
specimen may be inclined to allow the root of the notch dards of either material may be used for the weld metal,
to align parallel to the fusion line. When a grain refining except where otherwise specified by NCA1280 or other
heat treatment is not performed on welds made by the parts of this Section.
electroslag or electrogas welding process, the notch for (c) A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) qualified
the impact specimens shall be located in the grain coar- to the impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC,
sened region. or NE may be accepted as an alternative to the WPS impact
(c) For the comparison of heataffected zone values testing requirements of this Subsection.
with base material values [NF-4335.2(b)], Charpy Vnotch
NF-4335.2 Impact Tests of HeatAffected Zone.
specimens shall be removed from the unaffected base ma-
(a) Charpy Vnotch tests of the heataffected zone of the
terial at approximately the same distance from the base
welding procedure qualification test assembly are re-
material surface as the heataffected zone specimens.
quired whenever the thickness of the weld exceeds
The axis of the unaffected base material specimens shall 5
/8 in. (16 mm), and either of the base materials requires
be parallel to the axis of the heataffected zone specimens,
impact testing in accordance with the rules of NF-2310.
and the axis of the notch shall be normal to the surface of
Exemption of base materials by NF-2311(b)(9) or
the base material.
NF-2311(b)(10) does not apply to the welding procedure
qualification of the heataffected zone or unaffected base
NF-4335 Impact Test Requirements material for such materials. The only exceptions to the re-
quirements are the following:
When materials are required to be impact tested per (1) the qualification for welds in PNos. 1 and 3 and
NF-2300, impact tests of the weld metal and heataffected SA-336 F12 materials that are postweld heat treated and
zone shall be performed in accordance with the following are made by any process other than electroslag, electro-
subparagraphs. Exemptions from impact testing under gas, or thermit
NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) do not apply to weld (2) the qualification for weld deposit cladding or
metal unless the specific weld metal used is included in hardfacing on any base material
Table NF-2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions are being de-
(3) that portion of the heataffected zone associated
veloped). Exemption from impact testing of the
with GTAW root deposits with a maximum of two layers
heataffected zone of those base materials which are ex-
or 3/16 in. (5 mm) thickness, whichever is less
empted by NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) is not per-
(b) Charpy Vnotch testing shall be performed as speci-
mitted. The welding procedure qualification impact test
fied in (1) through (6).
specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance
with the applicable requirements of NF-2330 and (1) Charpy Vnotch test specimens representing both
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-4334. Retests in accordance with the provisions of the heataffected zone and the unaffected base material
NF-2350 are permitted. shall be tested. The unaffected base material shall be
tested at a temperature equal to or below that specified
NF-4335.1 Impact Tests of Weld Metal. in NF-2311(c).
(a) Impact tests of the weld metal shall be required for (2) The Charpy Vnotch tests of the unaffected base
welding procedure qualification tests for production weld material shall meet the applicable requirements of Table
joints exceeding 5/8 in. (16 mm) in thickness when the NF2331 for the applicable Class and acceptance category.
weld is made on the surface or penetrates the base mate- If the requirements are not met at the test temperature,
rial that requires impact testing in accordance with additional testing shall be performed at higher tempera-
NF-2310. In addition, such testing of the weld metal is re- tures until the above requirements are met.
quired for the welding procedure qualification tests for (3) The heataffected zone specimens shall be tested
any weld repair to base material that requires impact test- at the test temperature determined in (2). If the average
ing in accordance with NF-2310, regardless of the depth of applicable toughness value of the heataffected zone speci-
the repair. Exemption from impact testing under mens equals or exceeds the average applicable toughness
NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) does not apply to value of the unaffected base material, the qualification test
weld metal of the welding procedure qualification test is acceptable for the essential and supplemental essential
for either production weld joints or base material repairs variables recorded on the Welding Procedure Qualifica-
unless the specific weld metal used is included in tion Record. If the heataffected zone average applicble
Table NF-2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions are being toughness value is less than the unaffected base material
developed). average applicable toughness value, the adjustment given
in (4) through (6) shall be determined and applied as pro- (e) A Welding Procedure Specification qualified to the
vided in (c). Alternatively, another test coupon may be impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC, or NE
welded and tested. may be accepted as an alternative to the Welding Proce-
(4) Additional Charpy Vnotch tests shall be per- dure Specification impact testing requirements of this
formed on either the heataffected zone or the unaffected Subsection.
base material, or both, at temperatures where the applic-
able toughness values of all three specimens tested are not
less than that specified in (2). The average applicable NF-4400 RULES GOVERNING MAKING AND
toughness value for each test meeting this requirement REPAIRING WELDS
shall be plotted on a propertytemperature graph. The dif- NF-4410 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE
ference in temperature T H A Z and T U B M where the WELDING
heataffected zone and the unaffected base material aver-
NF-4411 Identification, Storage, and Handling of
age applicable toughness values are the same and not less
Welding Materials
than that specified in (2) shall be used to determine the
adjustment temperature T A D J where Each Certificate Holder is responsible for control of the
welding electrodes and other materials which are used in
the fabrication and installation of supports (NF-4120).
Suitable identification, storage, and handling of electrodes,
If T A D J 0, then T A D J = 0.
flux, and other welding material shall be maintained. Pre-
(5) As an alternative to (4), if the applicable tough- cautions shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture
ness values of the heataffected zone are no less than those by electrodes and flux.
specified in Table NF2331 for the applicable Class and ac-
ceptance category and the average applicable toughness NF-4412 Cleanliness and Protection of Weld
value of the heataffected zone specimens is not less than Surfaces
7 ft-lb (10 J) or 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the average applic-
able toughness value of the unaffected base material, T A D J The method used to prepare the base metal shall leave
may be taken as 15F (8C). the weld preparation with reasonably smooth surfaces.
The surfaces for welding shall be free of scale, rust, oil,
(6) As a second alternative to (4), if the applicable
grease, and other deleterious material. The work shall be
toughness values of the heataffected zone are no less than
protected from deleterious contamination and from rain,
those specified in Table NF2331 for the applicable Class
snow, and wind during welding. Welding shall not be per-
and acceptance category, the difference between the aver-
formed on wet surfaces.
age applicable toughness value of the heataffected zone
and the unaffected base material shall be calculated and NF-4420 RULES FOR MAKING WELDED JOINTS
used as described in (c)(3).
(c) At least one of the following methods shall be used
NF-4421 Backing Strips
to compensate for the heataffected zone toughness de- The materials for backing strips, when used, shall be
crease due to the welding procedure. compatible with the base metal.
(1) The lowest service temperature specified in the
Design Specification for all of the material to be welded NF-4422 Peening
in production Welding Procedure Specifications sup- The weld metal may be peened when it is deemed ne-
ported by this Welding Procedure Qualification Record cessary or helpful to control distortion.
shall be increased by the adjustment temperature T A D J .
(2) The specified testing temperature for the produc- NF-4423 Double Welded Joints
tion material may be reduced by T A D J . Before applying weld metal on the second side to be
(3) The materials to be welded may be welded using welded, the root of full penetration double welded joints
the Welding Procedure Specification, provided they exhi- shall be prepared by suitable methods, such as chipping,
bit toughness values that are no less than the minimum re- grinding, or thermal gouging, except for those processes
quired toughness values specified in NF-2300 plus the of welding by which proper fusion and penetration are
difference in the average applicable toughness values es- otherwise obtained and demonstrated to be satisfactory
tablished in (b)(6). by welding procedure qualification.
(d) The Charpy Vnotch testing results shall be recorded
on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record and any NF-4424 Surfaces of Welds
offsetting T A D J or increased toughness requirements shall (a) The surface condition of the finished weld shall be
be noted on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record sufficiently free from coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps,
and on the Welding Procedure Specification. More than abrupt ridges, and valleys for the proper interpretation
one compensation method may be documented on the of radiographic and other required nondestructive exam-
Welding Procedure Qualification Record. inations of the welds. In those cases where there is a
question regarding the surface condition on the interpre- (1) the temporary attachment shall be completely re-
tation of a radiographic film, the film shall be compared moved in accordance with the procedures of NF-4211
to the actual weld surface for interpretation and determi- (2) as an alternative to (a)(5), postweld heat treat-
nation of acceptability. ment may be deferred until after removal of the
(b) Concavity on the root side of a single welded circum- attachment
ferential butt weld is permitted when the resulting thick- (3) the surface of the support shall be visually exam-
ness of the weld meets the requirements of NF-3000. ined after removal of the temporary attachment
(c) Fusion shall exist between adjacent layers of weld
metal and between weld metal and base metal except as NF-4440 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
provided in NF-5360(c). WELDING
(d) For inertia and continuous drive friction welding, NF-4441 ThroughThickness Loading
the weld upset shall meet the specified amount within Welded joint configurations causing significant
10%. Flash shall be removed to sound metal. throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
NF-1215(b)] during fabrication or service on rolled pro-
NF-4427 Shape and Size of Welds duct forms should be avoided. When this type of construc-
(a) Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. The tion is used, weld volume and welding heat input on the
shape and size of the weld shall be in accordance with rolled surfaces should be limited to the extent practical.
the requirements of Figure NF-4427-1. Convexity of fillet When identified by the Design Output Documents
welds is not a criteria for acceptance and need not be [NF-3226.3, NF-3256.4, and NF-3324.5(f)(3)(-h)], weld
measured. joints in primary members 1 in. (25 mm) or greater in
(b) The faces of groove welds may be flat or convex. The thickness in component supports subjected to significant
thickness of groove welds shall be no less than 1/32 in. throughthickness tensile loads and any other weld joints
(0.8 mm) less than the thickness of the thinner of the identified in the Design Output Documents shall meet one
members joined. of the following requirements:
(c) On webtoflange welds on girders, no underrun is (a) After completion of welding, the base material di-
permitted at the ends for a length equal to twice the width rectly underneath the attachment shall be ultrasonically
of the flange. examined in accordance with the requirements of
NF-5214, NF-5224, or NF-5234, as appropriate to the com-
NF-4429 Plug Welds ponent support class.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) A weld metal inlay or overlay shall be made in accor-

When plug welds are used on supports, a fillet weld dance with Figure NF-4441-1 and ultrasonically examined
shall first be deposited around the circumference at the in accordance with NF-5214, NF-5224, or NF-5234, prior
bottom of the hole. to making the weld joining the attachment member to
the inlay or overlay.
NF-4430 WELDING OF ATTACHMENTS (c) The material shall meet the acceptance standards of
NF-4435 Welding of Nonstructural and SA-770, ThroughThickness Tension Testing of Steel
Temporary Attachments, and Their Plates for Special Applications.
Removal
NF-4450 REPAIR OF WELD METAL DEFECTS
(a) Nonstructural attachments such as insulation sup-
ports, nameplates, locating lugs, and temporary attach- NF-4451 General Requirements
ments may be noncertified material and may be welded Defects in weld metal detected by the examinations re-
to the support or parts thereof with continuous or inter- quired by NF-5000 shall be eliminated or repaired.
mittent fillet or partial penetration welds, provided the re-
quirements of (1) through (5) are met NF-4452 Elimination of Surface Defects
(1) the welding procedure and the welders have been Weld metal surface defects may be removed by grinding
qualified in accordance with NF-4321 or machining and need not be repaired by welding, pro-
(2) the material is identified and is suitable for vided that the requirements of (a) through (c) are met.
welding (a) The remaining thickness of the section is not re-
(3) the material is compatible with the material to duced below that required by NF-3000.
which it is attached (b) The depression, after defect elimination, is blended
(4) the welding material is identified and compatible uniformly into the surrounding surface.
with the materials joined (c) The area is examined after blending by a magnetic
(5) the welds are postweld heat treated when re- particle or liquid penetrant method in accordance with
quired by NF-4620 NF-5110 and meets the acceptance standards of
(b) Removal of nonstructural temporary attachments NF-5300 to ensure that the defect has been removed or
shall be accomplished as follows: the indication reduced to an acceptable limit. Defects
Figure NF-4427-1
Fillet Weld Dimensions
Theoretical throat Theoretical throat

Surface of
intersecting Surface of
member intersecting
member
Convex fillet weld Concave

fillet weld
Size of
weld Surface of through member
Size of
weld
(a) Equal Leg Fillet Weld [Note (1)]
Theoretical throat
Theoretical throat
Surface of Surface of
intersecting intersecting
member member
Convex fillet weld Concave

fillet weld
Surface of through member
(b) Unequal Leg Fillet Weld [Note (2)]
135 deg max.

60 deg min. [Note (3)]
Intersecting
member
Through member
Theoretical
throat
Theoretical
throat
(c) Skewed T-Joints [Note (3)]
NOTES:
(1) The size of an equal leg fillet weld is the leg length of the largest inscribed right isosceles triangle. Theoretical throat = 0.7 size of weld.
(2) The size of an unequal leg fillet weld is the shorter leg length of the largest right triangle, which can be inscribed within the fillet weld cross
section.
(3) When the intersecting member is less than 60 deg, the weld shall be considered a partial penetration groove weld [NF-3324.5(d)(4)].
NF-4453.1 Defect Removal. Defects may be removed

Figure NF-4441-1
by mechanical means or by thermal gouging processes.
Weld Joint Producing ThroughThickness
The area prepared for repair shall be examined by a liquid
Loading
penetrant or magnetic particle method in accordance with
NF-5110 and shall meet the acceptance standards of
T
NF-5340 or NF-5350. This examination is not required
(typ.)
where defect elimination removes the full thickness of
the weld and where the backside of the weld joint is not
accessible for removal of examination materials.
3/ in. min.
8
(typ.)
NF-4453.2 Requirements for Welding Materials,
(10 mm) Procedures, and Welders. The weld repair shall be made
using welding material, welders, and welding procedures
Step 2 qualified in accordance with NF-4125 and NF-4300.
w NF-4453.3 Blending of Repaired Areas. After repair,

the surface shall be blended uniformly into the surround-
t
ing surface.
NF-4453.4 Examination of Repair Welds. The exam-
ination of a weld repair shall be repeated as required for
w the original weld, except that it need only be reexamined
by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method when
Step 2 the unacceptable indication was originally detected by the
liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method and when
Step 1
the repair cavity does not exceed the following:
(a) 1/3t w for t w 3/4 in. (19 mm)
3/
8 in. min. (b) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for 3/4 in. (19 mm) <t w 2 1/2 in.
(typ.) (64 mm)
(10 mm) (c) the lesser of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 10% t w for t w
>21/2 in. (64 mm)
where t w equals the nominal thickness of the original
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Step 1: Inlay or overlay weldment

weld.
Step 2: Completion of weldment
NF-4453.5 Heat Treatment of Repaired Areas. The
GENERAL NOTES: repaired area shall be heat treated when required by
(a) T is the width of the welded zone measured on the primary NF-4620.
member surface.
(b) Members may be welded on one side only or from both sides.
(c) Inlay or overlay thickness shall be 1/4 in. (6 mm) min. for t = 1 in. NF-4500 BRAZING
(25 mm) and shall be increased 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for each addi-
tional 3/8 in. (10 mm) of t but need not exceed 1/2 in. (13 mm). NF-4510 RULES FOR BRAZING
(d) When T exceeds t, W shall be increased by an additional 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm) for each 3/8 in. (10 mm) of T over t , to a maximum of NF-4511 Where Brazing May Be Used
1
/2 in. (13 mm). Furnace brazing is permitted for the construction of
(e) The minimum specified tensile strength of the electrodes used supports in accordance with the rules of this Subsection
for inlay or overlay shall not exceed the minimum specified ten-
provided the following additional requirements are met:
sile strength of the base metal by more than 12 ksi (83 MPa).
(a) Brazing procedures and brazing operators shall be
qualified in accordance with Section IX.
detected by the visual or volumetric method and located (b) Clearance or interference between mating parts
on an interior surface need only be reexamined by the shall be in accordance with the Brazing Procedure
method which initially detected the defect when the inter- Specification.
ior surface is inaccessible for surface examination. (c) Base material shall be limited to material permitted
by NF-2120 and Section IX, PNos. 101 and 102 ferritic
material.
NF-4453 Requirements for Making Repairs to (d) Brazing alloys shall be limited to Section IX, FNo.
Welds 105.
(e) The allowable shear stress shall be 15 ksi (105 MPa)
Excavations in weld metal, when repaired by welding, or 0.4 yield strength of base material [NF-3322.1(b)],
shall meet the requirements of the following whichever is less, and the joint shall be loaded principally
subparagraphs. in shear only.
(f) Postbrazing heat treatment to develop or restore NF-4612 Preheating Methods

base material mechanical properties shall be qualified by
Preheat for welding or thermal cutting, when employed,
test specimens which meet the thickness requirements
may be applied by any method which does not harm the
of Section IX, QB451. The base material test specimens
base material or any weld metal already applied or which
shall be exposed to the same thermal treatment as a
does not introduce deleterious material into the welding
brazed part but need not contain a brazed joint. Postbraz-
area which is harmful to the weld.
ing heat treatment of actual parts or test specimens may
be performed in the same heat cycle as the brazing opera- NF-4613 Interpass Temperatures
tion or in a separate heat cycle. Postbrazing heat treatment
shall not exceed 1,850F (1 010C). Consideration should be given to limitations of inter-
pass temperatures for quenched and tempered material
(g) Brazing alloy shall be preplaced on one side of the
to avoid detrimental effects on the mechanical properties.
joint only. Each production joint shall be visually exam-
ined after brazing. Brazing metal must be continuous on
NF-4620 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
the preplaced brazing metal side and 85% continuous
on the other side. NF-4621 Heating and Cooling Methods
Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) may be accomplished
NF-4512 Brazing Material by any suitable methods of heating and cooling, provided
the required heating and cooling rates, metal temperature,
Where brazing is permitted, the brazing filler material metal temperature uniformity, and temperature control
and fluxes shall conform to the rules covering identifica- are maintained.
tion in NF-2150 and to the following requirements:
(a) The filler material used in brazing shall be a nonfer- NF-4622 PWHT Time and Temperature
rous metal or alloy with a solidus temperature above Requirements
800F (425C) and at least 500F (278C) above the high- NF-4622.1 General Requirements.3 Except as other-
est temperature of the joint in service. wise permitted in NF-4622.7, all welds, including repair
(b) The filler material shall melt and flow freely by ca- welds, shall be postweld heat treated. During postweld
pillary action within the desired temperature range, and heat treatment, the metal temperature shall be maintained
in conjunction with a suitable flux or controlled atmo- within the temperature ranges and for the minimum hold-
sphere the filler material shall wet and adhere to the sur- ing times specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, except as other-
faces to be joined. wise permitted in NF-4622.4(c). PNumber groups in
(c) Fluxes that are fluid and chemically active at the Table NF-4622.1-1 are in accordance with Section IX,
brazing temperature shall be used, when necessary, to QW420. Except as provided in NF-4624.3, PWHT shall
prevent oxidation of the filler metal and the surfaces to be performed in temperaturesurveyed and calibrated
be joined and to promote free flowing of the filler material. furnaces, or PWHT shall be performed with thermocou-
ples in contact with the material or attached to blocks in
contact with the material. In addition, the requirements
of the following subparagraphs shall apply.
NF-4600 HEAT TREATMENT
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-4622.2 TimeTemperature Recordings. Time

NF-4610 WELDING PREHEAT AND INTERPASS temperature recordings of all postweld heat treatments
REQUIREMENTS shall be maintained as quality assurance records in accor-
NF-4611 When Preheat Is Necessary dance with NCA4134.17. Identification on the time
The need for and temperature of preheat are dependent temperature recording shall be to the weld, part, or sup-
on a number of factors, such as the chemical analysis, de- port. A summary of the timetemperature recording may
gree of restraint of the parts being joined, elevated tem- be provided for permanent records in accordance with
perature, physical properties, and material thicknesses. NCA4134.17.
Some practices used for preheating are given in Appendix NF-4622.3 Definition of Nominal Thickness Govern-
D (Section III Appendices) as a general guide for the mate- ing PWHT. The nominal thickness in
rials listed by PNumbers of Section IX. It is cautioned that Table NF-4622.7(b)-1 is the thickness of the weld, the base
preheating suggested in Appendix D (Section III Appen- material, or the thinner of the base materials being joined,
dices) does not necessarily ensure satisfactory completion whichever is least. It is not intended that nominal thick-
of the welded joint and that the preheat requirements for ness include material provided for forming allowance,
individual materials within the PNumber listing may be thinning, or mill overrun when the excess material does
more or less restrictive. The Welding Procedure Specifica- not exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm). For fillet welds, the nominal
tion for the material being welded shall specify the mini- thickness is the throat thickness and, for partial penetra-
mum preheating requirements under the welding tion and material repair welds, the nominal thickness is
procedure qualification requirements of Section IX. the depth of the weld groove or preparation.
Table NF-4622.1-1 13
Mandatory Requirements for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of Welds
Holding Minimum Holding Time at Temperature for Weld Thickness (Nominal)
Temperature
1
PNumber (Sect. Range, F (C) /2 in. (13 mm) Over 1/2 in. (13 mm) to Over 2 in. (50 mm) to
IX, QW420) [Note (1)] or less 2 in. (50 mm) 5 in. (125 mm) Over 5 in. (125 mm)
1, 3 1,1001,250 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 2 hr plus 15 min each 2 hr plus 15 min each
(595675) additional inch (2 h additional inch (2 h plus
plus 0.5 min/mm) 0.5 min/mm) over 2 in.
over 2 in. (50 mm) (50 mm)
4 1,1001,250 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 5 hr plus 15 min each
(595675) additional inch (5 h plus
0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(125 mm)
5A, 5B, 5C, 6 except 1,2501,400 5 hr plus 15 min each
PNo. 6 Gr. 4 (675760) additional inch (5 h plus
30 min. 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
6 Gr. 4 1,0501,150 0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(565620) (125 mm)
7 1,3001,400 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 5 hr plus 15 min each
(125 mm)
9A Gr.1 1,1001,250 5 hr plus 15 min each
30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
9B Gr. 1 1,1001,175 0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(595635) (125 mm)
10A Gr. 1, 10C Gr. 1, 1,1001,250 5 hr plus 15 min each

10F Gr. 1 (595675) additional inch (5 h plus
30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
10I Gr. 1 1,3001,400
(705760) (125 mm)
11A Gr. 1 1,0251,085
(550585)
11A Gr. 4 1,0001,050
30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
(540565)
11A Gr. 5 1,1001,150
(595620)
11B Gr. 1 through 1,0001,100 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
10 (540595)
15E Gr. 1 1,3501,425 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 5 hr plus 15 min each
(125 mm)
PNos. 8, 10H Gr. 1,
34, 42, 43, 45 and
hard surfacing on
PNo. 1 base
PWHT neither required nor prohibited
metal whose
reported carbon
content is not
more than 0.30%
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
GENERAL NOTE: Exemptions to the mandatory requirements of this Table are defined in NF-4622.7.
NOTE:
(1) All temperatures are metal temperatures.
NF-4622.4 Holding Times at Temperature. (3) Base material certified in accordance with
(a) The holding time at temperature as specified in NF-2210 may be postweld heat treated at these lower
Table NF-4622.1-1 shall be based on the nominal thick- minimum temperatures and increased minimum holding
ness of the weld. The holding time need not be continuous. times without recertification. Postweld heat treatment at
It may be an accumulation of the times of multiple post- these lower minimum temperatures and increased mini-
weld heat treatment cycles. mum holding times may also be the tempering operation,
(b) Holding time at temperature in excess of the mini- provided a higher tempering temperature is not required
mum requirements of Table NF-4622.1-1 may be used, by the material specification.
provided that specimens so heat treated are tested in ac- NF-4622.5 PWHT Requirements When Different
cordance with NF-2200, NF-2400, and NF-4300. PNumber Materials Are Joined. When materials of two
(c) Alternatively, when it is impractical to postweld heat different PNumber groups are joined by welding, the ap-
treat at the temperature range specified in plicable postweld heat treatment shall be that specified in
Table NF-4622.1-1, it is permissible to perform the post- Table NF-4622.1-1 for the material requiring the higher
weld heat treatment of certain materials at lower tem- PWHT temperature range.
peratures for longer periods of time in accordance with
Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 and (1) through (3). NF-4622.6 PWHT Requirements for
(1) Except for PNo. 1 materials, when welds in the NonpressureRetaining Parts. When
materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be post- nonpressureretaining material is welded to pressure re-
weld heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, taining material, the postweld heat treatment temperature
the impact test specimens for the welding procedure qua- range of the pressure retaining material shall control.
lification required by NF-4300 shall be made using the NF-4622.7 Exemptions to Mandatory Requirements.
same minimum temperatures and increased minimum Postweld heat treatment in accordance with this Subarti-
holding time. Welding procedures, qualified at the tem- cle is not required for
perature range and minimum holding time specified in (a) nonferrous materials
Table NF-4622.1-1 and at the lower minimum tempera- (b) welds exempted in Table NF-4622.7(b)-1
ture and increased minimum holding time permitted by (c) welds subjected to temperatures above the PWHT
Table NF-4622.4(c)-1, are also qualified for any tempera- temperature range specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, pro-
ture in between. When such an inbetween temperature is vided the Welding Procedure Specification is qualified in
used, the minimum holding time shall be interpolated accordance with Section IX and the base material and
from Table NF-4622.1-1 and the alternative requirements the deposited weld material has been heat treated at the
of Table NF-4622.4(c)-1. higher temperature
(2) Except for PNo. 1 materials, when welds in the (d) postweld heat treatment is not required for sup-
materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be post- ports constructed of Type 405 material or of Type 410 ma-
weld heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, terial with carbon content not to exceed 0.08%, welded
the welding material certification required by NF-2400 with electrodes that produce an austenitic chromium
shall be made using the same minimum temperatures nickel weld deposit or a nonairhardening nickel
and increased minimum holding time. Welding material chromiumiron weld deposit, provided the plate nominal
certified at the temperature range and minimum holding thickness at the welded joint does not exceed 3/8 in.
time specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, and at the lower (10 mm), and for thicknesses over 3/8 in. to 1 1/2 in.
minimum temperatures and increased minimum holding (10 mm to 38 mm), provided a preheat of 450F
time permitted by Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 is also certified (230C) is maintained during welding and the joints are
for any temperature in between. completely radiographed
NF-4623 PWHT Heating and Cooling Rate

--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 Requirements

Alternative Holding Temperatures and Times Above 800F (425C), the rate of heating and cooling in
Alternative
any hourly interval shall not exceed 400F (220C) di-
Minimum Holding vided by the maximum thickness in inches of the material
Material Temperatures, Alternative Minimum being heat treated, but shall not exceed 400F (220C) and
PNumbers F (C) Holding Times need not be less than 100F (56C) in any hourly interval.
1, 3, 9A Gr. 1, 9B 1,050 (565) 2 hr/in. (4 min/mm) thick During the heating and cooling period there shall not be a
Gr. 1 greater variation in temperature than 250F (140C) with-
1, 3, 9A Gr. 1, 1,000 (540) 4 hr/in. (8 min/mm) thick in any 15 ft (4.5 m) interval of weld length. The exceptions
10A Gr. 1, 9B
of (a) and (b) are permitted.
Gr. 1
(a) PNo. 6 material may be cooled in air from the post-
GENERAL NOTE: All other requirements of NF-4622 shall apply. weld heat treatment holding temperature specified in
Table NF-4622.1-1.
Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT
PNumber Max. Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Reqd, F (C)
1 All welds where the materials 11/4 in. (32 mm) and less 0.30 or less
being joined are 11/2 in. Over 11/4 in. (32 mm) to 11/2 in. 0.30 or less 200 (95)
(38 mm) and less (38 mm)
3
/4 in. (19 mm) or less Over 0.30
Over 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 11/2 in. Over 0.30 200 (95)
(38 mm)
Fillet, partial penetration, and 3
/4 in. (19 mm) or less 200 (95)
repair welds in material over
11/2 in. (38 mm)
1
3 except Gr. 3 All welds /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
1
4 All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or less or tubes with nominal
O.D. 4.5 in. (114 mm) or less
and attachment welds
1
5A, 5B, 5C All welds in pipes or tubes with /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 300 (150)
maximum specified chromium
3.00% or less, NPS 4 (DN 100)
or less pipe, and nominal O.D.
4.5 in. (114 mm) or less tubes
6 (for Type Type 405 and 410S welded with 3
/8 in. (10 mm) or less 0.08 or less
410S) or 7 Gr. ANo. 8, ANo. 9, or FNo. 43
1 (for Type filler metal
405)
9A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
qualification is made using
equal or greater thickness base
material than the production
weld [Note (3)]
Attachment welds joining 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material
to pressureretaining material
over 5/8 in. (16 mm)
All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) 1/2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or less or tubes with nominal
O.D. 4.5 in. (114 mm) and less
9B Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
weld [Note (3)]
Attachment welds joining 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
to pressure retaining material
Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT (Cont'd)
PNumber Max. Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Reqd, F (C)
10A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
weld
1
Attachment welds joining /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
to pressure retaining material
1
All welds in pipes or tubes to /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
pressure retaining material
10C Gr. 1 All welds in materials 11/2 in. 11/4 in. (32 mm) or less 0.30 or less
(38 mm) and less
Attachment welds joining Over 11/4 in. (32 mm) 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material to 11/2 in. (38 mm)
to pressure retaining material 1/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
over 11/4 in. (32 mm)
Groove or fillet welds attaching 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
nozzle connections not over
2 in. (50 mm) finished I.D. in
material over 11/4 in. (32 mm),
provided ligaments do not
require an increased shell or
head thickness
10I Gr. 1 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less
(13 mm) and less
11A Gr. 1 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
(13 mm) and less
11A Gr. 4 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 250 (120)
(13 mm) and less
11B Gr. 1 All welds in materials 1/2 in. 1
through Gr. 10 (13 mm) and less
GENERAL NOTE: The exemptions noted in this table do not apply to the following:
(1) electron beam welds in ferritic materials over 1/8 in. (3 mm) in thickness
(2) inertia and friction welds in material of any thickness of PNo. 3, PNo. 4, PNo. 5, PNo. 7 (except for Types 405
and 410S), PNo. 10, and PNo. 11 materials
NOTES:
(1) Where the thickness of material is identified in the Type of Weld column, it is the thickness of the base material at
the welded joint.
(2) Carbon level of the materials being joined.
(3) Weld Procedure Qualification coupon need not exceed 1.5 in. (38 mm) in thickness.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) For PNo. 7 materials, the cooling rate at tempera- NF-4700 REQUIREMENTS FOR BOLTED
tures above 1,200F (650C) shall not exceed 100F/hr CONSTRUCTION
(56C/hr) after which the rate of cooling shall be suffi-
ciently rapid to prevent embrittlement. NF-4710 BOLTING AND THREADING
NF-4711 Thread Engagement
The threads of all bolts or studs shall be engaged for the
NF-4624 Methods of Postweld Heat Treatment full length of thread in the load carrying nut unless other-
The postweld heat treatment shall be performed in ac- wise specified in the Design Documents.
cordance with the requirements of one of the following
NF-4712 Thread Lubricants
subparagraphs.
Any lubricant or compound used in threaded joints shall
NF-4624.1 Furnace Heating One Heat. Heating be suitable for the service conditions and shall not react
the support or item in a closed furnace in one heat is the unfavorably with any support element material. Contact
preferred procedure and should be used whenever practi- surfaces within frictiontype joints shall be free of
cal. The furnace atmosphere shall be controlled so as to lubricants.
avoid excessive oxidation, and direct impingement of
flame on the support or item is prohibited. NF-4713 Removal of Thread Lubricants
All threading lubricants or compounds shall be removed
NF-4624.2 Furnace Heating More Than One Heat.
from surfaces which are to be welded.
The support or item may be heated in more than one heat
in a furnace, provided the furnace atmosphere control re- NF-4720 BOLTING
quirements of NF-4624.1 apply and overlap of the heated
sections of the support or item is at least 5 ft (1.5 m). NF-4721 Bolt Holes
When this procedure is used, the portion of the support For the purpose of this Article, high strength bolts shall
or item outside the furnace shall be shielded so that the be considered those with specified minimum yield
temperature gradient is not harmful. The cross section strength greater than 80 ksi (550 MPa). Bolt holes shall
where the support or item projects from the furnace shall meet the requirements of (a) through (e).
not intersect a structural discontinuity. (a) Holes for nonfitted bolts shall meet the require-
ments of Table NF-4721(a)-1. For anchor bolts set in con-
NF-4624.3 Local Heating. Welds may be locally post- crete or concrete expansion anchor, the hole sizes
weld heat treated when it is not practical to heat treat the indicated in this Subsection may be increased by 1/16 in.
entire support or item. Local postweld heat treatment (1.5 mm). When the bolt hole size is 1/8 in. (3 mm) larger
shall consist of heating a circumferential band around than the bolt, and the bolt is 1/2 in. (13 mm) or smaller,
the support or item at temperatures within the ranges standard washers shall be used.
specified in this Subarticle. The minimum width of the (b) Oversized or slotted bolt holes may be used with
controlled band at each side of the weld, on the face of high strength bolts 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter and larger,
the greatest weld width, shall be the thickness of the weld except as restricted in (1), (2), and (3).
or 2 in. (50 mm), whichever is less. The temperature of the (1) Oversized holes shall not exceed the requirements
support or item from the edge of the controlled band out- of Table NF-4721(b)-1. They may be used in any or all
ward shall be gradually diminished so as to avoid harmful plies of frictiontype connections. Hardened washers shall
thermal gradients. This procedure may also be used for be installed over exposed oversized holes.
postweld heat treatment after repairs. (2) Shortslotted holes shall not be wider than per-
mitted by (a) and shall not have a length exceeding the
NF-4624.4 Internal Heating. The support or item
oversize diameter allowed in (1) by more than 1/16 in.
may be heated internally by any appropriate means and
with adequate indicating and recording temperature de-
vices to aid in the control and maintenance of a uniform
distribution of temperature in the support or item. Pre- Table NF-4721(a)-1
vious to this operation, the support or item should be fully Bolt Hole Sizes
enclosed with insulating material. Bolt Size Hole Size
1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm)
NF-4660 HEAT TREATMENT OF ELECTROSLAG 11/8 in. to 2 in. (28 mm to 50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1/8 in.
WELDS (3 mm)
>2 in. (50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 3/16 in.
Electroslag welds in ferritic material over 1 1/2 in. (5 mm)
(38 mm) in nominal thickness at the joints shall be given
a grain refining heat treatment.
of high strength bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20,

Table NF-4721(b)-1
a beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack
Tolerances on Oversized Holes
of parallelism.
Bolt Size Hole Size (b) Bolts loaded in pure shear shall not have threads lo-
7/8 in. (22 mm) Bolt diameter plus 3/16 in. (5 mm) cated in the load bearing part of the shank unless per-
1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1/4 in. (6 mm) mitted by the Design Specifications.
> 1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus 5/16 in. (8 mm)
NF-4723 Precautions Before Bolting
All parts assembled for bolting shall have contact sur-
faces free from scale, chips, or other deleterious material.
(1.5 mm). They may be used in any or all plies of friction Surfaces and edges to be joined shall be smooth, uniform,
type or bearingtype connections. The slots may be used and free from fins, tears, cracks, and other defects which
without regard to direction of loading in frictiontype con- would degrade the strength of the joint.
nections, but shall be normal to the direction of the load in
NF-4724 Bolt Tension
bearingtype connections. Hardened washers shall be in-
stalled over exposed shortslotted holes. All high strength structural bolts shall be preloaded to a
(3) Longslotted holes shall not be wider than per- value not less than that given in the Design Specifications.
mitted by (a) and shall not have a length which exceeds Preloading shall be monitored by the turn of nut method,
21/2 times the bolt diameter. In frictiontype connections, by properly calibrated wrenches, by load indicating
the longslotted holes may be used without regard to di- washers, or by direct extension indicators. Bolts preloaded
rection of loading, provided the stress on the bolts does by means of a calibrated wrench shall be installed with a
not exceed 75% of the allowable working stress given in hardened washer under the nut or bolt head, whichever
NF-3000. In bearingtype connections, the long diameter is the element turned in preloading. Hardened washers
of the slot shall be normal to the direction of loading. Long are required under the bolt head and the nut when the di-
slotted holes may be used in only one of the connected rect extension or load indicating washer method is used.
parts of either a frictiontype or bearingtype connection Hardened washers are not required when bolts are pre-
at an individual faying surface. Structural plate washers loaded by the turn of nut method, except that hardened
or a continuous bar not less than 5/16 in. (8 mm) in thick- washers are required under the nut and bolt head when
ness shall be used to cover long slots that are in the outer the bolts are used to connect material having a specified
plies of joints. These washers or bars shall have a size suf- yield strength less than 40 ksi (270 MPa).
ficient to cover the slot completely after installation and
NF-4725 Locking Devices
shall meet the requirements of NF-3000.
NF-4725.1 Types of Locking Devices. Threaded fas-
(c) Except as specified in (d), holes may be punched,
teners shall be provided with locking devices to prevent
provided the thickness of the material is not greater than
loosening during service. Elastic stop nuts and thread
the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 in. (3 mm). When
locking compounds (when compatible with service condi-
the thickness of the material is greater than the nominal
tions), lock nuts, including full or jam, slotted, drilled and
diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 in. (3 mm), holes shall be
wired, free spinning and prevailing torque are all accepta-
drilled, subpunched, and reamed, or thermally cut. Ther-
ble locking devices. Upset threads by cold working or tack
mal cutting shall not be used unless the load bearing sur-
welding may serve as locking devices. Internally and ex-
faces are machined or ground smooth. For subpunched
ternally toothed washers, and disk and helical spring lock
holes, the die shall be at least 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) smaller than
washers shall not be used as locking devices.
the nominal diameter of the bolt.
(d) Bolt holes in material over 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick hav- NF-4725.2 Preloading of High Strength Fasteners.
ing a specified minimum yield strength greater than 80 ksi Preloading threaded fasteners made of material with a
(550 MPa) shall be drilled. yield strength of 80 ksi (550 MPa) or greater, loaded in
tension, to a value at least 20% above the maximum load
(e) For bolts not subjected to shear, the limits for over-
on the fastener for the specified loading conditions, lim-
sized and slotted holes in (d) may be increased if structur-
ited to 70% of the specified minimum tensile strength of
al plate washers or continuous bars which meet the
the fastener material satisfies the requirement for locking.
requirements of NF-3000 are provided.
NF-4725.3 Preloading of NonHigh Strength Fas-
teners. When locking devices cannot be installed because
of assembly geometry, preloading of the threaded fasten-
NF-4722 Bolted Connections
ers in an assembly with fastener material of a yield
(a) Surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head strength below 80 ksi (550 MPa) is an acceptable method
and nut shall not have a slope of more than 1:20 with re- for locking provided the resulting preload is at least 20%
spect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface above the maximum load on the fastener for the specified
loading conditions, but is limited to 70% of the specified calibrated wrenches, direct extension indicators, or the
minimum tensile strength of the fastener. The threaded as- turn of the nut method. The results of the test, required
sembly shall be tested for the dynamic loading conditions preload, and specified thread lubrication shall be provided
specified in the Design Specification, and the established in the Design Report.
preload shall be verified on the assembly by properly
ARTICLE NF-5000
EXAMINATION
NF-5100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NF-5114 RoundingOff of Weld Measurements

EXAMINATION In order to properly evaluate specified dimensional
NF-5110 PROCEDURES, QUALIFICATIONS, AND sizes, measurements shall be rounded off to the nearest
1
EVALUATIONS /32 in. (0.8 mm) for undercut and 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for weld
size. Other dimensions of welds shall be rounded off to the
NF-5111 General Requirements nearest 1/8 in. (3 mm) or as otherwise specified in the de-
Nondestructive examinations shall be conducted in ac- sign documents.
cordance with the examination methods of Section V, ex-
cept as they may be modified by the requirements of NF-5120 Time of Examination of Welds
this Article. Radiographic examination shall be in accor- Examinations of welds required by NF-5200 shall be
dance with Section V, Article 2, except that the geometric performed at the times stipulated in (a) and (b) during
unsharpness shall not exceed the limits of T274.2. Ultra- fabrication and installation.
sonic examination shall be in accordance with Section V, (a) Radiography of welds may be performed prior to
Article 4; magnetic particle examination shall be in accor- any postweld heat treatment.
dance with Section V, Article 7; liquid penetrant examina- (b) Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination
tion shall be in accordance with Section V, Article 6; and shall be performed after any postweld heat treatment, ex-
visual examination shall be in accordance with Section V, cept that welds in PNo. 1 material may be examined be-
Article 9. The examinations required by this Article or fore or after postweld heat treatment.
by reference to this Article shall be performed by person-
nel who have been qualified as required by this Article.
The results of the examinations shall be evaluated in ac- NF-5200 REQUIRED EXAMINATION OF
cordance with the acceptance standards of this Article. WELDS
NF-5210 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 1 SUPPORT
NF-5112 Nondestructive Examination Procedures WELDS
All nondestructive examinations required by this Article NF-5211 Scope
shall be performed in accordance with detailed written The requirements of this subsubarticle shall apply to all
procedures which have been proven by actual demonstra- Class 1 supports except that supports for Class 1 piping,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tion to the satisfaction of a Level III Examiner. The proce- NPS 2 (DN 50) and less, may be examined by the rules
dures shall comply with the appropriate Article of Section of NF-5220.
V for the particular examination method. The digitization
of radiographic film and radioscopic images shall meet NF-5212 Primary Member Welded Joints
the requirements of Section V, Article 2, Mandatory Ap-
(a) All full penetration butt welded joints in primary
pendix III, Digital Image Acquisition, Display and Storage
members shall be examined by the radiographic method.
for Radiography and Radioscopy. Written procedures and
(b) All other welded joints in primary members shall be
records of demonstration of procedure capability and per-
examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
sonnel qualification shall be maintained on file as detailed
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only
in the Certificate Holders Quality Program. At least one
be visually examined.
copy of the procedure shall be readily available to all ap-
plicable nondestructive examination personnel for refer- NF-5213 Secondary Member Welded Joints
ence and use.
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam-
ined by the visual method.
NF-5113 PostExamination Cleaning
Following any nondestructive examination in which ex- NF-5214 Special Requirements
amination material is applied to the piece, the piece shall For weldments that impose loads in the through thick-
be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with applicable ma- ness direction of primary members 1 in. and greater in
terial or procedure specifications. thickness, the base material beneath the weld shall be
ultrasonically examined, when required by NF-4440, over NF-5232 Secondary Member Welded Joints
100% of the referenced area using the procedure of
SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the accep-
tance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
block representative of the primary member shall be used.
The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in. NF-5234 Special Requirements
(6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one For weldments that impose loads in the through thick-
half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and
being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld
be established. shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by
NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the pro-
NF-5220 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 2 AND MC cedure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the
SUPPORT WELDS acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
NF-5221 Primary Member Welded Joints block representative of the primary member shall be used.
(a) All butt welded joints in primary members shall be The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in.
examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle (6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one
method. half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member
(b) All partial penetration or fillet welds in primary being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall
members that have a groove depth or throat dimensions be established.
greater than 1 in. (25 mm) and Twelded joints welded
with throat dimensions of 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater shall NF-5240 INERTIA AND CONTINUOUS DRIVE
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle FRICTION WELDS
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only
(a) When radiographic examination is required by this
be visually examined.
Article, inertia and continuous drive friction welds shall
(c) All primary welds exclusive of those described in (a)
also be examined by the ultrasonic method to verify bond-
and (b) shall be examined by the visual method.
ing over the entire area.
NF-5222 Secondary Member Welded Joints (b) The materials used shall be those assigned a
PNumber by Section IX, but shall not include rimmed or
semikilled steel.
(c) One of the two parts to be joined must be held in a
NF-5224 Special Requirements fixed position and the other part rotated. The two faces
to be joined must be symmetrical with respect to the axis
For weldments that impose loads in the through thick- of rotation.
ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and
(d) The weld between the two members shall be a full
greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld
penetration weld.
shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by
NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the pro-
cedure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the
acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration NF-5300 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
block representative of the primary member shall be used. NF-5320 RADIOGRAPHIC ACCEPTANCE
The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in. STANDARDS
(6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-5321 Evaluation of Indications
half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member
being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall Indications shown on the radiographs of welds and
be established. characterized as imperfections are unacceptable under
the following conditions:
NF-5230 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 3 SUPPORT (a) any indication characterized as a crack or zone of in-
WELDS complete fusion or penetration
NF-5231 Primary Member Welded Joints (b) any other elongated indication which has a length
(a) Primary member welded joints that have a groove greater than
depth or throat dimension greater than 1 in. (25 mm) shall (1) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3/4 in. (19 mm), inclusive
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle (2) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 21/4 in. (56 mm),
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only inclusive
be visually examined. (3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (56 mm)
(b) Primary welded joints exclusive of those described where t is the thickness of the thinner portion of the
in (a) shall be examined by the visual method. weld
(c) internal root weld conditions are acceptable when reexamination. After an indication has been verified to
the density change as indicated in the radiograph is not be nonrelevant, it is not necessary to reinvestigate repeti-
abrupt; elongated indications on the radiograph at either tive nonrelevant indications of the same type. Nonrelevant
edge of such conditions shall be unacceptable, as provided indications which would mask defects are unacceptable.
in (b) (c) Relevant indications are indications which result
(d) any group of aligned indications having an aggregate from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
length greater than t in a length of 12t unless the mini- which the length is more than three times the width.
mum distance between successive indications exceeds Rounded indications are indications which are circular
6L , in which case the aggregate length is unlimited, L or elliptical with the length equal to or less than three
being the length of the largest indication times the width.
(e) rounded indications are not a factor in the accept-
ability of welds that are radiographed NF-5342 Acceptance Standards
NF-5330 ULTRASONIC ACCEPTANCE (a) Only imperfections producing indications with ma-
STANDARDS jor dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be con-
sidered relevant imperfections.
All imperfections which produce a response greater (b) Imperfections producing the following indications
than 20% of the reference level shall be investigated to are unacceptable:
the extent that the operator can determine the shape, (1) any cracks or linear indications
identity, and location of all such imperfections and evalu- (2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than
ate them in terms of the acceptance standards as given in 3
/16 in. (5 mm)
(a) and (b).
(3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa-
(a) Imperfections are unacceptable if the indications ex- rated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge
ceed the reference level amplitude and have lengths
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in. 2
exceeding
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimension of this
(1) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3/4 in. (19 mm), inclusive
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken
(2) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 21/4 in. (56 mm),
in the most unfavorable location relative to the indications
inclusive
being evaluated
(3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (56 mm) where t
is the thickness of the weld being examined; if a weld joins
NF-5350 LIQUID PENETRANT ACCEPTANCE
two members having different thicknesses at the weld, t is
STANDARDS
the thinner of these two thicknesses.
(b) Indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion, or NF-5351 Evaluation of Indications
incomplete penetration are unacceptable regardless of (a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are re-
length. vealed by bleeding out of the penetrant; however, loca-
lized surface discontinuities such as may occur from
NF-5332 Acceptance Standards for Laminar machining marks or surface conditions may produce simi-
Indications lar indications which are not relevant.
Any indication detected in the base material beneath the (b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant
weld which is of a laminar type is unacceptable if the indi- shall be reexamined to verify whether or not actual defects
cation cannot be contained within a circle having a dia- are present. Surface conditioning may precede the reexa-
meter equal to onehalf of the thickness of the thinner of mination. Nonrelevant indications and broad areas of pig-
the members joined. mentation which would mask defects are unacceptable.
(c) Relevant indications are indications which result
NF-5340 MAGNETIC PARTICLE ACCEPTANCE from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
STANDARDS which the length is more than three times the width.
NF-5341 Evaluation of Indications Rounded indications are indications which are circular
or elliptical with the length equal to or less than three
(a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are re-
times the width.
vealed by the retention of the examination medium. All in-
dications are not necessarily defects, however, since
NF-5352 Acceptance Standards
certain metallurgical discontinuities and magnetic perme-
ability variations may produce similar indications which (a) Only imperfections producing indications with ma-
are not relevant. jor dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be con-
(b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant sidered relevant imperfections.
shall be reexamined by the same or other nondestructive (b) Imperfections producing the following indications
examination methods to verify whether or not actual de- are unacceptable:
fects are present. Surface conditioning may precede the (1) any cracks or linear indications
(2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than (g) Only surface porosity whose major surface dimen-
3
/16 in. (5 mm) sion exceeds 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be considered relevant.
(3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa- Fillet and groove welds that contain surface porosity are
rated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge unacceptable if
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in. 2 (1) the sum of diameters of random porosity exceeds
3
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimensions of this /8 in. (10 mm) in any linear inch of weld or 3/4 in. (19 mm)
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken in in any 12 in. (300 mm) of weld or
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the most unfavorable location relative to the indications (2) four or more pores are aligned and the pores are
being evaluated separated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less, edge to edge
(h) The length and location of welds shall be as specified
NF-5360 VISUAL ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS on the detail drawing, except that weld lengths may be
longer than specified. For weld lengths less than 3 in.
When visual examination is performed in accordance
(75 mm), the permissible underlength is 1/8 in. (3 mm),
with NF-5200, the acceptance standards shall be in accor-
and for welds 3 in. (75 mm) and longer, the permissible
dance with the following:
underlength is 1/4 in. (6 mm). Intermittent welds shall be
(a) Cracks are unacceptable.
spaced within 1 in. (25 mm) of the specified location.
(b) A fillet weld is permitted to be less than the size spe-
(i) Arc strikes and associated blemishes on the weld or
cified by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth the length of the
in the base material are acceptable provided no cracking is
weld. Oversized fillet welds are acceptable if the oversized
visually detected.
weld does not interfere with mating parts.
(j) Slag whose major surface dimension is 1/8 in. (3 mm)
(c) In fillet welds, incomplete fusion of 3/8 in. (10 mm) in
or less is irrelevant. Isolated surface slag that remains
any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1/4 in. (6 mm) in welds
after weld cleaning and does not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm) in
less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is acceptable. For groove
its major surface dimension is acceptable. [Slag is consid-
welds, incomplete fusion is not acceptable. For fillet and
ered to be isolated when it does not occur more frequently
groove welds, rounded end conditions that occur in weld-
than once per weld or more than once in a 3 in. (75 mm)
ing (starts and stops) shall not be considered indications
weld segment.] Spatter remaining after the cleaning op-
of incomplete fusion and are irrelevant.
eration is acceptable.
(d) Overlap is acceptable provided the criteria for weld
size and fusion can be satisfied. When fusion in the overlap
length cannot be verified, an overlap length of 3/8 in.
(10 mm) in any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1/4 in. NF-5500 QUALIFICATIONS AND
(6 mm) in welds less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is CERTIFICATION OF
acceptable. NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
(e) Craters are acceptable when the criteria for weld PERSONNEL
size are met. Craters that occur outside the specified weld
length are irrelevant provided there are no cracks.
(f) Requirements for acceptability of undercuts are as Organizations performing Code required nondestruc-
follows: tive examinations shall use personnel competent and
(1) For material 3/8 in. (10 mm) and less nominal knowledgeable to the degree specified by NF-5520. When
thickness, undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) on one side these services are subcontracted by the Certificate Holder
of the member for the full length of the weld, or 1/32 in. or Quality System Certificate Holder, he shall verify the
(0.8 mm) on one side for onehalf the length of the weld, qualification of personnel to the requirements of
and 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth the length of the weld NF-5520. All nondestructive examinations required by
on the same side of the member is acceptable. For mem- this Subsection shall be performed by and the results eval-
bers welded on both sides where undercut exists in the uated by qualified nondestructive examination personnel.
same plane of a member, the cumulative lengths of under-
cut are limited to the lengths of undercut allowed on one NF-5520 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
side. Meltthrough that results in a hole in the base metal CERTIFICATION, AND VERIFICATION
is unacceptable.
(2) For material greater than 3/8 in. (10 mm) nominal
NF-5521 Qualification Procedure
thickness, undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) for the full (a) Personnel performing nondestructive examinations
length of the weld and 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth shall be qualified in accordance with the recommended
the length of the weld on both sides of the member is ac- guidelines of SNTTC1A.23,24 The ACCP qualified and cer-
ceptable. When either welds or undercut exist only on one tified NDE Personnel option shall not be used for Section
side of the member or are not in the same plane, the allow- III. The Employers25 written practice required by para-
able undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) may be increased graph 5 of SNTTC1A shall identify Employer require-
to 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for the full length of the weld. ments relative to the recommended guidelines. The
recommended guidelines of SNTTC1A shall be consid- individual may independently accept the results of non-
ered minimum requirements except as modified in (1) destructive examinations when the specific acceptance
through (5). criteria are defined in the written instructions.
(1) Qualification of level III nondestructive examina- (b) For nondestructive examination methods not cov-
tion personnel shall be by examination. ered by SNTTC1A documents, personnel shall be quali-
(-a) The basic and method examinations, paras. fied to comparable levels of competency by subjection to
8.8.1 and 8.8.2 of SNTTC1A, may be prepared and admi- comparable examinations on the particular method
nistered by the Employer, ASNT, or an outside agency. involved.
(-b) The specific examinations, para. 8.8.3 of SNT (c) The emphasis shall be on the individuals ability to
TC1A, shall be prepared and administered by the Employ- perform the nondestructive examination in accordance
er or an outside Agency. The employer or outside agency wi th the ap plicable procedure for the intended
administering the specific examination shall identify the application.
minimum grade requirement in a written program when (d) For nondestructive examination methods that con-
the basic and method examinations have been adminis- sist of more than one operation or type, it is permissible
tered by ASNT which issues grades on a pass/fail basis. to use personnel qualified to perform one or more opera-
In this case, the minimum grade for the specific examinations. As an example, one person may be used who is qua-
tion may not be less than 80%. lified to conduct radiographic examination and another
(2) The written practice identified in paragraph 5 of may be used who is qualified to interpret and evaluate
SNTTC1A and the procedures used for examination of the radiographic film.
personnel shall be referenced in the Employers Quality
Program. NF-5522 Certification of Personnel
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3) The number of hours of training and experience (a) The Employer retains responsibility for the ade-
for nondestructive examination personnel who perform quacy of the program and is responsible for certification
only one operation of a nondestructive examination meth- of Level I, II, and III nondestructive examination
od that consists of more than one operation, or perform a personnel.
nondestructive examination of limited scope, may be less (b) When ASNT is the outside agency administering the
than that recommended in Table 6.3.1 A and Table 6.3.1 B Level III basic and method examinations
of SNTTC1A. The training and experience times shall be [NF-5521(a)(1)(-a)], the Employer may use a letter from
described in the written practice and any limitations or re- ASNT as evidence on which to base the certification.
strictions placed on the certification shall be described in
(c) When an outside agency is the examining agent for
the written practice and on the certificate.
Level III qualification of the Employers personnel, the ex-
(-a) The minimum classroom training time identi-
amination results shall be included with the Employers
fied in Table 6.3.1 A and Table 6.3.1 B of SNTTC1A for Le-
record.
vel II certification may be reduced from 8 hr and 16 hr to
4 hr and 8 hr, respectively, for visual examination NF-5523 Verification of Nondestructive
personnel. Examination Personnel Certification
(4) For visual examination, the Jaeger Number 1 let-
ters shall be used in lieu of the Jaeger Number 2 letters The Certificate Holder has the responsibility to verify
specified in paragraph 8.2.1 of SNTTC1A. The use of the qualification and certification of nondestructive exam-
equivalent type and size letters is permitted. ination personnel employed by Material Organizations
(5) An NDE Level I individual shall be qualified to qualified by them in accordance with NCA3820, and sub-
properly perform specific setups, specific calibrations, contractors who provide nondestructive examination ser-
specific NDE, and specific evaluations for acceptance or re- vices to them.
jection determinations according to written instructions
and to record results. The NDE Level I individual shall re- NF-5530 RECORDS
ceive the necessary instruction and supervision from a Personnel qualification records identified in para. 9.4 of
certified NDE Level II or Level III individual. A Level I SNTTC1A shall be retained by the Employer.
ARTICLE NF-8000
CERTIFICATES OF AUTHORIZATION AND CERTIFICATION
DOCUMENTS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-8100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NCA8000 and shall apply only to those items fabricated
under an NCA4000 Quality Assurance Program. Inspec-
The requirements for Certificates of Authorization and tion by an ANI and Certification Mark are not required
certification documents (Certificate of Compliance and for supports.
NS1 Certificate of Conformance) shall be as specified in
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-I
(In preparation)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-II

DESIGN OF SINGLE ANGLE MEMBERS
ARTICLE NF-II-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-II-1100 SCOPE NF-II-1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

This Mandatory Appendix provides design rules for sin- The requirements of Article NF-3000 shall be met ex-
gle angle members that are used in Section III, Division 1 cept as modified by this Appendix.
Class 1, 2, 3, and MC linear support construction.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-II-2000
NOMENCLATURE
Nomenclature is given in NF-3313 except as noted in

NF-II-3200 to NF-II-3600.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,``
ARTICLE NF-II-3000
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
where
NF-II-3100 GENERAL
Kl/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced
Single angle members are designed in accordance with length as defined in NF-3322.2
NF-II-3200 to NF-II-3600.
Cc =
NF-II-3200 TENSION The reduction factor Q shall be

The allowable tension stress F t shall not exceed 0.6S y (U.S. Customary Units)
on the gross area A g , nor 0.50S u on the effective net area
when
Ae.
(a) For members connected by bolting, the net area and 5
effective net area shall be determined from NF-3322.8.
(b) When the load is transmitted by longitudinal or when
combination of longitudinal and transverse welds through
just one leg of the angle, the effective net area shall be 6
1
when
(c) When the load is transmitted by transverse weld
through just one leg of the angle, A e is the area of the con- 7
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
nected leg.
(SI Units)
when
NF-II-3300 SHEAR
5
The allowable shear stress due to flexure and torsion
shall be when
2 6
when
NF-II-3400 COMPRESSION
7
The allowable compressive stress on the gross area of
axially compressed members shall be
where
when Kl/r < C c
b = full width of the longest angle leg
S y = specified minimum yield strength, ksi (MPa)
t = thickness of angle
3
For short, thin, or unequal leg angles, flexuraltorsional
buckling may produce a significant reduction in strength.
In such cases, the allowable stress shall be determined
when Kl/R > Cc by the previous equations substituting an equivalent slen-
derness ratio (Kl/r )equiv for Kl /r
4
where F e is the elastic buckling strength for the flexural determine the limiting combination of l /b and b /t for
torsional mode. which F b is equal to 0.66S y . For equal leg angles not meet-
(a) For equal leg angles with w as the axis of symmetry ing the limits of Figure NF-II-3510 and for unequal leg an-
gles, the bending stress is limited to the minimum
allowable value F b determined from NF-II-3511,
NF-II-3512, and NF-II-3513 as applicable.
NF-II-3511
(b) For unequal leg angles, F e is the lowest root of the
cubic equation To prevent local buckling when the tip of an angle leg is
in compression.
when
when
where
E = modulus of elasticity, ksi (MPa)
G = shear modulus, ksi (MPa) 9
Iz , Iw = moment of inertia about principal axes, in. 4
(mm4) when
J = torsional constant = 2b t 3/3 = t 2A /3, in.4 (mm4)
zo , wo = coordinates of the shear center with respect to
the centroid, in. (mm) 10
= z o 2 + w o 2 + (I z + I w )/A , i n .2 (m m 2);
Iz + Iw = Ix + Iy where
H = b = full width of angle leg in compression, in. (mm)
Q = stress reduction factor per eqs. NF-II-3400(5)
Fez = through NF-II-3400(7) with b as defined above
An angle leg shall be considered to be in compression if
the tip of the angle leg is in compression, in which case the
Few =
calculated stress f b at the tip of this leg is used.
Fej = NF-II-3512
A = cross-sectional area For the tip of an angle leg in tension
Kz ,Kw = effective length factors 11
l = unbraced length
rz , rw = radii of gyration about principal axes
For members whose design is based on compressive NF-II-3513
force, the largest effective slenderness ratio preferably To prevent lateraltorsional buckling, the maximum
should not exceed 200. compression stress shall not exceed
when F o b S y --`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-II-3500 FLEXURE 12
The allowable bending stress limits of NF-II-3510 shall
when F o b > S y
be used as indicated in NF-II-3520 and NF-II-3530.
13
NF-II-3510 ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS
The allowable bending stress, F b , is a function of the un-
where
braced length to width ratio (l /b ) and the width to thick-
ness ration (b /t) of the single angle member. F b = allowable bending stress at leg tip, ksi (MPa)
For equal leg angles fabricated from materials with a F o b = elastic lateraltorsional buckling stress, from
minimum specified yield strength of 36 ksi (250 MPa) NF-II-3520 or NF-II-3530 as applicable, ksi (MPa)
and 50 ksi (345 MPa), Figure NF-II-3510 may be used to S y = yield stress, ksi (MPa)
Figure NF-II-3510
Equal Leg Single Angle Limits for F b = 0.66S y
(Reprinted with Permission of AISC)
NF-II-3520 BENDING ABOUT GEOMETRIC AXES

(SI Units)
NF-II-3521
(a) Angle bending members with lateraltorsion re-
14
straint along the length may be designed on the basis of
geometric axis bending with stress limited by the provi-
sions of NF-II-3511 and NF-II-3512. and by b /t provisions in NF-II-3511. When the leg tips are
(b) For equal leg angles if the lateraltorsional restraint in tension, F b is determined only by NF-II-3512.
is only at the point of maximum moment, the stress f b is
C b = 1.75 + 1.05(M 1 /M 2 ) + 0.3(M 1 /M 2 )2 1.5, where
calculated on the basis of geometric axis bending limited
M 1 is the smaller and M 2 the larger end moment
by F b in NF-II-3522.
in the unbraced segment of the beam; (M 1 /M 2 ) is
positive when the moments cause reverse curvature
NF-II-3522 and negative when bent in single curvature. C b shall
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Equal leg angle members without lateraltorsional re- be taken as unity when the bending moment at any
straint subjected to flexure applied about one of the geo- point within an unbraced length is larger than at
metric axes may be designed considering only geometric both ends of its length.
axis bending provided l = unbraced length, in. (mm)
(a) The calculated compressive stress f b , using the geo-
metric axis section modulus, is increased by 25%.
(b) For the angle leg tips in compression, the allowable NF-II-3523
bending stress F b is determined according to NF-II-3513 Unequal leg angle members without lateraltorsional re-
where straint subjected to bending about one of the geometric
axes shall be designed using NF-II-3530.
14
NF-II-3530 BENDING ABOUT PRINCIPAL AXES angles. If the long leg is in compression anywhere
along the unbraced length of the member, use the
Angles without lateraltorsional restraint shall be de-
negative value of B w .
signed considering principal axis bending except for cases
Iw = major principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
covered by NF-II-3522. Bending about both of the princi-
Iz = minor principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
pal axes shall be evaluated using the interaction equations
rz = radius of gyration for minor principal axis, in. (mm)
in NF-3322.1(e)(1).
Sw = section modulus to tip of leg in compression, in.3
(mm3)
NF-II-3531 Equal Leg Angles zo = coordinate along z axis of the shear center with re-
spect to centroid, in. (mm)
(a) Major Axis Bending. The principal bending compres-
sion stress f b w shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3513 (b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress f b z
where shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3511 when leg tips are in
compression and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips are in
(U.S. Customary Units) tension.
15 NF-II-3600 COMBINED STRESSES

NF-II-3610 AXIAL COMPRESSION AND FLEXURE
(SI Units) Members subjected to both axial compression and
bending shall satisfy the requirements of
15 NF-3322.1(e)(1).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-II-3611
and by b /t provisions in NF-II-3511.
(b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress f b z In evaluating eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(20) or
shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3511 when the leg tips are NF-3322.1(e)(1)(22) the maximum compression bending
in compression, and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips are in stresses due to each moment acting alone must be used
tension. even though they may occur at different cross sections
of the member.
NF-II-3532 Unequal Leg Angles NF-II-3612

(a) Major Axis Bending. The principal bending compres- Equation NF-3322.1(e)(1)(21) is to be evaluated at the
sion stress f b w shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3513 critical member support cross section and need not be
where based on the maximum moments along the member
length.
16 Table NF-II-3532-1
B w Values for Angles
Angle Size, in. (mm) B w , in. [(103) m]
(SI Units) 9 4 (225 100) 6.54 (166)
8 6 (200 150) 3.31 (84)
8 4 (200 100) 5.48 (139)
16 7 4 (175 100) 4.37 (111)
6 4 (150 100) 3.14 (80)
6 3.5 (150 89) 3.69 (94)
and by b /t provisions in NF-II-3511 for the compression
5 3.5 (125 89) 2.40 (61)
leg. 5 3 (125 75) 2.99 (76)
4 3.5 (100 89) 0.87 (22)
4 3 (100 75) 1.65 (42)
Bw = 3.5 3 (89 75) 0.87 (22)
3.5 2.5 (89 63) 1.62 (41)
3 2.5 (75 63) 0.86 (22)
3 2 (75 50) 1.56 (40)
= special section property for unequal leg angles, po-
2.5 2 (64 50) 0.85 (22)
sitive for short leg in compression and negative for Equal legs 0.00 (0.00)
long leg in compression, in. (mm)
Table NF-II-3532-1 lists some values for standard
NF-II-3613 NF-II-3615
For members constrained to bend about a geometric For members that do not meet the conditions of
axis with compressive stress and allowable stress deter- NF-II-3613 or NF-II-3614, the evaluation shall be based
mined per NF-II-3521(a), the radius of gyration r b for on principal axis bending according to NF-II-3530, and
F e shall be taken as the geometric axis value. the subscripts x and y in NF-3322.1(e)(1) shall be inter-
preted as the principal axes, w and z , in this Appendix
NF-II-3614 when evaluating the length without lateraltorsional
For equal leg angles without lateraltorsional restraint restraint.
along the length and with bending applied about one of
the geometric axes, the provisions of NF-II-3522 shall ap- NF-II-3620 AXIAL TENSION AND BENDING
ply for the calculated and allowable bending stresses. If Members subjected to both axial tension and bending
NF-II-3521(b) or NF-II-3522 is used for F b , the radius of stresses due to transverse loading shall satisfy the re-
gyration about the axis of bending r b for F e shall be taken quirements of eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(22). Bending stress
as the geometric axis value of r divided by 1.35 in the ab- evaluation shall be as directed by NF-II-3613,
sence of a more detailed analysis. NF-II-3614, and NF-II-3615 for compressive stresses.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-III

ENERGY ABSORBING SUPPORT MATERIAL
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-III-1000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Energy absorbing material of lineartype pipe supports yielding, shall be constructed for services in accordance
designed to Subsection NF which is designed to dissipate with Section III, Division 1, Subsection NF, as modified
energy associated with dynamic piping movements by by this Appendix.
ARTICLE NF-III-2000
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) When plate material is used, it shall not exceed 1 in.

nominal thickness.
(b) Weld repairs of energy absorbing materials shall not Class Normalized As Rolled
be permitted. Class 1, 2, and MC 30F (1C) 70F (20C)
(c) In lieu of NF-2311(a)(3), impact testing shall be in Class 3 0F (18C) 50F (10C)
accordance with NF-2300. For SA-516 material, impact
testing shall be required when the nominal section thick- (d) All other requirements of NF-2000 shall apply.
ness exceed 5/8 in. (16 mm) and the lowest service tem-
perature is less than the values listed below
ARTICLE NF-III-3000
DESIGN
For the design of energy absorbing support material (b) Design Fatigue Curves. Design fatigue curves based
that perform by sustaining strains beyond elastic limits, on testing of prototypical samples of energy absorbers
the following rules shall apply in lieu of those in shall be developed and used in the fatigue design. Samples
NF-3140 and NF-3300. tested shall represent the material used for construction,
(a) Fatigue Design shapes used, and methods of fabrication. The fatigue de-
sign curves shall show a relationship between the ampli-
(1) Energy absorbing support material may be de- tude of strain ( ) and the allowable number of cycles
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
signed by load rating. The load rating of these parts shall (N ). The ordinate shall show the value of strain, , and
provide for a relationship between imposed strains and the abscissa shall show the allowable number of cycles,
the allowable number of cycles. N, calculated as follows:
(2) Cumulative fatigue effects associated with all
strain cyles expected for the life of the energy absorbing
support parts resulting from all service loadings shall be
whichever is smaller, where
evaluated as follows:
N m e a n = mean number of cycles to failure of specimen
tested at strain value,
= maximum deviation
(c) Dead Weight Consideration. Loads induced by the
dead weight effect of a supported piping system should
where not exceed onefifth of the elastic yield load capacity of
N d j = allowable number of cycles read from the design the energy absorbing supports. The elastic yield load shall
fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to be based on the yield strength given in Appendix I (Section
the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic III Appendices) for the material of the energy absorbing
load, j parts.
N t i = allowable number of cycles read from the design (d) Steady State Vibration Consideration. Operational
fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to steady state vibration effects on the energy absorbing sup-
the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic port parts, if present, shall be maintained within the en-
load, i durance limit from the applicable fatigue design curves of
n d j = expected number of cycles associated with dy- Appendix I (Section III Appendices).
namic load, j (e) Piping Design Consideration. The inelastic character-
n t i = expected number of cycles associated with the sup- istics of energy absorbing support parts shall be consid-
ported piping system in going from one service ered in satisfying all design and service loadings for
temperature to another, i which the supported piping is evaluated.
ARTICLE NF-III-4000
FABRICATION
(a) Welding shall not be permitted for fabrication and

installation of energy absorbing support material.
(b) All other requirements of NF-4000 shall apply.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-A

STRUCTURAL BOLT PRELOADING
ARTICLE NF-A-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-A-1100 SCOPE wrench. For turnofthenut it provides a table for re-

quired turns for various diameters and squareness condi-
This Appendix provides general guidance on structural tions of the bolted parts.
bolt preloading of steel to steel joints. AISC specifications AISC also requires that torque wrenches are calibrated
should be followed when using A490 or A325 bolts. For every day that they are used.
other bolting materials, detailed specifications are not The following clarifies why such large variations are ex-
generally available and the following discussion is to be pected from bolt tensioning by use of a torque wrench.
used in understanding the importance of proper tighten- The major consideration in any fastening problem is to
ing, and to help select a reliable method to be employed determine as accurately as possible the best kind of fas-
where detailed specifications are not available. tener which, when properly tightened, will ensure engi-
neering reliability of the end product. Reliability of
threaded fasteners that will be subjected to cyclic/vibra-
NF-A-1200 DISCUSSION tory loads is based largely on the torquetension relation-
ship in which tension (preload as it is commonly called),
The American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) pro- not torque, is the most critical measurement.
vides a rather detailed specification when using A490 or Preload induced in a fastener is best set within an opti-
A325 bolts. The AISC specification provides guidance with mum range which is determined from maximum and mini-
regard to mum values of the variable joint loading. Too little preload
(a) bolt and nut specification will allow stress fluctuations in the joint which lead to fa-
(b) washers tigue failure. Too much preload may cause fracture or
(c) faying surface coatings plastic elongation with resulting loss of clamping force.
(d) surface conditions Several methods are available for measuring preload.
(e) hole types and tolerances These are listed below with cost and anticipated accuracy.
(f) allowable strengths and working stresses
Preload Measuring Method Accuracy (%) Relative Cost
(g) bearing force
Feel (operators judgment) 35 1
(h) prying action Torque wrench 25 11/2
(i) tensile fatigue Turnofthenut 15 3
(j) definition of slip critical joints Loadindicating washers 10 7
Fastener elongation 3 to 5 15
(k) allowable slip load
Strain gages 1 20
(l) reuse of bolts
It provides guidance for installation and tightening, in- GENERAL NOTE: (REF: Industrial Fastener Institute.)
cluding discussion of what is required for a tension cali-
brator, joint assembly for bearing loading, joint assembly
for joints requiring full pretensioning, turnofthenut
tightening, and calibrated torque wrench tightening. Improved accuracy incurs higher cost in assembly, e.g.,
It should be noted that AISC (Ninth Edition) does not re- the use of strain gages would be approximately 20 times
commend use of torque wrenches as the preferred method more expensive than merely relying upon the judgment
of bolt tightening. Rather, it recommends turnofthenut and feel of the operator.
over the torque wrench method. This is true because of Each method possesses certain advantages and disad-
the variations in tension that are expected due to the many vantages with ultimate choice based on a compromise of
variables that are present in tensioning by use of a torque application requirements.
NF-A-1300 BOLT TIGHTENING (PRELOAD where

METHODS) C = helix angle of thread
NF-A-1310 TORQUE WRENCHES R B = effective radius of action of frictional forces on bear-
ing face, in. (mm)(see Figure NF-A-1311)
The use of torque wrenches is the most popular method R T = effective radius of action of frictional forces on
of preload measurement because of simplicity. Because of thread surfaces, in. (mm)
the many interrelated variables that directly or indirectly U B = coefficient of friction at bearing face of nut or bolt
affect friction, such as: surface texture, type of coating or U T = coefficient of friction at thread contact surfaces
finish, amount of lubrication, speed of tightening, etc., it = thread halfangle (30 deg for 60 deg basic thread
is possible to experience as much as 25% variation in form; sec = 1.15)
preload between similar fasteners receiving identical tor-
ques. Closer control of torque wrench calibration can re- For threads used for fasteners, the denominator of the
bracketed term is unity within 1/2%, so
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
duce deviation to 15%.
In all cases, hardened washers should be used beneath
the bolt head or nut (whichever is rotated during tighten- 3
ing) when tightening by torque wrench method.
The approximate values of K 1 , K 2 , and K 3 can be calcu-

lated by inserting typical values such as R B /D = 0.625;
NF-A-1311 Empirical Equations for Tension From U B = U T = 0.15; R T /D = 0.45; sec = 1.15; tan C = 0.04.
Bolt Torque
The following empirical equation is often used to pro-
vide an estimate of the torque required to induce a given
preload in a bolt:
1
where
So, it is observed that K 1 , K 2 , and K 3 contribute roughly
D = nominal bolt size, in. (mm) 50%, 40%, and 10%, respectively, to the torque coefficient
K = torque coefficient (not to be confused with coeffi- K.
cient of friction) Coefficient K 1 represents the torque resulting from fric-
T = torque, lbin. (Nmm) tion on the bearing face of the nut or bolt. This is about
W = bolt tension, lb (N) 50% of the total torque. K 1 varies with the coefficient of
The torque coefficient K is the critical parameter in the bearing face friction (0.120.20) and also with the effec-
above equation and can be calculated by various methods, tive radius of the bearing face, R B . The radius R B is
all of which represent approximations at best. It is primar-
ily influenced by the frictional conditions along the thread
flank and at the bearing surfaces. Relative resiliency of the Figure NF-A-1311
fastener and joint material also provide influence. For
these reasons, it is best to experimentally determine K
for critical applications using actual joint material and as-
sembly tools. Arbitrary values for K are often assigned in
noncritical applications as follows:
K = 0.20 for nonplated steel fasteners26
= 0.15 for plated fasteners26
Generally, the above K values are conservative, and the
actual preload induced by a given torque is slightly less
than calculated.
A more exact value of K is expressed by the following
equation, provided there is no thread interference such
as by a locknut or wrenchtight thread fit:
2
approximately the average radius of the bearing face if the K should be determined experimentally for the particular
contact pressure is uniform (NOTE: The exact theoretical application. Even so, K will vary considerably because of
values of R B for uniform contact pressure is variations in field conditions.
(d) There is little difference in K between coarse and
fine threads the value for coarse threads being only
about 21/2% higher than that for fine threads, which is neg-
ligible. This may be surprising to some people who may
where R o and R i are the outer and inner bearing radii, think that the small helix angle of fine threads should pro-
respectively.). duce tension with considerably less torque. Such is not the
If the bearing face is not true and flat and the pressure case, however, because 90% of the torque effort is con-
uniform, R B may vary from the inner radius of the bearing sumed by friction regardless of the thread pitch. This high
face to the outer radius. frictional effect also helps prevent loosening of the
Coefficient K 2 represents the torque resulting from fric- fastener.
tion on the contact flanks of the threads. This represents (e) The value of K as estimated does not apply at or near
about 40% of the total torque. K 2 varies with the coeffi- the failure point of the boltnut combination, particularly if
cient of thread friction (0.120.20) and also with the ra- the imminent failure is by stripping of threads. In this si-
dius of action of friction on thread faces, R T . The radius tuation, there may be galling of contact surfaces with
R T is approximately the pitch radius of the screw thread greatly increased K . Also, the thread angle, , becomes
if thread contact pressure is uniform. If contact pressure greatly distorted, further increasing K . These influences,
is not uniform, R T may vary from the inner to the outer ra- added to the normal variations of K , result in an indeter-
dius of contact of threads. The radius R T also will differ minate value of K . From this, it is evident that the torque
between coarse and fine threads, being larger for fine at failure cannot be taken as any reliable measure of the
threads, resulting in higher torque. K 2 is also slightly vari- strength of the fastener.
able with bolt tension because of increase in angle due to
NF-A-1320 TURNOFTHENUT
thread bending under load. The increase in angle may be
considerable at loads near thread failure by stripping. Turnofthenut tightening process encompasses a low
Coefficient K 3 represents the useful torque producing initial threshold torque to achieve snug tight condition
bolt tension. This is about 10% of the total applied torque. (achieved by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the
K 3 varies with R T (see K 2 above) and with the helix angle force of a person using a spud wrench) followed by a pre-
of the thread. The helix angle, C , varies with the bolt size, scribed amount of nut turning to develop the required
being somewhat larger for smaller bolt sizes. It also varies preload. This technique has gained acceptance for installa-
between coarse and fine threads, being slightly larger for tion of high strength structural bolts, and can be reliably
coarse threads. extrapolated to smaller fasteners as long as assumptions
upon which the technique is based are considered. For ex-
ample, the ideal snugtight condition will vary with each
NF-A-1312 Summary of Tensioning by Torque application.
Nut rotation through a prescribed amount eliminates
From the preceding discussion, the following summary the influence of all friction variables relative to final ac-
can be made: curacies. Also, a onehalf turn from snugtight of a coarse
(a) Equation NF-A-1311(1), using K = 0.2, gives a rea- thread nut on a bolt having a grip length (the clamping dis-
sonable estimate of torque required to produce a given tance between the bolt head and nut) less than 8 in. will
tension regardless of bolt size or thread pitch. This applies induce preload equal to or slightly over the bolts rated
only to washer faced or double chamfered hex nuts (or proof load. For grip lengths greater than 8 in., two thirds
bolts if bolt is torqued) having a width across flats of about of a turn beyond snugtight is recommended.
1.5 times the nominal diameter; to threads free of interfer-
ence such as provided by a locknut or wrenchtight thread NF-A-1330 LOADINDICATING WASHERS
fit; to steel bolts and nuts as normally produced and with- Loadindicating washers provide high reliability for in-
out added plating or lubrication; and to applications itial indication of fastener tension. The loadindicating
where the torqued bearing face of the fastener is in contact washer employs small raised areas on a ductile washer
with relatively smooth, unplatted, nonlubricated steel face that will deform under compression at the time of
surfaces. tightening. A feeler gage is employed to measure the
(b) A more exact theoretical expression of K can be ob- amount of deformation to supply the correct fastener ten-
tained from eq. NF-A-1311(3). sion. Although these devices are accurate within 10% of
(c) There is considerable variation in the value of K expected tension, they cannot be reused if the bolted joint
from bolt to bolt even when conditions are well controlled is disassembled for any reason. In addition, if the preload
because of variation in coefficient of friction. Therefore, relaxes over time, there is no way to check the bolt tension
where closer control of tension is required, the value of short of installing new loadindicating washers.
Presence or lack of lubrication during installation does or surfaces exists, bolt bending will occur, and this will
not have an adverse effect on the ability of the give an incorrect indication of actual bolt tension. Strain
loadindicating washer to measure the correct tension in gages installed 180 deg to each other on the bolt shank
the assembly. In general this simple method of measuring can be wired to effectively cancel out the effects of fasten-
tension can be considered a reliable, fairly economical way er bending.
to correctly tension bolted assemblies.
NF-A-1340 STRAIN GAGES NF-A-1350 FASTENER ELONGATION/EXTENSION

Strain gages provide high accuracy in measuring bolt Tightening by fastener elongation is a precise assembly
tension, but are also, by far, the most expensive way of ac- technique which involves tightening to a predetermined
complishing this task. value of tensile strain. Greatest accuracy is achieved when
The strain gage is a small electrical device with a foil or the prestrain value is obtained from loadextension curves
wire element that is mechanically bonded to the bolt of the fastener being used. However, in most instances,
shank. When the bolt is tightened the strain gage experi- calculation of the desired extension is made from Hookes
ences the same elongation as the bolt shank. When the foil law. This gives an approximate solution subject to varia-
or wire element is subjected to this strain, its cross section due to nonuniform cross sections.
tional area changes slightly causing its electrical resistance Using this method one must accurately measure the ax-
to change. Using sensitive equipment, a direct relationship ial elongation of the bolt shank or stud. If both ends of the
between resistance change and strain can be determined. fastener are accessible, a micrometer can be used to mea-
Application of strain gage technology requires highly sure this fastener elongation.
qualified personnel, careful care in application of the Tightening by extension is slow and expensive; conse-
gages, and careful calibration of equipment. Other vari- quently, its use is normally confined to special applica-
ables that can affect accurate strain gage readings are: tions, such as the assembly of very largediameter bolts
the orientation (alignment) of the strain gage element; or studs where torque wrenches or turnofthenut are
temperature effects. If out of squareness in the bolt heads impractical.
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-B

DESIGN ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR PLATE AND SHELL AND
LINEAR TYPE SUPPORTS
ARTICLE NF-B-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-B-1100 OBJECTIVE linear type supports. Most of the information herein per-
tains to linear supports while information on allowable
The objective of this Appendix is to provide background stresses and design stress intensities for plate and shell
on the allowable stresses and design stress intensities supports is referenced in Appendix III, Article III2000
used for the design of supports given in NF-3000. (Section III Appendices) for Class 1 of this Section. Gui-
dance is also given for special situations which arise in
NF-B-1200 SCOPE support design.
Included in this Appendix is the background on the al-

lowable stresses and design stress intensities, which are
a function of material test data, for plate and shell and
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-B-2000
LINEAR SUPPORTS METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ALLOWABLE
STRESSES
Allowable stresses are based on mechanical properties NF-B-2300 BEAM BENDING ALLOWABLE
of material, including yield and ultimate strength values, STRESS
as well as the particular loads applied to the linear mem-
ber, i.e., tension, bending, compression, shear, or combina- Classical beam flexure theory is used to establish bend-
tions of these loads. The pertinent mechanical properties ing stresses in linear support members. Allowable bending
of materials, the material yield and ultimate strength, al- stresses are established on the basis of this classical theo-
lowed for linear supports have been established and these ry, utilizing the following assumptions:
are presented in Section II, Part D of this division. The var- (a) Stresses are elastic.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ious stress factors given in NF-3300 for linear elastic ana- (b) Deflections are small.
lysis are applied in most cases to the yield or ultimate (c) Plane sections, normal to the member axis, remain
strength values at temperature. Stress multipliers referred plane after loading.
to as stress limit factors applicable to the various Service For a straight member in flexure, the bending stress is
Limits are given in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 for linear sup- tensile on one side of the neutral axis and compressive
ports. In general, these factors maintain elastic response on the other side. The allowable values given in
for lower limits, A and B, and they allow higher stress NF-3322.1(d) consider whether the stress is tensile or
and some possible permanent deformation for higher lim- compressive, since a compressive stress (limited to
its, C and D. twothirds of the critical buckling value) subjects a beam
element to possible buckling. Hence, the equations for al-
lowable stresses consider lateraltorsional buckling, by ac-
counting for the unsupported length of the compression
NF-B-2100 RESPONSIBILITY FOR flange, and they also consider local buckling, by providing
ASSIGNING YIELD AND maximum values of widththickness ratios of unstiffened
ULTIMATE STRENGTH VALUES elements of compression flanges.
(a) The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Committee

evaluates the available data and assigns strength values NF-B-2400 COMPRESSION MEMBER
for materials. ALLOWABLE STRESS
(b) Where suitable test data on a specific material are
not available, the Committee may base strength values Allowable stresses for linear support members which
on the available data for similar materials or on an evalua- are loaded in axial compression are based on classical the-
tion of known experience with the material. ory of centrally loaded columns. While most columns have
some applied primary or secondary bending moment, and
hence are beamcolumns as described in NF-B-2500, a col-
umn with a load eccentricity up to 1/1000 of its length is
NF-B-2200 TENSION MEMBER ALLOWABLE considered to be centrally loaded.
STRESS Compression members have two failure modes: elastic
buckling for long members; and inelastic buckling for
A tension member can fail either by excessive yielding short and intermediate members. These two modes are re-
of its gross area or by fracture of the net area at a load flected in the allowable stress equations in NF-3322.1(c)
smaller than that required to yield the gross area. To pre- which were originally developed for rolled carbonsteel
vent failure of a tension member (other than a pin structural shapes. End conditions of the column, i.e.,
connected or threaded member), NF-3322.1(a) imposes whether it is free, pinned, or fixed, play an important role
a factor of safety of 1.67 against yield of the entire member in the member allowable stress. These end conditions de-
and 2 against fracture of its weakest effective net area, termine the value of K, the effective length factor, which is
which is computed in NF-3322.8 and accounts for shear a parameter used in the allowable stress equations. The ef-
lag at the connection. For pinconnected and threaded fective length factor, K , is shown for different end condi-
members, the factors of safety are greater. tions in Figure NF-B-2400-1. The nomograph in
Figure NF-B-2400-2 gives effective length factors for semi these combined stresses and the resulting amplification
rigid end conditions in which beams or girders which of the bending stress induced by the applied axial load.
frame into the ends of columns provide partial moment re- The primary or secondary bending moment is one of the
straint. The nominal safety factors for Design and Service important parameters which is used in the interaction
Level A limits range from 1.67 for short columns, which equations. When the moment results in secondary stress,
exhibit postbuckling strength, to 1.92 for long columns, the limit of the plastic hinge criterion is increased by 50%.
which buckle elastically and often without warning. A However, to ensure conservatism, the stability limits are
further limitation on compression member stress is given not increased when the moment is shown to result in sec-
by the requirement that these stresses be limited to ondary stress. Limit analysis design methods in NF-3340
twothirds of the member capacity regardless of the ser- provide similar requirements for linear members loaded
vice limit. in combined axial compression and bending.
Flexural support members also developed compressive
stresses in flanges. The two failure modes associated with
these stresses are: local buckling; and lateral torsional
buckling. Local buckling is prevented by limiting the flange NF-B-2600 BOLTING ALLOWABLE STRESS
width/thickness ratios [ NF-3322.2(d)] and lateral
torsional buckling is prevented by the allowable bending Bolted connections are subjected to tensile and shear
stresses [NF-3322.1(d)]. loads. Shear connections are designed to be one of the
two types
(a) bearing connections
NF-B-2500 BEAMCOLUMN ALLOWABLE
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) friction connections
STRESS
Since bearing connections can be subjected to simulta-
Beamcolumns are those linear support members which neous shear and tension, an interaction equation is given
are subjected to combined flexure and axial compression. in NF-3324.6 to account for the combined stresses in the
The interaction equations of NF-3322.1(e)(1) account for bolts. Friction connections can also be subjected to
Figure NF-B-2400-1
Effective Length Factor for Various End Conditions
simultaneous shear and tension. However, the bolts will

Figure NF-B-2400-2
not be subjected to shear if the design had provided an
Alignment Chart for Effective Length of
adequate clamping force, T i .
Columns in Continuous Frames
The Code does not require specific values of bolt pre-
load force for either bearingtype or frictiontype connec-
tions. The design must consider such factors as applied
tensile load, susceptibility of the bolt material to stress
corrosion cracking (when preload is excessive) and possi-
ble opening of joints under high dynamic loads (when pre-
load is not great enough). These factors as well as the
applied shear in a friction connection will affect the selec-
tion of bolt preload and the method of applying that load,
i.e., by torque or tensioner.
ARTICLE NF-B-3000
PLATE AND SHELL SUPPORTS ALLOWABLE STRESSES
Allowable stresses for plate and shell type supports are stress intensities (S m ) are given in Appendices 1 and 2
established in accordance with NF-3220 (Class 1), of Section II, Part D. Stress multipliers, i.e., stress limit fac-
NF-3250 (Class 2 and MC), and NF-3260 (Class 3), respec- tors which are applicable to various levels of service limits
tively. For Class 1 construction allowable stresses are a are given in Tables NF-3221.2-1 and NF-3251.2-1. In gen-
function of the material design stress intensity (S m ) and eral, these factors maintain elastic response for lower lim-
for Class 2, 3, and MC construction the allowable stresses its, A and B, and they allow higher stresses and some
are a function of the material allowable (S ). The proce- possible permanent deformation for higher limits, C and D.
dures for establishing allowable stresses (S ) and design
ARTICLE NF-B-4000
MATERIALS WITH LOW RATIOS OF TENSILE TO YIELD STRENGTH
Allowable stresses for linear support members were low strain hardening by imposing a nominal factor of
originally developed for materials which exhibit a consid- safety of 2 on tensile strength on effective net area.
erable amount of strain hardening. The ratio of tensile to Table NF-B-4000 shows that minimum factor of safety is
yield strength for these materials (S u /S y ) is as high as 1.34 for a material with the lower bound S u /S y ratio of
1.61 for SA-36. However, materials with much lower va- 1.07. The minimum factor of safety for a high strain hard-
lues of S u /S y ratio are now included in the Code, and these ening material is about 1.43.
are covered by the NF design rules and allowable stresses Designers should use caution when materials with low
in NF-3000. The lower bound of S u /S y is 1.07. For certain S u /S y ratios are utilized in support design. The material
allowable stresses the factor of safety against failure is ductility and other material qualities, including S u /S y ra-
lower for materials with low S u /S y ratios than it is for tios, should be considered so that the minimum factors
high strain hardening materials. The allowable tensile of safety will not be less than those shown in
stress (see NF-B-2200) takes into account materials with Table NF-B-4000.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-B-4000
Factors of Safety for a Material With a Low
Value of S u /S y Ratio
Service Level Tension Bending Compression
A 2.00 1.78 1.67
B 1.50 1.34 1.50
C 1.43 1.43 1.50
D 1.43 1.43 1.50
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The ratio of tensile to yield strength (S u /S y ) is
1.07 for the factors of safety shown. This is a
lower bound for linear support materials al-
lowed by the Code.
(b) Materials with higher S u /S y ratios will have
higher factors of safety.
ARTICLE NF-B-5000
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
NF-B-5100 COPPERBASED ALLOYS steel columns. These alternate rules provide a minimum
factorofsafety of 2.15 for Design and Level A Service Lim-
Copperbased alloys are not intended for use as main its. The allowable compressive stress is a bilinear function
structural members. However, the Code does provide for of slenderness ratio, K l/r , rather than a parabolic function
their use in the load path of a support. Use of copperbased which is used for other materials.
alloys is restricted by NF-2122(b) to bearingtype applica-
tions. This restriction was incorporated because experi-
ence with these materials as main members in supports NF-B-5300 NONDUCTILE BEHAVIOR AND
is lacking and behavior of elements fabricated of these ma- STRESS CORROSION CRACKING
terials has not been confirmed with test data.
High strength materials are susceptible to brittleness
and stress corrosion cracking. Conditions which exacer-
NF-B-5200 STAINLESS STEEL bate these problems include
Allowable stresses for stainless steel are based on the (a) installation in a corrosive environment such as
same consideration given to other Code materials. These damp air
are discussed in NF-B-1000 and NF-B-2000. However, (b) longterm high stress including bolt preload and
stainless steel in compression requires special considera- dead loads
tion because the compression stressstrain curve is non- (c) residual stress caused by fabrication
linear rather than bilinear as it is for carbon steels. For (d) certain material manufacturing processes which en-
linear support members this difference in stressstrain re- hance hardness
lationships results in overestimating the column capacity The design specification can reduce the susceptibility of
of members fabricated from austenitic stainless steel. the support material to brittle fracture by requiring im-
To account for the different characteristics with austeni- pact testing per NF-2300. Also, designers should exercise
tic stainless steel exhibits when it is subjected to compres- caution when using high strength materials when sup-
sive stress, NF-3322.1 provides special rules for stainless ports are subjected to impact loads.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-C

DESIGN BASIS FOR LINEARTYPE SUPPORTS
ARTICLE NF-C-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-C-1100 OBJECTIVE NF-C-1200 SCOPE

The objective of this Appendix is to provide guidance for The data included in this Appendix is intended to pro-
the acceptable methods of linear design of supports that vide a reference for a uniform design practice in the design
meet the design requirements of Appendix XIII Winter of lineartype supports.
73 edition, Appendix XVII of 1974 through 1980 editions,
and NF-3300 beginning with the Winter 1982 addenda.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-C-2000
MATERIAL AVAILABILITY AND REQUIREMENTS DIFFERENCES
The grades of structural steel contemplated for use ex- application. In these cases, users are advised to make use
tend to a yield strength of 100,000 psi. It is not possible to of literature on the specific properties of concern and to
incorporate all factors that might merit consideration in exercise good engineering judgement.
the selection and specification of materials for a particular
ARTICLE NF-C-3000
AISC PARAGRAPH SELECTIONS
The Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erec- slenderness ratios, widththickness, plate girders and
tion of Structural Steel for Buildings of the American Insti- rolled beams, simple and continuous spans, gross and
tute of Steel Construction was used as a source of design net areas, connections, bolts, welds, builtup members, ex-
practice. The paragraphs selected for inclusion cover al- pansion, column bases, anchor bolts, and slender com-
lowable stress, combined stresses, stability and pression elements.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-C-4000
CROSSREFERENCE TO AISC
The paragraph number of the crossreference is given to contained in the Ninth Edition of the Manual of American
correlate the 1998 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Institute of Steel Construction (ASD) June 1, 1989 (see
Subsection NF to the Specification for the Design, Fabrica- Table NF-C-4000).
tion and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-C-4000
Design Basis for LinearType Supports
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3321.1(a) A5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(-c) B5.1, Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-a) G4
3321.2 K4 3322.2(e) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-b) G4
3322.1(a)(1) D1 3322.2(e)(1) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-c) G4
3322.1(a)(2) D3.1 3322.2(e)(2) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-d) G4
3322.1(b)(1) F4 3322.2(e)(2)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-e) G4
3322.1(b)(2) J4 3322.2(e)(2)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-f) G4
3322.1(c)(1)(-a) E2 3322.2(e)(2)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.6(f) J7
3322.1(c)(1)(-b) E2 3322.2(e)(2)(-d) Appendix B5 3322.6(g) B6
3322.1(d)(1)(-a) F1.1 3322.2(e)(3) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(1) B8
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(1) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(2) B8
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(2) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a)(1) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(3) L2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(3) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a)(2) Appendix B5 3322.8(a) B1, B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(4) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(5) F1.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(6) F3.1 3322.2(e)(4) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-a) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(7) B5.1 3322.2(e)(4)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-b) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-b) F1.1 3322.2(e)(4)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-c) B2
3322.1(d)(2) B5.1, F1.2 3322.2(e)(5) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d) B3
3322.1(d)(3) F2, F3.1 3322.2(e)(5)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(1) B3
3322.1(d)(4) F3.2 3322.2(e)(5)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(2) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-a) F1.3 3322.2(e)(5)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(3) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-b) F1.3 3322.2(e)(6) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-e) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-c) F1.3 3322.3(a) B10 3322.8(c)(2) B2
3322.1(d)(6) F2.2 3322.3(b) B10 3322.8(c)(3) B1
3322.1(e)(1) H1 3322.3(c) F6 3322.8(c)(4)(-a) D3.3
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3322.1(e)(1)(-a) H1 3322.4(a)(1) E4 3322.8(c)(4)(-b) D3.1, D3.2

3322.1(e)(1)(-b) H1 3322.4(a)(2) E4 3322.8(c)(4)(-c) D3.2
3322.1(e)(1)(-c) H1 3322.4(a)(3) E4 3322.8(c)(4)(-d) D3.2
3322.1(e)(1)(-c)(1) H1 3322.4(a)(3)(-a) E4 3322.8(c)(4)(-e) D3.3
3322.1(e)(1)(-c)(2) H1 3322.4(a)(3)(-b) E4 3323.1 A3.2
3322.1(e)(2) H2 3322.4(b) E4 3324.1(a) E4
3322.1(f)(1) J8 3322.4(c) E4 3324.1(b) J5.1
3322.1(f)(2) J8 3322.4(d) E4 3324.1(c) J1.9
3322.1(f)(3) J3.7 3322.4(e) E4 3324.2(a)(1) J1.2
3322.1(f)(4) J9 3322.4(e)(1) E4 3324.2(a)(2) J1.2
3322.1(f)(4)(-a) J9 3322.4(e)(2) E4 3324.2(b)(1) J1.3
3322.1(f)(4)(-b) J9 3322.4(e)(3) E4 3324.2(b)(2) K1.8
3322.1(g) Specification for ASD 3322.4(e)(4) E4 3324.2(b)(3) K1.6, K1.2
of Single Angle 3322.5(a) D2 3324.2(b)(4)(-a) K1.8
Members 3322.5(a)(1) D2 3324.2(b)(4)(-b) K1.8
3322.2(a)(1) B4 3322.5(a)(2) D2 3324.2(b)(4)(-c) K1.8
3322.2(a)(2) E1 3322.5(b) D2 3324.2(b)(4)(-d) K1.8
3322.2(b)(1) C2.1 3322.6(a) G1 3324.2(b)(5) E6
3322.2(b)(2) C2.2 3322.6(a)(1) G5 3324.2(c) J1.5
3322.2(c)(1) B7 3322.6(a)(2)(-a) K1.3 3324.2(d)(1) J1.4
3322.2(c)(2) B7 3322.6(a)(2)(-b) K1.4, K1.5 3324.2(d)(2) J1.4
3322.2(d)(1)(-a) B5.1 3322.6(b)(1) B5.1 3324.2(d)(3) J1.4
3322.2(d)(1)(-b) B5.1 3322.6(b)(2) B10 3324.3(a) J2.2.b
3322.2(d)(1)(-b)(1) B5.1 3322.6(b)(3) B10 3324.3(b)(1) J6
3322.2(d)(1)(-b)(2) B5.1 3322.6(c)(1) B10 3324.3(b)(2) J6
3322.2(d)(1)(-b)(3) B5.1 3322.6(c)(2) B10 3324.4(a) J2.5
3322.2(d)(2)(-a) B5.1 3322.6(c)(2)(-a) B10 3324.4(b) J1.10
3322.2(d)(2)(-a)(1) B5.1 3322.6(c)(2)(-b) B10 3324.5(b) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-a)(2) B5.1 3322.6(c)(2)(-c) B10 3324.5(b)(1) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-a)(3) B5.1 3322.6(d) G2 3324.5(b)(2) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-a)(4) B5.1 3322.6(e)(1) K1.8 3324.5(b)(2)(-a) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-b) B5.1 3322.6(e)(2) F4, G3 3324.5(b)(2)(-b) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-b)(1) B5.1 3322.6(e)(3)(-a) F5 3324.5(b)(3) J2.4
3322.2(d)(2)(-b)(2) B5.1 3322.6(e)(3)(-b) F5 3324.5(d)(1) J2.2.b
3322.2(d)(2)(-b)(3) B5.1 3322.6(e)(3)(-c) G4 3324.5(d)(2) J2.2.b
Table NF-C-4000
Design Basis for LinearType Supports (Cont'd)
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3324.5(d)(2)(-a) J2.2.b 3324.6(a) J3.4 3341.1(a) N1
3324.5(d)(2)(-b) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(1) J3.4 3341.1(b) N1
3324.5(d)(3)(-a) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(2)(-a)(1) J3.4 3341.1(c) N1
3324.5(d)(3)(-b) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(2)(-a)(2) J3.4 3342.1(a) N5
3324.5(d)(3)(-c) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(3)(-a) J3.5 3342.1(b) N4
3324.5(d)(4) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(3)(-b) J3.6 3342.1(c) N7
3324.5(d)(5) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(4) J3.6 3342.1(d) N6
3324.5(d)(6) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(5) J3.7 3342.1(e)(1) N7
3324.5(d)(7) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1) J3.9 3342.1(e)(2) N7
3324.5(d)(8) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1)(-a) J3.9, J3.7 3342.2(b)(1) N4
3324.5(d)(9) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1)(-b) J3.9
3342.2(b)(2) N4
3324.5(e)(1) J2.3.b 3324.6(c) J3.10
3342.2(b)(3) N4
3324.5(e)(2) J2.3.b 3324.6(d) J3.8
3342.2(b)(4) N4
3324.5(e)(3) J2.3.b 3324.6(e) J3.3
3342.2(b)(5) N4
3324.5(e)(4) J2.3.b 3324.6(f) J3.11
3342.2(c) N3
3324.5(e)(5) J2.3.b 3324.6(g) J10
3342.2(c)(1) N3
3324.5(e)(6) J2.3.b 3324.7 J9
3324.5(e)(7) J2.3.a 3331.1 K4, Appendix K 3342.2(c)(2) N3
3324.5(f) J2.1.a 3331.2 Appendix K4 3342.2(d)(1) N9
3324.5(f)(1) J2.1.a 3332.1 K4.1 3342.2(d)(2) N9
3324.5(f)(2) J2.1.a 3332.2 K4.1 3342.2(d)(3) N9
3324.5(f)(3)(-a) J2.1.a 3332.3 K4.1 3342.2(e)(1) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-b) J2.1.a 3332.4 K4.2 3342.2(e)(2) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-c) J2.1.a 3332.5 K4.3 3342.2(e)(3) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-f) J2.1.a 3332.5(a) K4.3 3342.2(e)(4) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-g) J2.1.a 3332.5(b) K4.3 3342.2(e)(5) N8
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-D

TOLERANCES
ARTICLE NF-D-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-D-1100 OBJECTIVE (b) Tolerances for castings, forgings, and extrusions

shall be in accordance with the individual manufacturers
It is recognized that design of supports is based on the standard.
use of nominal dimensions. This is not different from the (c) Cut to length linear
design of piping or equipment which also is based on nom-
(1) Hanger rods 1/2 in. (13 mm).
inal dimensions. Good design practice dictates that the de-
(2) Structural shapes, pipe, and tubing for critical as-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
signer consider the degree of deviation from nominal
sembly makeup dimensions 1/8 in. (3 mm). Squareness of
design which can be tolerated when supports are manu-
cut 1 deg, not to exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) offset.
factured as well as when they are installed. It is the intent
(3) Plates and bars for critical dimensions (as defined
of this Appendix to provide guidance to the designer as to
by the designer) 1/8 (3 mm). Squareness of cut 1 deg, not
the need for establishing such tolerances and dimensional
to exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) offset.
inspection requirements.
(4) Tolerances for noncritical dimensions shall be to
the individual manufacturers standard.
NF-D-1200 SCOPE (d) Clamps for pipe and tubing, formed and fabricated,
are shown in Table NF-D-1320-1.
Tolerances referred to in this Appendix apply only to (e) Angularity all forming operations 4 deg.
such values that may affect Code compliance of a support (f) Punched holes
and are not already addressed in the body of the Code. Any (1) Location center to edge, or center to center
other dimensions and tolerances associated with a sup- 1/8 in. (3 mm).
port are not addressed. (2) Diameter plus 0.2 times metal thickness or
minus 1/32 in. (0.8 mm).
NF-D-1300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (g) Drilled holes as specified on manufacturers
drawings.
NF-D-1310 MATERIAL (h) Machined parts as specified on manufacturers
Material supplied to an SA, SB, SFA Specification, or drawings.
Table NCA-7100-1, Dimensional Standards, need not have
material dimensional tolerances specified by the support NF-D-1330 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
designer. Material provided to those specifications and (a) Installation tolerances of supports need to be estab-
standards have their own tolerances and the use of nom- lished. There are two categories of installation tolerances
inal dimension design is adequate. However, tolerance(s) associated with a support. The first is a local installation
on any manufacturing operation(s) affecting the support tolerance affecting only the load capacity of the support it-
load capacity needs to be considered. self. The second is a global installation tolerance which
may affect the conclusions of the component or piping
NF-D-1320 FABRICATION TOLERANCES qualification.
The recommended fabrication tolerances are listed in (b) Table NF-D-1330-1 provides acceptable local instal-
(a) through (h). lation tolerances for supports. When support installation
(a) Tolerances for raw material such as strip, sheet, bar, meets these tolerances, any change in the established sup-
plate, pipe, tubing, structural and bar size shapes, bolting, port load capacity is considered minor to the point that ex-
hot wound springs, and cold wound springs shall be in ac- isting load capacity calculations are adequate. Global
cordance with recognized standards or specifications for installation tolerances should be addressed in the piping
this raw material. or component Design Specification or Design Report.
Table NF-D-1320-1
Clamp Tolerances
Pipe Centerline to
Clamp, I.D. Diameter Load Bolt Hole
Up to 2 in. (50 mm) 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Over 2 in. to 4 in. (50 to 100 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Over 30 in. (760 mm) 1/2 in. (13 mm) 1/2 in. (13 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Clamp I.D. equals pipe or tubing O.D. plus suitable clearance as established by the clamp manufacturer.
(b) Clamp I.D. measured at one half of the clamp width.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
I. Tolerances for General Measurement/Installation
A) Deviations in the location of the centerline of any attachment to the 1/4 in. (6 mm) C
flange centerline of building steel member(s) or support steel 1/ in.
member(s); if the support drawing specifies an offset, the attachment 4
(6 mm)
may be relocated to any distance towards the centerline of the member to
facilitate installation.
B) Deviation of backtoback distance for channels with rod type support. 1/4 in. (6 mm)
1/ in.
4
( 6 mm)
C) Deviation in the centerline angular orientation of support steel members 2 deg

in the horizontal or vertical planes.
D) Deviation in the centerline location of attachments between flanges of 1/4 in. (6 mm)
building steel members.
1/ in. 1/ in.
4 4
(6 mm) (6 mm)
Between Between
C
II. Tolerances for Attachment Installation

A) Deviations in the location of attachments to support steel member with 6 in. (150 mm)
two ends attached to the building structure (ends may be pinned or
fixed).
6 in.
(150 mm)
6 in.
(150 mm)
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports (Cont'd)
II. Tolerances for Attachment Installation (Cont'd)
B) Deviations in the centerline location of attachments along building steel 6 in. (150 mm)
member length.
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
Along Along
C) Deviation in conical angularity of snubber or strut attachments to 5 deg

support steel member or building steel member.
*1 deg need not be justified
5 deg is more reasonable and should be considered in the designers
calculations to allow 5 deg in practice.
** Subject to limitations defined by hardware manufacturer.
D) Deviation in angularity of rod type attachments to backtoback 5 deg

channels.
* 2 deg need not be justified
5 deg is more reasonable and should be considered in the designers
calculations to allow 5 deg in practice.
III. Tolerances for Support Steel Member Installation

A) Deviation in the length of steel member with two ends attached to the +3 in. (75 mm)
building structure (ends may be pinned or fixed). 6 in. (150 mm)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 in.
(150 mm) 3 in.
(75 mm)
B) Deviation of attachment centerline for a single steel cantilever member +3 in. (75 mm)
attached to the building structure. [Note (1)]
No limit
(75 mm)
3 in.
C
Attachment
Table NF-D-1330-1
III. Tolerances for Support Steel Member Installation (Cont'd)
C) Deviation of connection centerline for double (or more) cantilevers. See +1/4 in. (6 mm)
C
figure. [Note (2)]
No limit
Attachment
(75 mm)
3 in.
1/ in. No limit
4
(6 mm)
D) Deviation in kneebrace angle with respect to cantilever. + 5 deg, 3 deg
( + 5 deg
- 3 deg )
E) Deviation in brace work point with respect to cantilever. 1 in. (25 mm)
Work
point
1 in. 1 in.
(25 mm) (25 mm)
IV. Tolerances for Concrete Expansion Anchor (CEA)/Plate Installation

A) Deviation in conical angularity of CEA. 21/2 deg
21/2 deg
B) Deviation of centerline of attachment with respect to specified 1/2 in. (13 mm) 1/ in.
attachment point. 2
C (13 mm)
C
C
1/ in.
2
(13 mm)
C) Deviation of CEA location with respect to design location.* 1/4 in. (6 mm)
* Minimum edge distance must be maintained.
1/ in.
4 S
(6 mm)
S
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
Table NF-D-1330-1
V. Tolerances for Embedment Plate Attachment Installation
Deviation in attachment centerline with respect to embedment plate design location.
A) Individual embedment plate. 1/4 in. (6 mm) [Note
(3)]
B) Strip embedment plate: 1/4 in. (6 mm)

1) perpendicular to longitudinal axis [Note (3)]
2) along longitudinal axis 6 in. (150 mm)
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
VI. Tolerances for Standard Support Setting
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A) Deviation in variable spring load settings. 10% of specified
loads
B) Deviation in constant spring settings. 1
/4 in. (6 mm) of
specified position
C) Deviation in cold setting of snubber. 1
/4 in. (6 mm) of
specified setting
VII. Miscellaneous Tolerances
A) Deviation in gap between pipe and supporting steel member (in Gap (G) Size
nonsupport direction). 1/8 in. (3 mm) G < 1/8 in. (<3 mm)
+1/2 in. 1
/8 in. (3 mm)< G < 1/2 in. (13 mm)
(+13 mm), 0
+1/2 in. (13 mm), G > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
1/8 in. (3 mm)
B) Deviation in dimensions of piping support lugs applicable
measurement
tolerance.
C) Deviation in weld size. specified size
minimum, no
max.
D) Deviation in weld length.
For welds <3 in. (<75 mm) long 1/8 in. (3 mm), no
max.
For welds 3 in. (75 mm) long 1/4 in. (6 mm), no
max.
NOTES:
(1) A cantilever with a kneebrace connection has the same installation tolerances as a single cantilever. See items D) and E) for
knee-brace tolerances.
(2) Any cantilever member (single, both members of a double, etc.) can be shortened any distance required to complete installation.
(3) The designer shall determine the appropriate distances to be maintained between centerline or edge of attachments and edge of
embedment plates.
13 NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-E

DAMPERS, ENERGY ABSORBERS, AND SNUBBERS
ARTICLE NF-E-1000
NF-E-1100 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS load on the piping system due to restraint of thermal
movement at low start-up temperatures of the damper
NF-E-1110 SCOPE fluid.
The scope of Nonmandatory Appendix NF-E is confined
to a discussion of the three major types of dynamic re-
straints, providing information for their design, function, NF-E-1230 APPLICATIONS
application, and modeling methods.
Dampers are utilized to provide vibration control, re-
straint to pressure pulses in piping systems, and response
NF-E-1120 DEFINITIONS to seismic motion and other dynamic events.
Refer to NCA-9200 for definitions of damper, energy ab-
sorber, and snubber.
NF-E-1240 MODELING
Dampers are dynamic restraint supports that are inac-
NF-E-1200 DAMPERS
tive during static loading. Devices of this type transmit
NF-E-1210 DESCRIPTION their velocity proportional loads directly into the piping
Dampers are dynamic restraint supports used to reduce system or component. Several computer programs allow
cyclic motions caused by earthquakes, shock, or opera- the introduction of single dampers into the piping system
tional excitations such as those from vibration-coupled or component model. Conventional analysis may be used
machinery or pressure pulses in the pipe system (see where
NF-3412.5). Locally installed dampers reduce rapid dis- (a) modal system analysis is performed with damping
placements of the system and increase overall system as stipulated in the Design Specification
damping. (b) increased piping system damping is as determined
by tests
NF-E-1220 FUNCTION (c) an equivalent stiffness parameter is derived for each
One particular type of damper is a viscous damper. damper type from tests
Dampers of this type usually consist of a piston sur- (d) stiffness is a function of damper fluid temperature
rounded by a highly viscous fluid in a damper housing. Alternatively, a time history analysis may be performed
They react to displacement immediately, and are therefore with programs that allow the use of single element
effective against operational vibration with a wide range damping.
of amplitude and frequency as well as cyclic displace-
ments caused by earthquakes and other dynamic events.
The amount of damping provided is proportional to the re-
lative velocity between the damper piston and the hous- NF-E-1300 ENERGY ABSORBERS
ing. When immersed in the viscous liquid, the piston can
NF-E-1310 DESCRIPTION
move in all directions, limited only by the dimensions of
the damper housing. Damping is therefore possible in all Energy absorbers are linear or nonlinear supports that
six degrees of freedom at the damper attachment point incorporate parts designed to dissipate energy associated
to the piping system. The amount of damping and stiffness with dynamic movements (see NF-1213). Undesirable
is dependent on the damper fluid temperature. Some stress peaks are avoided by conversion of kinetic energy
types of dampers may cause significant resistance and through deformation or yielding of parts.
NF-E-1320 FUNCTION NF-E-1400 SNUBBERS

Several types of energy-absorbing restraints are avail- NF-E-1410 DESCRIPTION
able with different designs that achieve the same purpose.
Recurrent testing or maintenance is generally not re- Snubbers (also referred to as shock suppressors) are
quired due to the absence of parts subject to wear. Some engineered supports that are designed to allow pipe ther-
examples are summarized below. mal growth while resisting dynamic movements (see
(a) Wire-rope devices incorporate multistrand helical NF-3412.4).
cables trapped between plates that function as a spring
to allow for thermal expansion. These devices absorb en- NF-E-1420 FUNCTION
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ergy by the rubbing and sliding of cable strands when such There are two types of snubbers available: hydraulic
strands are subjected to dynamic displacements. The and mechanical.
energy-absorbing component of such devices is known (a) Hydraulic snubbers are velocity activated, and de-
as a wire-rope isolator. pend on fluid passing through an orifice from a high-
(b) Some types absorb energy by friction, which is gen- pressure portion of the fluid system to a lower pressure
erated in a reciprocating piston and cylinder arrangement. portion of the device. The controlled flow rate determines
(c) Some energy-absorbing restraints employ steel flex the linear displacement of the piston rod. When the snub-
plates that act as a spring, which allows for thermal expan- ber activates, it provides resistance to sudden movements
sion and also absorbs energy by plastic deformation of the that exceed a velocity threshold. Hydraulic snubbers
plates during dynamic movement. usually are designed to accommodate fluid volume
(d) Some devices absorb energy by forcing a wedge into changes caused by ambient temperature.
a tube at a predetermined load limit. Forces in excess of (b) Mechanical snubbers are either velocity or accelera-
the load limit are converted into deformation energy, tion activated. The snubber activates and resists sudden
rather than loading the attached components. movements that exceed a velocity or acceleration
threshold.
NF-E-1330 APPLICATIONS Although some versions of snubbers lock when acti-
Energy absorbers are suitable for use as dynamic re- vated, most allow limited movement after activation, gen-
straints or pipe whip restraints. erally referred to as release rate or bleed rate.
NF-E-1340 MODELING NF-E-1430 APPLICATIONS

Energy absorbers are modeled as inactive during analy- Snubbers are used to protect piping and equipment
sis of all nondynamic cases and rigid supports for dynamic from impulsive and cyclic loading conditions, such as
load cases. Since their behavior is generally nonlinear, earthquake or severe hydraulic transients, while acting
some type of equivalent linearization technique is re- as passive restraints during normal expansion and con-
quired for analysis using linear programs. traction of piping. Snubbers are employed in situations
where use of rigid supports is prohibited due to large ther-
mal growth.
NF-E-1440 MODELING
Snubbers are modeled as inactive during analysis of all
nondynamic load cases, and as rigid supports for the dy-
namic load cases.
ENDNOTES
1 NCA-9200 provides the definition of support and other terms.

2 Stops do not include snubbers and dampers (NF-3412.4).
3 Any postweld heat treatment time which is anticipated to be applied to the material or item after it is completed shall
be specified in the Design Specifications. The Certificate Holder shall include this time in the total time at temperature
specified to be applied to the test specimens.
4 When impact testing is required, the methods of Nonmandatory Appendix G (Section III Appendices) may be used as
an alternative design procedure for assuring protection against nonductile fracture.
5 Lowest Service Temperature (LST) is the minimum temperature which will be maintained inside the containment
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vessel during the plant operation (for supports within containment), or alternatively, the calculated or measured
minimum metal temperature of the support expected during normal operation when the pressure within the compo-
nent exceeds 20% of the system hydrostatic test pressure.
6 The requirements for impact testing of the heataffected zone (NF-4335.2) may result in reduced test temperatures or
increased toughness requirements for the base material.
7 The methods given in the Appendix of SFA 5.9, Specification for CorrosionResisting Chromium and ChromiumNickel
Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes, shall be used to establish a welding and sampling method for the pad,
groove, or other test weld to ensure that the weld deposit being sampled will be substantially free of base metal
dilution.
8 The word rod s as used in this Subarticle is intended to cover rods that are threaded. It also includes forged piston
rods if they are threaded for a portion of their length. It does not apply to unthreaded bar stock.
9 This definition of stress intensity is not related to the definition of stress intensity applied in the field of fracture
mechanics.
10 Stress means the maximum normal stress (principal stress).
11 For determination of effective net area, see NF-3322.8.
12 For this case, K is taken as unity.
13 Only eq. NF-3322.1(d)(5)(-b)(19) is applicable to channels.
14 See NF-3322.3 for further limitations in plate girder flange stress.
15 For the use of larger C b values, see: The Structural Stability Research Council, Guide to Stability Design Criteria for
Metal Structures, 3rd edition, p. 135.
16 When parts in contact have different yield stresses, S y shall be the smaller value.
17 Webs of flexural members are covered by the provisions of NF-3322.6(a) and NF-3322.6(e)(2) and are not subject to
the provisions of this paragraph.
18 Assumes net area of plate at widest hole as basis for computing compression stresses.
19 Equation NF-3322.6(e)(2)(45) recognizes the contribution of tension field action.
20 Members having a different thickness at the pinhole location are termed builtup.
21 As used here, interior support may be taken to include a rigid frame knee formed by the junction of a column and a
sloping or horizontal beam or girder.
22 For qualification and inservice testing information pertaining to snubbers, refer to ASME QME1 subsection QDR and
ASME OM Code subsection ISTD.
23 SNTTC1A is a Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification pub-
lished by the American Society for Nondestructive Testing, 1711 Arlingate Lane, P.O. Box 28518, Columbus, Ohio
432280518.
24 Personnel qualified by examination and certified to previous editions of SNTTC1A are considered to be qualified to
the edition referenced in Table NCA-7100-2 when the recertification is based on continuing satisfactory performance.
All reexaminations and new examinations shall be in accordance with the edition referenced in Table NCA-7100-2.
25 Employer as used in this Article shall include: N type Certificate Holders; Material Organizations Certificate Holders;
Material Organizations who are qualified in accordance with NCA3842; and organizations who provide subcon-
tracted nondestructive examination services to organizations described above.
26 In applications where additional lubricants such as greases, oils, and waxes are applied to the fasteners, K may be
assumed to be as low as 0.12.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 ASME Boiler and
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) is An International Historic Mechanical
Engineering Landmark, widely recognized as a model for codes and standards worldwide.
Its development process remains open and transparent throughout, yielding living
documents that have improved public safety and facilitated trade across global markets
and jurisdictions for nearly a century.
ASME also provides BPVC users with integrated suites of related offerings:
referenced standards training and development courses
related standards and guidelines ASME Press books and journals
conformity assessment programs conferences and proceedings
You gain unrivaled insight direct from the BPVC source, along with the professional
quality and real-world solutions you have come to expect from ASME.
For additional information and to order:

Phone: 1.800.THE.ASME (1.800.843.2763)
Email: customercare@asme.org
Website: go.asme.org/bpvc13
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
60003F
5/15/13 5:22 PM

Asme Iii-1 NF 2013

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Asme Iii-1 NF 2013

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2013 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code

2013 ASME Boiler &

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee

Two Park Avenue New York, NY 10016 USA

ASME collective membership mark

The above ASME symbol is registered in the U.S. Patent Office.

ASME is the trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

NF-3480 Procedure for Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components

Subsection NE Class MC Components

IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers

VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers

VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers

VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications

X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels

XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components

XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks

STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO

TECHNICAL OVERSIGHT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (TOMC) MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP

A. P. Amato, Staff Secretary E. Upitis R. E. McLaughlin, Chair D. Tompkins

COMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (BPV I)

D. I. Anderson, Chair R. E. McLaughlin A. Chaudouet, Chair M. Ishikawa

Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (BPV II)

A. Appleton, Chair W. C. Mack K. L. Hayes J. M. Tanzosh

T. Xu, Secretary G. Yang R. S. Hill III, Chair R. J. Masterson

Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (BPV III)

Working Group on Quality Assurance, Certification, and Stamping

R. A. Ladefian, Chair M. Higuchi C. T. Smith, Chair M. R. Minick

Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (BPV III)

Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III)

Subgroup on Management Resources (BPV III)

Subgroup on Polyethylene Pipe (BPV III)

D. Kwon O. Yoo E. Lever S. Sandstrum, Alternate

A. N. Haddad, Chair K. Lively W. K. Sowder, Jr., Chair S. Lee

Working Group on Allowable Stress Criteria (BPV III)

T. Asayama, Chair G. H. Koo M. H. Jawad, Chair R. I. Jetter

R. J. Masterson J. Munshi, Chair T. C. Inman

T. L. Bedeaux, Chair P. A. Molvie J. E. Batey, Chair R. W. Kruzic

Subgroup on General Requirements/Personnel Qualifications and

M. Wadkinson, Chair M. R. Klosterman F. B. Kovacs, Chair N. A. Finney

Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (BPV V)

Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (BPV V)

Subgroup on Materials (BPV IV) G. W. Hembree, Chair S. Johnson

Subgroup on Water Heaters (BPV IV)

Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (BPV V)

N. A. Finney, Chair R. W. Kruzic B. F. Hantz, Chair A. Mann

Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (BPV VIII)

D. T. Peters, Chair G. T. Nelson J. Keltjens, Chair E. H. Perez

Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (BPV VIII)

COMMITTEE ON WELDING AND BRAZING (BPV IX)

T. Melfi W. D. Doty, Honorary Member

Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment (BPV VIII)

Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV IX)

M. Bernasek, Chair T. Melfi G. C. Park, Chair D. W. Lamond

Executive Committee (BPV XI)

A. N. Haddad P. L. Sturgill M. J. Ferlisi

Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)

T. J. Griesbach, Chair H. S. Mehta E. B. Gerlach, Chair R. D. Kerr